SCM340

Process Manufacturing

Date
Training Center
Instructors
Education Website

Participant Handbook
Course Version: 2005/Q2
Course Duration: 5 Days
Material Number: 50073626

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright
Copyright © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without
the express permission of SAP AG. Additionally this publication and its contents are provided
solely for your use, this publication and its contents may not be rented, transferred or sold without
the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without
prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.

Trademarks

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,
S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered
trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,
VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks
of Citrix Systems, Inc.

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World
Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP
EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries
all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.

Disclaimer
THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,
INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST
PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED
SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

About This Handbook
This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this
course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following
typographic conventions are also used.
Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. These
include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well
as menu names, paths, and options.
Also used for cross-references to other documentation
both internal (in this documentation) and external (in
other locations, such as SAPNet).

2005/Q2

Example text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of
graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include
report names, program names, transaction codes, table
names, and individual key words of a programming
language, when surrounded by body text, for example
SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names
and their paths, messages, names of variables and
parameters, and passages of the source text of a
program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that
you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the
documentation.

<Example text>

Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you
replace these words and characters with appropriate
entries.

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii

About This Handbook

SCM340

Icons in Body Text
The following icons are used in this handbook.
Icon

Meaning
For more information, tips, or background
Note or further explanation of previous point
Exception or caution
Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor’s
presentation.

iv

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

Contents
Course Overview ......................................................... vii
Course Goals ...........................................................vii
Course Objectives .....................................................vii

Unit 1: Introduction........................................................ 1
SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process
Chain with In-House Production...................................3
Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders.............. 10

Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing ............................ 41
Process Order Structure and Elements ............................ 42
Process Order Processing ........................................... 56

Unit 3: Order Creation .................................................. 71
Order Creation ........................................................ 73
Master Data Selection................................................ 90
Scheduling ............................................................144
Costing ................................................................163

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release .................... 173
Process Planning ....................................................175
Material Availability Check ..........................................177
Batch Determination .................................................218
Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation ........270
Resource Reservation...............................................292
Order Release ........................................................319

Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) ..................... 353
Principle of Process Management (I)..............................354

Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal .......................... 367
Material Staging Options............................................368
Goods Issue Posting ................................................376

Unit 7: Confirmations .................................................. 409
Confirmation Procedures ...........................................410
Confirmations and Material Movements ..........................451

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

v

Contents

SCM340

Unit 8: Goods Receipt, Order Settlement, and Order
Archiving.................................................................. 477
Goods Receipt .......................................................478
Order Settlement .....................................................510
Archiving and Deleting ..............................................527

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) .................... 535
Process Management - Overview .................................537
Process Instructions, Control Recipes, and Process
Messages .........................................................540
Link to Process Control Systems ..................................595
Elements of PI sheets ...............................................600
Manufacturing Data Access ........................................ 611
SAP OPC Data Access .............................................614

Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation ................................... 625
Process Data Evaluation............................................626

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP .................... 641
Production in Compliance with GMP - Overview ................643
Digital Signature......................................................646
Approved Process Orders ..........................................681
Material Identification and Material Reconciliation...............696
Integration with Quality Management ............................. 711
Batch Record .........................................................736
Batch Derivation......................................................752

Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning .... 771
Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements.......772
Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC
System.............................................................776
Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP
SCM(APO) System ..............................................792

vi

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

Course Overview
This training course teaches you about the application of process orders.

Target Audience
This course is intended for the following audiences:

Members of the project team responsible for implementing process orders in
production (consultants, organizers).
Managers and employees in production areas (work schedulers, production
schedulers, foremen, workers).

Course Prerequisites
Required Knowledge


Knowledge of PPC
SCM300 (Supply Chain Manufacturing Overview)
PLM115 (Basic Data for Process Manufacturing)

Recommended Knowledge




SAPSCM (mySAP SCM Overview)
SCM100 (Planning (ERP) Overview)
SCM200 (Extended Planning (SCM))
SCM240 (Production Planning (ERP))
SCM250 (Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (APO PP/DS))

Course Goals
This course will prepare you to:


Use process orders
Make important system settings for executing process orders
Acquire knowledge on other selected topics relating to process manufacturing

Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:


2005/Q2

Explain where process orders fit in within the Supply Chain Management
Carry out the individual steps of process order management
Use the main order management functions

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

vii

Course Overview

SCM340



Make important system settings
Take integration relationships into account
Learn about further special functions by studying on your own

SAP Software Component Information
The information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Components
and releases:

viii

ECC 5.0

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

Unit 1
Introduction
Unit Overview
Topics:



SAP solutions and components for representing the process chain with
in-house production
Integration between manufacturing and planning
Production types
Order-controlled production using process orders


Application areas

Characteristics

Process flow

Master data
Integration with batch management

Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:





Name the SAP solutions and components for representing the process chain
with in-house production
Explain the integration between manufacturing and planning
Explain the characteristics of order-controlled production using process
orders
Describe the cross-application process flow of process manufacturing
Name the master data required for process orders
Show the logistics process ranging from sales planning to process order
creation in a simple application example in the ECC System

Unit Contents
Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process
Chain with In-House Production .................................................3
Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders .............. 10

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

1

Unit 1: Introduction

SCM340

Exercise 1:
Exercise 2:
Exercise 3:
Exercise 4:
Exercise 5:

2

Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders ...... 23
Sales and Operations Planning ............................. 27
Demand Management ........................................ 31
Material Requirements Planning ............................ 33
Process Order Creation ...................................... 35

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process
Chain with In-House Production

Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for
Representing the Process Chain with In-House
Production
Lesson Overview
This lesson familiarizes you with the SAP solutions and components for
representing the process chain with in-house production.

Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Name the SAP solutions and components for representing the process chain
with in-house production
Explain the integration between manufacturing and planning

Business Example
You first obtain an overview of the current product strategy of SAP.
For this purpose, you familiarize yourself with suitable solutions to represent your
delivery, procurement and production processes.
Of particular interest to you is the integration and realization in the manufacturing
area within these solutions.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

3

Unit 1: Introduction

SCM340

mySAP ERP Solution Map (2005)

Figure 1: mySAP ERP Solution Map (2005)

Within the long-term product strategy of SAP, you are provided with a mySAP
Business Suite consisting of a number of solutions.
The Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) solution is a comprehensive solution
that enables a company to efficiently plan, control and monitor complex delivery,
procurement and production networks.
This solution supports a synchronized and close interaction between all
departments involved (and all people involved) within a logistics chain.
Customers, sales, production planning, manufacturing, warehouse management,
purchasing, and vendors are all included in this complete solution.
The mySAP ERP solution includes a number of areas (see above).
You will find further information on the individual components of the mySAP
ERP solution at
http://www.sap.com/solutions/businessmaps/solutionmaps/
and also here, under Cross-Industry Business Maps.

4

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process
Chain with In-House Production

mySAP SCM Solution Map (2004)

Figure 2: mySAP SCM Solution Map (2004)

mySAP Supply Chain Management (SCM) is a comprehensive solution that
enables an enterprise to efficiently plan, realize and monitor complex delivery,
procurement and production relationships (supply chains).
This solution supports a synchronized and close interaction between all
departments involved (and all people involved) within a logistics chain.
Customers, sales, production planning, manufacturing, warehouse management,
purchasing, and vendors are all included in this complete solution.
In particular, the processing of cross-company processes and the collaborative
planning and procurement processes, which also allow for a connection to an
open market place, are a main feature of this solution.
The mySAP SCM solution includes a number of areas (see above).
You will find further information on the individual components of the mySAP
SCM solution at
http://www.sap.com/solutions/businessmaps/solutionmaps/
and also here, under Cross-Industry Business Maps.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

5

Unit 1: Introduction

SCM340

SAP Components

Figure 3: SAP Components

Various SAP components are used to technically realize the individual solutions.
The in-house production is mainly supported by the SAP component SAP ECC.
Production planning can be performed with the components SAP ECC and
SAP SCM.
SAP SCM provides considerably enhanced planning tools (Advanced
Planner and Optimizer (APO)), an enhanced Inventory Management function
(Inventory Collaboration Hub (ICH)) and Event Management (EM).
SAP BW (Business Information Warehouse) is used for separate data retention
for variable evaluations.
Interfaces for realizing the integration of ECC with SCM, BW or CRM are
provided with an appropriate plug-in.
The interface between ECC and SCM(APO) is called the Core Interface (CIF).
Sales orders can be managed using the component SAP CRM, but also in SAP
ECC.

6

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process
Chain with In-House Production

Integration between Manufacturing and Planning

Figure 4: Integration between Manufacturing and Planning

Production control represents the central part of a complex process chain ranging
from an independent requirement (planned or customer requirements) through to
the goods issue of finished products.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

7

Unit 1: Introduction

SCM340

Planning: Overview

Figure 5: Planning: Overview

Planning covers several steps that are executed using various components
provided in ECC and/or SCM(APO). It is possible, and makes sense, to use both
systems together for planning.
The systems are integrated via the CIF interface (CIF: Core Interface).
Demand planning uses past sales quantities to calculate the future demand
program (determination of planned independent requirements). Flexible planning
(ECC), standard SOP (ECC) or demand planning (SCM(APO-DP)) can all be
used to perform this.
Supply Network Planning (SCM(APO)) allows for cross-plant planning of all
procurement operations.
Sales orders are usually entered in the ECC System. The ATP check of a sales
order can take place globally in SCM(APO).
Material requirements planning can be performed in both systems. In ECC,
capacity requirements planning is executed separately in a second step, while
quantities and capacities are planned simultaneously in SCM(APO PP/DS).
Production is performed on the basis of planned orders.
Here, SAP supports different production types.

8

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: SAP Solutions and Components for Representing the Process Chain with In-House Production Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the SAP solutions and components for representing the process chain with in-house production • Explain the integration between manufacturing and planning 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 9 .

Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of the characteristics of order-controlled production using process orders. All rights reserved. 10 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • • • • Explain the characteristics of order-controlled production using process orders Describe the cross-application process flow of process manufacturing Name the master data required for process orders Show the logistics process ranging from sales planning to process order creation in a simple application example in the ECC System Business Example Finally. you show the logistics process ranging from sales planning to process order creation in the ECC System. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you inform yourself about: • • The cross-application process flow of process order manufacturing The master data required for process orders In a simple application example. 2005/Q2 .

stability of production. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a manufacturing company has various requirements with regard to shop floor control. product complexity. Correspondingly. various production types are supported. production infrastructure. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Manufacturing: Production Types Figure 6: Manufacturing: Production Types Depending on the manufacturing process. and further criteria. 11 .

update. All rights reserved. Is used to describe. by the criteria of product complexity and product stability. and monitor all production-relevant factors. 2005/Q2 . process orders are typically used in the different areas of the process industries. Is the main control instrument in production. Process orders can be used for different manufacturing processes that are identified.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Application Areas for Process Orders Figure 7: Application Areas for Process Orders Due to their special functions. Is usually based on a master recipe. Process Order (I) A process order • • • • 12 Describes the request asking production to manufacture a material for a specific date in a specific quantity in a production run. for example. © 2006 SAP AG. both planned and actual. Defines which resources (means of production) are used and which ingredients are required to manufacture the material.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. its quantities and dates. All of this information is specified in the planned data and updated in the form of actual production data. All rights reserved. as well as the production costs and cost objects to which the costs are to be assigned. the means of production and production methods to be used. 13 .SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Process Order (II) Figure 8: Process Order (II) A process order describes which material is to be produced.

Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (1) Figure 9: Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (1) Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (2) Figure 10: Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (2) 14 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (3) Figure 11: Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (3) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 15 .

2005/Q2 .Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (4) Figure 12: Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (4) Cross-Application Process Flow Figure 13: Cross-Application Process Flow 16 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

The batches of one material are managed separately in stock. and inventory management. SAP defines a material as a substance or commodity that is bought or sold on a commercial basis. or created in production. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. therefore. there is integration with the ECC batch management and the ECC quality management. It contains information that is often used in the same manner for similar objects and business processes. Master Data for Process Orders Figure 14: Master Data for Process Orders Master data is data in the SAP System which typically remains unchanged for a long period of time. The material master record is the central master record in logistics. This quantity. In general. consumed. represents a unit with unique specifications. or is used. With regard to the production process. a batch is a quantity of a specific material produced during a given production run. Process order execution is. Process order management controls the in-house production process of products (if required together with process management). costing. A batch is a unique subset of a material.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Process order management represents a central part of a complex process chain ranging from an independent requirement (planned or customer requirement) through to the goods receipt of finished products. integrated with the functions of capacity requirements planning. All rights reserved. for example. In addition. and interfaces with laboratory information systems and process control systems. 17 .

batch master records always depend on their corresponding material master records. A production version determines which alternative BOM is used in combination with which master recipe for process order manufacturing. the Batch Management Requirement indicator must be set in the material master record. the data of a material master record is valid for all batches assigned to it. 2005/Q2 . Batches are created for a material.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 The master data for resources describes the means of production in the production process. Material BOMs describe the structure of products that are produced in a company. 18 © 2006 SAP AG. The master data of master recipes describes the manufacture of one or more materials in one production run without relating to a particular order. If a material is to be produced and managed in batches. In contrast. Material and Batch Figure 15: Material and Batch In the SAP System. They are usually created and maintained from the master recipe (integrated maintenance). All rights reserved. In general. a batch master record contains data that uniquely identifies a batch and characterizes it as a non-reproducible unit. The characteristic batch specifications are assigned using characteristics from the classification system in the material master and are inherited by the corresponding batch master records.

SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders A batch master record is usually created by the system in the background for certain business transactions (such as goods receipt). Batch Management Batch management: • • Is integrated into all the applications of the ECC System Supports the management and processing of batches in all the business processes of a company Features: • • • • • • • • • Batch number assignment Batch specification (using classification system) Batch determination Active ingredient management (batch-specific units of measure) Batch derivation Batch record Batch where-used list Batch status management Batch Information Cockpit The batch management is a function for all industry sectors. 19 . It is particularly important for the following industry sectors: • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Chemical industry Pharmaceuticals Food industry Cosmetics industry Health and hygiene industry Retail industry © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Users can also create batch master records directly in master data maintenance.

If a batch with certain specifications is required in the supply chain. A batch master record can be used to assign a batch to a material at different places along the supply chain. batch determination is. for example. In production.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Batch Management in Supply Chain Management Figure 16: Batch Management in Supply Chain Management Batch management is used in all areas of logistics. 20 © 2006 SAP AG. For example. A batch can be traced across the whole supply chain. it is posted to stock with a batch number and can be uniquely identified there. if the partial quantity of a material produced in batches leaves a production process (process order) with certain specifications. from the receipt of the raw materials to processing in production and the creation of the final product. the batch determination function can be used to find suitable batches in stock. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. all the way through to sales and delivery to the customer. used in process orders to find and withdraw suitable material components for the product to be produced.

© 2006 SAP AG. Various production types are available within the SAP solutions. A further essential characteristic is the use of functions for GMP-compliant production. 21 . Using process orders is an order-oriented production control option. All rights reserved. An important characteristic is the option to process orders using process management.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Introduction: Topic Summary • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Production is a central part of a complex process chain starting with a production requirement and ending with the goods issue of finished products. Process orders have specific characteristics which determine how they are used in the different areas of process manufacturing industries. which is realized with the use of PI sheets and links to process control systems (PI-PCS interface).

Unit 1: Introduction 22 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise 1: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • Define a process order • Name the characteristics of process order-controlled production • Explain the cross-application process flow of process manufacturing Business Example You will get an overview of order-controlled production using process orders. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 23 .

Refer to the information on the page “Cross-Application Process Flow” in your participant handbook. Production planning. and Shop floor control to the main menu entries. Describe the cross-application process of process manufacturing. 24 © 2006 SAP AG. 3. All rights reserved. Try to assign the terms Master data maintenance. Refer to the information on the pages “Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (1) – (4)” in your participant handbook. 2. Get an overview of the ECC menu structure with regard to the functions of production planning and control for process industries. (II)” pages in your participant handbook to answer the question. How can a process order be defined? Refer to the “Process Order (I). 2005/Q2 .Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Task: 1. Get an overview of the characteristics of process order-controlled production. 4.

a) SAP Menu → Logistics → Production-Process → (. Refer to the information on the page “Cross-Application Process Flow” in your participant handbook. All rights reserved. Production planning. MRP) Shop floor control (process order. Describe the cross-application process of process manufacturing. production campaign. Answer: See exercise 3. How can a process order be defined? Refer to the “Process Order (I). Get an overview of the characteristics of process order-controlled production. Try to assign the terms Master data maintenance.. and Shop floor control to the main menu entries.. production planning.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Solution 1: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Task: 1. Answer: See exercise 4.) The menus appear for • • • • 2005/Q2 Master data maintenance Production planning (sales and operation planning. process planning. 25 . (II)” pages in your participant handbook to answer the question. process management) Product cost planning © 2006 SAP AG. Refer to the information on the pages “Process Order-Controlled Production: Characteristics (1) – (4)” in your participant handbook. Get an overview of the ECC menu structure with regard to the functions of production planning and control for process industries. Answer: See exercise 2.

Unit 1: Introduction 26 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

If the relevant system settings were made. You will then disaggregate the planned product group quantities of your production plan to the individual product group members and transfer the results to demand management (to determine the planned independent requirements). Refer to the page “SC Planning: Overview” in your participant handbook to get an overview of alternative planning scenarios. You will first create a sales plan for this product group and then a production plan based on this sales plan. we could also use Flexible Planning in the ECC System or Demand Planning in SAP(APO) as an alternative. you will carry out a simple example illustrating the cross-application process of process manufacturing from sales planning through to process order creation in the ECC System. All rights reserved. Task: 1. 27 .SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise 2: Sales and Operations Planning Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. You will display the product group T-ICE## Ice cream products. we assume that the basis for a demand program to be created (determination of planned independent requirements) is Sales and Operations Planning in the ECC System. you will be able to: • Display a product group • Create a sales plan and a production plan • Perform disaggregation of product group quantities and a transfer to demand management Business Example Note: In this exercise and the following exercises. In this scenario. Display product group T-ICE## in plant 1100. Which product group members does the product group have? Which disaggregation proportions (in %) have been defined for the individual product group members? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Note: The active version already exists. Start planning in the change mode. start planning in the change mode. the planned sales quantities should be 10. 28 Disaggregate the planned product group quantities of your production plan to the individual product group members and transfer the results to demand management. Based on your sales plan. Starting from the month after next.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Member number 2. create a production plan for your product group T-ICE##. Plant Proportion (%) Create a sales plan for your product group T-ICE## in plant 1100. Choose Active version. All rights reserved.000 kg per month for five consecutive months. 4. 3. Choose Active version. Specify that the production plan is to be created synchronous to the sales plan. 2005/Q2 . © 2006 SAP AG. For this reason.

Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Solution 2: Sales and Operations Planning Task: 1. 29 . All rights reserved. Number Member (Plant) Proportion (%) T-FI1## 1100 60 T-FI2## 1100 30 T-FI3## 1100 10 Create a sales plan for your product group T-ICE## in plant 1100. 2. Display product group T-ICE## in plant 1100. The Display Product Group: Members (Materials) screen appears. Choose Active version. Which product group members does the product group have? Which disaggregation proportions (in %) have been defined for the individual product group members? Member number a) Plant Proportion (%) Logistics → Production .Process → SOP → Product Group → Display Product group: T-ICE## Plant: 1100 Choose Enter.

Note: The active version already exists. Choose Active version. 2005/Q2 .Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Starting from the month after next. All rights reserved. Enter the sales quantities of 10. 3. Save your sales plan. Specify that the production plan is to be created synchronous to the sales plan. a) Logistics → Production .Process → SOP → Planning → For Product Group → Change Product group: T-ICE## Plant: 1100 Choose Active version. start planning in the change mode. Start planning in the change mode. For this reason. the planned sales quantities should be 10.. create a production plan for your product group T-ICE##.. starting from the month after next. Choose Edit → Create product. 4. a) (…) → SOP → Disaggregation → Transfer Product Group to Planning Product group: T-ICE## Plant: 1100 Version: A00 Choose the transfer strategy Prod. The Change Sales and Operation Planning screen appears. 30 © 2006 SAP AG. plan → Synchronous to sales Save your planning results.) → SOP → Planning → For Product Group → Change Choose Active version.000 kg per month for five consecutive months. a) (.000 kg per month for five consecutive months. Choose Transfer now.plan for mat. or PG members as proportion of PG. Disaggregate the planned product group quantities of your production plan to the individual product group members and transfer the results to demand management. Based on your sales plan.

and T-FI3##. Compare the planned independent requirement quantities for materials T-FI1##. All rights reserved. T-FI2##. Task: 1. What information do the stock/requirements lists provide? 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise 3: Demand Management Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you will be able to: • Display planned independent requirements • Display current stock / requirements lists Business Example You will display the planned independent requirements for your product group T-ICE##. 31 . and T-FI3## in the planning table with the planned values in the production plan and the percentage disaggregation proportions in the product group. T-FI2##. Display the current stock/requirements lists for materials T-FI1##. You will also display the current stock/requirements list for materials T-FI1##. 2. and T-FI3##. Display the planned independent requirements for your product group T-ICE##. T-FI2##.

2005/Q2 . Reqmts Display: Planning Table screen appears. It also provides information on the quantities that are available today and on the requirements dates. and T-FI3##. and T-FI3## in the planning table with the planned values in the production plan and the percentage disaggregation proportions in the product group.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Solution 3: Demand Management Task: 1. a) Logistics → Production . 32 © 2006 SAP AG. and T-FI3## together with the requirement quantities and requirement dates. All rights reserved. Display the current stock/requirements lists for materials T-FI1##. 2. T-FI2##. Compare the planned independent requirement quantities for materials T-FI1##. What information do the stock/requirements lists provide? a) (…) → Demand management → Environment → Stock/reqmts list Material: T-FI1## or T-FI2## or T-FI3## Plant: 1100 At this stage.Process → Production Planning → Demand Management → Planned Independent Requirement → Display Product group T-ICE## Plant: 1100 Choose Enter. the list contains the planned independent requirements for materials T-FI1##. T-FI2##. The Plnd Ind. Display the planned independent requirements for your product group T-ICE##. T-FI2##.

2. Note: If the system settings were made accordingly. Task: 1. the planning run could also be carried out in SCM(APO) and the planned orders resulting from it could be transferred to the ECC System. You display the planning results in the form of planned orders in the stock/requirements list. you will be able to: • Perform a planning run • Evaluate the planning result Business Example You will run material requirements planning for your material T-FI1##. Carry out multilevel single-item planning for your material T-FI1## in plant 1100.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise 4: Material Requirements Planning Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1## after the planning run. All rights reserved. 33 . Which MRP data has been changed? Which MRP elements are new? 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Multi-Level Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 Choose Enter. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1## after the planning run.Process → MRP → Planning → Single-Item. The system displays an info message prompting you to check the input parameters. a) Logistics → Production . All rights reserved. Choose Enter again to start the MRP run.Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Solution 4: Material Requirements Planning Task: 1. 34 © 2006 SAP AG. the system created planned orders to cover the planned independent requirements. 2005/Q2 . Which MRP data has been changed? Which MRP elements are new? a) (…) → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 As a result of the MRP run. Carry out multilevel single-item planning for your material T-FI1## in plant 1100. 2.

All rights reserved. The process order would then be created in the ECC System and mirrored back to SCM (APO). and so on) can only take place in the ECC System. planned order conversion could also be triggered in SCM (APO). 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Convert the planned order for the earliest date to a process order from within this list. Note: If planning was carried out in SCM (APO). you will be able to: • Perform a planned order conversion Business Example You will convert one of your planned orders to a process order. Task: 1. 35 . confirmations. Process order processing (material movements. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FI1##. Refresh the list after the conversion and describe what has changed.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Exercise 5: Process Order Creation Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise.

After saving. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FI1##. 36 © 2006 SAP AG.General Data screen appears in the process order: Save the process order. The order number is displayed in the data on the MRP element.Process → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 Double-click the MRP element PLOrd for the first planned order and in the dialog box choose Additional Data for MRP Element → ProcOrd After converting. The new process order is displayed as a new MRP element. Convert the planned order for the earliest date to a process order from within this list. Refresh the list after the conversion and describe what has changed. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. the Create Process Order: Header . Choose the Refresh icon. a) Logistics → Production .Unit 1: Introduction SCM340 Solution 5: Process Order Creation Task: 1. The original planned order was deleted after the conversion. the stock/requirements list appears again.

37 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order-Controlled Production using Process Orders Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the characteristics of order-controlled production using process orders • Describe the cross-application process flow of process manufacturing • Name the master data required for process orders • Show the logistics process ranging from sales planning to process order creation in a simple application example in the ECC System 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved.Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the SAP solutions and components for representing the process chain with in-house production • Explain the integration between manufacturing and planning • Explain the characteristics of order-controlled production using process orders • Describe the cross-application process flow of process manufacturing • Name the master data required for process orders • Show the logistics process ranging from sales planning to process order creation in a simple application example in the ECC System 38 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

All rights reserved. 39 .SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. Name some basic functions of process orders © 2006 SAP AG. Which SAP components are available for the realization of production planning? 2.

Which SAP components are available for the realization of production planning? Answer: • • 2. 2005/Q2 .Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. among other things) Archiving and retrieval Bulk processing © 2006 SAP AG. activities and time events Goods receipt Period-end closing (order settlement. All rights reserved. SAP ECC SAP SCM(APO) Name some basic functions of process orders Answer: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 40 Status management Production based on a production version Scheduling Determination of capacity requirements Costing Batch number assignment Manufacture of co-products Availability checks Material quantity calculation Active ingredient management Batch determination Resource network Resource selection Printing of shop floor papers Creation of control recipes for the process control level Material staging through reservations Confirmation of quantities.

................. 41 . All rights reserved....... 42 Exercise 6: Process Order Structure and Elements ............... 45 Lesson: Process Order Processing ............................................. 56 Exercise 7: Process Order Processing ...............Unit 2 Order Structure and Processing Unit Overview Topics: • • • Process order structure and elements Process order screens and data Process order processing Unit Objectives After completing this unit.................... 59 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG....... you will be able to: • • • • Describe the structure and elements of a process order Navigate in the process order and explain the most important screens and their contents Describe process order processing Carry out order processing up to PI sheet maintenance in the ECC System using a simple scenario Unit Contents Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements ...

Process Order Structure Figure 17: Process Order Structure 42 © 2006 SAP AG. You will get an overview of which information can be found on which screens. All rights reserved. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the data structure for a process order. 2005/Q2 . you will be able to: • • Describe the structure and elements of a process order Navigate in the process order and explain the most important screens and their contents Business Example You analyze the data structure of a process order: • • You will learn how to navigate in the order.

as well as material components and process instructions are copied to the process order. you define formulas to calculate the material quantities to be used or obtained in a production process. The phases' processing sequence in time is defined in relationships. as well as specific material attributes (for example. This resource assignment also applies to all phases assigned to the operation. The material list is made up of components representing the materials entering and leaving the production process. yield ratios of the products and remaining materials. 43 . Elements of the Process Order Figure 18: Elements of the Process Order 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. taking into account the mixing ratios of the ingredients.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Operations describe the different steps required during the production process. active ingredient). All rights reserved. A process order is usually created using a master recipe. In material quantity calculation. phases are assigned to the operations. Exactly one resource is assigned to an operation. The operation and phase structure together with its relationships and assigned resources. For a more detailed description of these steps. as well as temporarily existing materials and their planned quantities. It also defines the assignment of these material components to the phases of the order according to their appearance in the process.

A control key must be entered for both the phases and the secondary resources. Data for process management: Alternative 2: From SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2. All rights reserved. further (secondary) resources can be assigned to operations and phases. Using XSteps enables you to maintain process instructions in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. not for operations). for example. Confirmations are entered for phases and secondary resources (however. and costing. and capacity requirements planning. 44 © 2006 SAP AG. If required. such as the execution time. capacity requirements planning. A standard value is a planned value used to carry out a phase or secondary resource. Data for process management: Alternative 1: Process instructions are structures that are used to transfer data from the process order to process control (PI sheet or process control system). the data for the process management can alternatively be maintained in the form of XSteps (execution steps). A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available. costing. scheduling.00). Secondary resources can. 2005/Q2 . The control key is used to determine how an operation or phase is to be treated in operative applications such as process orders. determining capacity requirements. be included in scheduling. which are then transferred to the control recipe destinations defined for the phases. The dates and capacity requirements for operations are derived from the corresponding phases.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Phases are used for scheduling. The same business transactions can be carried out for secondary resources as for phases. or capacity requirements planning. Standard values are used for calculations in costing. Process instructions are assigned to the phases of a process order.00 (EA_APPL_2. and costing. The process instructions are combined into control recipes.

Call up your process order in the change mode. • • You will learn how to navigate in the order. for more detailed information. Task 1: 1. you will be able to: • Navigate in process orders Business Example You will analyze the data structure for the process order you created for material T-FI1## . All rights reserved. it can be found. Instead. Navigate to the order header. In addition. refer to the information on the pages “Process Order Structure” and “Elements of the Process Order” in your participant handbook. Hint: The following exercises are only meant to give you an idea of how you can become familiar with the process order. get an overview of the navigation between the Header. If required.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Exercise 6: Process Order Structure and Elements Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Task 2: Analyze the structure and elements of your process order. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FI1##. 2. F1 and F4 help if required. use Application help and. Operations (Operation Overview) and Materials (Material List) views. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. screens. and so on. 1. 45 . You will get an overview of which information can be found on which screens. They do not claim to be complete as far as the screens and data to be displayed are concerned. First. they will give you an overview of the type of information stored in orders and on which views.

Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Order number: __________________________ (Order) type: __________________________ (Double-click to navigate to the order type-dependent parameters) Material: __________________________ (You can navigate to the material master record. Header – Control Data Write down the following: Reservation/Purc.: __________________________ Header .) Plant: __________________________ Status: __________________________ 3. Header – Goods Receipt Write down the following: Stock type: __________________________ Storage location: __________________________ Note that a batch number can be assigned for product T-FI1##. Get an overview of the different order header screens. Header-Assignments Write down the following: MRP controller: __________________________ Production scheduler: _________________________ Planning plant: __________________________ Planned order: __________________________ Note that a sales order (from SD) and an inspection lot (from Quality Management) could be assigned.General Data Note the quantities and dates fields. Header .req. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.: __________________________ Plan cost calculation: __________________________ Capacity reqmts: __________________________ Schedule automat.Dates/Quantities Continued on next page 46 © 2006 SAP AG. Note that delivery tolerances can be defined.

Get an overview of the operations. Get an overview of the detailed data for a phase. and the resource network from this view. the BOM.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Note the quantities and dates fields for the planned order and process order. .Process instructions 5. phases. 47 .Secondary resources and . . and resources assigned to the order. Note that a control recipe destination is defined per phase. Header – Administrative Data Write down the following: Created/User: __________________________ Navigate to Settlement rule (Header → Settlement rule) Which settlement receiver should the costs for this order be settled on? (Account assignment) category: __________________________ Settlement receiver: __________________________ Receiver short text: __________________________ 4. Note that you can use the corresponding icons (or by choosing the menu path Operation →) to navigate per phase to the lists .Material assignments. Header – Master Data Write down the following: Production version: __________________________ Recipe group/Recipe: __________________________ BOM/Alternative: __________________________ Resource network: __________________________ You can navigate to the master recipe. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Navigate to the Operation overview for the order. Compare the entries with the corresponding data in the master recipe.Relationships.

Note the planned phase processing time. All rights reserved. Note that the Batch field for components to be handled in batches is ready for input and the Batch determination function is available for determining a suitable batch. Write down the following: Material: __________________________ (You can navigate to the material master record.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 General Data Write down the following: Resource: __________________________ (You can navigate to the resource. Note the Phase assignment of the components. 7. Qty/activities Note the fields for the quantities and activities to be confirmed and already confirmed. Compare the entries with the corresponding data in the master recipe. Navigate to the Material list for the order.) Control key: __________________________ Status: __________________________ Confirmation number __________________________ Cost: __________________________ Standard Values Write down the following: Operation quantity: __________________________ Standard value: __________________________ Activity type: __________________________ Dates Note the fields for scheduled and confirmed phase dates. Note that the Material quantity calculation function is available for a detailed definition of the quantity proportions. Get an overview of the detail data for a material component. 2005/Q2 . Get an overview of the material components that have been assigned. 6.) Continued on next page 48 © 2006 SAP AG.

Get an overview (by choosing Operation → Functions for phase / for operation → . 10. 9.) of the functions for the order.. 8. All rights reserved.) of the . note the data on quantities and dates as well as the General indicators for the material component.Lists .Logs .Costs for the order.) Status: __________________________ Reservation: __________________________ Movement type: __________________________ In addition. Get an overview (by choosing Process order → Functions ...) of the functions for the phases or operations.. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.. Get an overview (by choosing Goto → .SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Storage location: __________________________ __________________________ (if defined) Batch: __________________________ __________________________ (if defined) (The Batch field is ready for input for components to be handled in batches. 49 ..

it can be found. use Application help and. 2005/Q2 . On the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box. First. Operations (Operation Overview) and Materials (Material List) views. Hint: The following exercises are only meant to give you an idea of how you can become familiar with the process order. and so on. choose the Change element (F8) icon. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FI1##. they will give you an overview of the type of information stored in orders and on which views. F1 and F4 help if required. Navigate to the order header. Choose the Header icon and the Operations and Materials buttons to navigate in the process order.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Solution 6: Process Order Structure and Elements Task 1: 1. get an overview of the navigation between the Header. for more detailed information. Call up your process order in the change mode. In addition. 1. All rights reserved. refer to the information on the pages “Process Order Structure” and “Elements of the Process Order” in your participant handbook. If required. They do not claim to be complete as far as the screens and data to be displayed are concerned. Instead. Task 2: Analyze the structure and elements of your process order. a) 2. screens. Write down the following: Order number: __________________________ Continued on next page 50 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 Double-click the MRP element PrcOrd.

Get an overview of the different order header screens. Header-Assignments Write down the following: MRP controller: __________________________ Production scheduler: _________________________ Planning plant: __________________________ Planned order: __________________________ Note that a sales order (from SD) and an inspection lot (from Quality Management) could be assigned. 51 .) Plant: __________________________ Status: __________________________ a) 3.General Data Note the quantities and dates fields.: __________________________ Plan cost calculation: __________________________ Capacity reqmts: __________________________ Schedule automat. Note that delivery tolerances can be defined. Header . Header – Control Data Write down the following: Reservation/Purc. All rights reserved.Dates/Quantities Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Header – Goods Receipt Write down the following: Stock type: __________________________ Storage location: __________________________ Note that a batch number can be assigned for product T-FI1##.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements (Order) type: __________________________ (Double-click to navigate to the order type-dependent parameters) Material: __________________________ (You can navigate to the material master record.: __________________________ Header .req. Choose the Header icon.

Note that a control recipe destination is defined per phase. 4. All rights reserved.Relationships.Material assignments. Navigate to the Operation overview for the order. Choose Header → Settlement rule to navigate to the settlement rule. . 2005/Q2 . Header – Master Data Write down the following: Production version: __________________________ Recipe group/Recipe: __________________________ BOM/Alternative: __________________________ Resource network: __________________________ You can navigate to the master recipe.Secondary resources and . Note that you can use the corresponding icons (or by choosing the menu path Operation →) to navigate per phase to the lists . Get an overview of the operations. Compare the entries with the corresponding data in the master recipe. and the resource network from this view. Header – Administrative Data Write down the following: Created/User: __________________________ Navigate to Settlement rule (Header → Settlement rule) Which settlement receiver should the costs for this order be settled on? (Account assignment) category: __________________________ Settlement receiver: __________________________ Receiver short text: __________________________ a) Choose the corresponding tab to navigate to the order header.Process instructions Continued on next page 52 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Note the quantities and dates fields for the planned order and process order. and resources assigned to the order. the BOM. phases. .

Note that the Batch field for components to be handled in batches is ready for input and the Batch determination function is available for determining a suitable batch. General Data Write down the following: Resource: __________________________ (You can navigate to the resource. Choose the corresponding tabs to navigate further. Get an overview of the material components that have been assigned. 53 .) Control key: __________________________ Status: __________________________ Confirmation number __________________________ Cost: __________________________ Standard Values Write down the following: Operation quantity: __________________________ Standard value: __________________________ Activity type: __________________________ Dates Note the fields for scheduled and confirmed phase dates. a) Double-click the phase number to navigate to the phase detail screens. 6. Choose Operations. Note the planned phase processing time. Get an overview of the detailed data for a phase. All rights reserved. Navigate to the Material list for the order. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements a) 5. Qty/activities Note the fields for the quantities and activities to be confirmed and already confirmed. Compare the entries with the corresponding data in the master recipe. Note the Phase assignment of the components.

. a) 54 Operation → Functions for phase / for operation →.. 2005/Q2 .. 10.. All rights reserved.. a) 8.Costs for the order.) of the functions for the order.) of the . Get an overview (by choosing Operation → Functions for phase / for operation → ... a) Process order → Function → . Double-click the item number to navigate to the component detail screens.Logs ... Write down the following: Material: __________________________ (You can navigate to the material master record. note the data on quantities and dates as well as the General indicators for the material component.) Status: __________________________ Reservation: __________________________ Movement type: __________________________ In addition. a) 7. Get an overview (by choosing Process order → Functions . Choose Materials. Choose Goto → .) Storage location: __________________________ __________________________ (if defined) Batch: __________________________ __________________________ (if defined) (The Batch field is ready for input for components to be handled in batches. Get an overview of the detail data for a material component.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Note that the Material quantity calculation function is available for a detailed definition of the quantity proportions..) of the functions for the phases or operations. Get an overview (by choosing Goto → .. a) 9. © 2006 SAP AG..Lists .

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Structure and Elements Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure and elements of a process order • Navigate in the process order and explain the most important screens and their contents 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 55 .

56 © 2006 SAP AG. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • Describe process order processing Carry out order processing up to PI sheet maintenance in the ECC System using a simple scenario Business Example You release the order. and create and send the corresponding control recipe. All rights reserved. you display the PI sheet for the order.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Processing Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about process order processing. Finally. 2005/Q2 . Process Order Processing Figure 19: Process Order Processing The graphic shows the main steps that are carried out during process order management to control process manufacturing in the SAP system.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. deviation determination. and settlement are generally periodic work for Cost Object Controlling and are usually processed in the background.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Processing Process order processing can be divided into the following steps: • • • Process planning Process order execution/process management Order closing Many of these activities can run automatically or in the background so that manual processing of orders is minimized. WIP determination. 57 . A number of settings must be made (Customizing) for each step to allow for successful order processing.

All rights reserved. .Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 58 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Create the control recipe for the order. 4. Refer to the information on the page “Process Order Processing” in your participant handbook. On the Material list screen. Get an overview of process order processing. 5. You will then release your process order and create the control recipe for the order. Task 1: 1. 59 . All rights reserved. Release the process order. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Processing Exercise 7: Process Order Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 6. Manually perform a capacity availability check for the order. On the Header – Goods Receipt screen. manually carry out batch determination for one or more material components. Manually perform a material availability check for the order. Task 2: Call up your process order in the change mode. Call up your process order in the change mode. 1. You will send the control recipe and display the PI sheet that is created when you send the control recipe. you will be able to: • Describe process order processing • Perform a process order release • Create and send control recipes • Display the PI sheet Business Example You will first get an overview of the main steps that are carried out in the course of process order management. 2. manually assign the following number for the batch of material T-FI1## to be produced: Batch: SCM340 3.

Select the PI sheet created when the control recipe was sent. Enter the PI sheet in the display mode. control recipes are sent automatically in a job. 2005/Q2 . Task 3: 1. Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. All rights reserved.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing SCM340 Save the order. Task 4: 1. 60 © 2006 SAP AG. Your control recipe destination is of the type PI sheet. Hint: In the production plant. Hint: You will not process the process order any further in this unit. Send the control recipe and refresh the list display.

See exercise On the Material list screen.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Processing Solution 7: Process Order Processing Task 1: 1. Manually perform a material availability check for the order. batch determination is carried out in the dialog mode. a) Choose Capacity (Capacity availability check) in the application toolbar. 1. Manually perform a capacity availability check for the order. 61 . manually carry out batch determination for one or more material components. a) Manual batch determination: Select a material component and choose the Execute batch determntn icon in the lower toolbar. a) 5. Hint: For component T-RI2##. a) Call up the stock / requirements list or Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change 2. 4. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Call up your process order in the change mode. Get an overview of process order processing.ATP) in the application toolbar. All other components to be handled in batches are assigned in the background. a) See exercise Task 2: Call up your process order in the change mode. Refer to the information on the page “Process Order Processing” in your participant handbook. On the Header – Goods Receipt screen. manually assign the following number for the batch of material T-FI1## to be produced: Batch: SCM340 a) 3. Choose Material (Material availability check . All rights reserved.

## ICE Choose Enter. choose Refresh to update the list. control recipes are sent automatically in a job. All rights reserved. The Control Recipe Monitor: Overview screen appears.Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing 6. The control recipe status is Created. Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. Control recipe creation: Choose the Create control recipe icon in the application toolbar. Select the PI sheet created when the control recipe was sent. Your control recipe destination is of the type PI sheet. The control recipe must now have status Sent. After sending. a) Release: Choose the Release icon in the application toolbar. Hint: In the production plant. Task 4: 1. Send the control recipe and refresh the list display. Save the order. 2005/Q2 . Create the control recipe for the order. a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Plant 1100 Process order: Process order number or Destination address: GRP. SCM340 Release the process order. Select your control recipe and choose Send. Task 3: 1. Continued on next page 62 © 2006 SAP AG.

63 . a) Select your PI sheet using (…) → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find or (…) → Process Management → PI Sheet → Worklist . Hint: You will not process the process order any further in this unit. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Process Order Processing Enter the PI sheet in the display mode.Maintain Choose appropriate selection criteria.

Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing

SCM340

Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:

Describe process order processing

Carry out order processing up to PI sheet maintenance in the ECC System
using a simple scenario

64

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Unit Summary

Unit Summary
You should now be able to:

Describe the structure and elements of a process order

Navigate in the process order and explain the most important screens and
their contents

Describe process order processing

Carry out order processing up to PI sheet maintenance in the ECC System
using a simple scenario

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

65

Unit Summary

66

SCM340

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge

2005/Q2

1.

Describe the basic structure of a process order.

2.

Describe the basic steps of process order processing.

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

67

Test Your Knowledge

SCM340

Answers
1.

Describe the basic structure of a process order.
Answer:

Order header

Operation overview

with operation, phase and resource information

Material list

68

with material, quantities, dates and status information

with information on the material components

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Test Your Knowledge

2.

Describe the basic steps of process order processing.
Answer:

Process planning


Order creation

Resource/line reservation

Resource selection

Batch number assignment (product)

Batch determination (components)

Material quantity calculation
Process order execution


Order release

Shop paper printing

Control recipe sending

PI sheet maintenance

Sending process messages

Material staging/material withdrawal

Confirmations

In-process

quality inspections

Goods receipts
Order closing



2005/Q2

Variance calculation
Order settlement
Batch record
Archiving and deleting

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

69

Unit 2: Order Structure and Processing

SCM340

70

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Unit 3
Order Creation

Unit Overview
Topics:





Options for creating process orders
Activities in the process order creation
Order type
Production version selection
Scheduling
Planned costs

Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:











2005/Q2

Use the different options for creating a process order
Explain the activities involved in process order creation
Define order types and order type-dependent parameters in Customizing
Make the appropriate Customizing settings for master data selection
Make the appropriate material master settings for selection using a
production version
Explain the selection using a production version in manual process order
creation and planned order conversion
Use the production version selection based on a quota arrangement
Select production versions manually
Read production versions
Include master recipes
Perform the following Customizing activities for scheduling process orders:
define scheduling types, set scheduling parameters, define scheduling
margins
Trace the scheduling of process orders in detail
Determine the planned costs for a process order.

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

71

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Unit Contents
Lesson: Order Creation ......................................................... 73
Exercise 8: Order Creation................................................. 77
Lesson: Master Data Selection ................................................ 90
Exercise 9: Order Type ....................................................103
Exercise 10: Master Data Selection .....................................107
Exercise 11: Production Version Selection Based on a Quota
Arrangement ................................................................123
Exercise 12: Manual Production Version Selection ....................139
Lesson: Scheduling.............................................................144
Exercise 13: Scheduling...................................................147
Lesson: Costing .................................................................163
Exercise 14: Costing .......................................................165
Exercise 15: Mass Processing............................................167

72

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Order Creation

Lesson: Order Creation
Lesson Overview
This lesson informs you about the different options for creating a process order.

Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Use the different options for creating a process order
Explain the activities involved in process order creation

Business Example
You test the different ways of creating a process order.
You get an overview of the system activities involved during order creation.

Process Planning: Order Creation

Figure 20: Process Planning: Order Creation

The graphic illustrates the main activities and functions of process planning.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

73

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

A process order can be created manually or by converting a planned order. The
production quantity and planned order dates are either copied from the planned
order or entered manually. A production version with a master recipe is selected
as the basis for the process order. It provides a detailed description of the planned
manufacturing process.
During order creation, the process order is scheduled, the required capacity
requirements are determined, and the planned costs are calculated. Data and
formulas from the master recipe and the assigned resources are used as a basis
for these activities.
In capacity requirements planning, the capacity requirements of order operations
are dispatched at the corresponding resources (resource reservation).
During the material availability check, different criteria can be used to check
whether the material components needed for the order are available.
Batch determination can be used for the system-aided assignment of batches
required for production.

Alternative Ways of Creating a Process Order

Figure 21: Alternative Ways of Creating a Process Order

The graphic illustrates the different ways of creating process orders.
In the course of integrated production planning and control, process orders are
usually created by converting planned orders created in material requirements
planning. In addition, you can always create a process order manually.

74

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Order Creation

When converting planned orders into process orders, the material to be produced
as well as the order quantity, basic dates, and production version are automatically
copied to the process order. The production scheduler can choose the planned
orders to be converted from a material-specific time window (opening period).
During process order creation, a master recipe is usually selected through a
production version and used as the basis for the process order. There are situations
when you may want to create a process order without using a production version
and/or master recipe. In Customizing, you can specify whether a master recipe
must be selected for a process order and define the selection criteria to be used.
You can also create a process order without reference to a material, for example, to
test an automated plant line.
When you create a process order manually, you can use an existing order as a
template to copy from.

Special Creation Variants

Figure 22: Special Creation Variants

The graphic illustrates further order creation variants that are used in special cases.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

75

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Activities Involved in Process Order Creation

Figure 23: Activities Involved in Process Order Creation

The graphic shows the main functions that are carried out when you create a
process order. By making the corresponding Customizing settings, you can control
how these activities are performed.
All these functions are usually carried out in the background (except for order type
specification and manual quantity and dates entry in scenario (2)). The production
scheduler does not have to do anything unless a problem occurs (for example, if a
master recipe does not exist).
Other functions that can run automatically if the relevant Customizing settings
have been made, are, for example:
Material availability, batch creation for the product, order classification, order
release

76

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Order Creation

Exercise 8: Order Creation
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Perform the individual conversion of a planned order

Perform the partial conversion of a planned order

Perform the collective conversion of planned orders

Create a process order with reference to a material

Create a process order with a template

Create a process order without reference to a material

Business Example
You will get an overview of the different ways to create a process order.

Task 1:
1.

Display the stock/requirements list for your material T-FI1##.
Write down the order number of the planned order that comes next in time.
____________________________________________________________

Task 2:
1.

Convert the planned order of Task 1 to a process order. Use individual
conversion.
Choose process order type PI01 for conversion.

Task 3:
Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.
1.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

77

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

2.

Which changes have occurred?

3.

Write down the order number of the planned order that comes next in time.

Task 4:
1.

Convert the planned order from Task 3 to a process order. Use partial
conversion.
Use process order type PI01 for partial conversion.
Convert half of the planned quantity.

Task 5:
Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.
1.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.

2.

Which changes have occurred?

3.

There are two more planned orders in the list.
Display the two orders.
Write down the order number, the planned opening date, and the assigned
MRP controller for each of these planned orders.

Continued on next page

78

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Order Creation

Planned order

Planned Opening
Date

MRP controller

Task 6:
1.

Convert the two planned orders from Task 5 to process orders. Use collective
conversion.
Enter the following criteria for planned order selection:
Plant:

1100

MRP controller:

I##

Creation:

Creation date of the planned order
that is chronologically first Creation date of the planned order
that is chronologically last

Choose process order type PI01 for conversion.

Task 7:
Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.
1.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.
Which changes have occurred?
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Task 8:
1.

Create another process order with reference to your material T-FI1##.
Choose process order type PI01 and production plant 1100.
Enter 14,000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and today as
the basic start date.
Save the order and write down the order number.
____________________________________________________________
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

79

use the order created in Task 8 as a template to copy from. Enter 1 PU (activity unit) as the total quantity and any start date you wish. Now create a process order of process order type PI01 in plant 1100 without reference to a material. 80 © 2006 SAP AG. Create the order with reference to recipe 1 Clean-out of recipe group T-CLEAN. This time. 2005/Q2 . In the distribution rules of the settlement rule. Task 10: 1. define cost center 4271 Production food as the settlement receiver for the clean-out order. All rights reserved.000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today + 1 week as the basic start date. Enter 16.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Task 9: 1. Create another process order of order type PI01 in plant 1100.

General Data screen then appears. The system converts the planned order to a process order.Ord. The Create Process Order: Header . ____________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production . 81 . Write down the order number of the planned order that comes next in time. a) (…) → MRP → Planned Order → Convert to Proc. All rights reserved. Display the stock/requirements list for your material T-FI1##. Use individual conversion.SCM340 Lesson: Order Creation Solution 8: Order Creation Task 1: 1.Process → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 The planned order number is displayed in the data on the MRP element. Task 2: 1. Choose process order type PI01 for conversion. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. → Individual Conversion Planned order: Planned order number Process order type: PI01 Choose Enter. Convert the planned order of Task 1 to a process order. Save the process order.

Logistics → Production . 2005/Q2 . a) 2. All rights reserved. 1. Convert the planned order from Task 3 to a process order. Answer: The planned order number is displayed in the data on the MRP element. Continued on next page 82 © 2006 SAP AG. The planned order was deleted after conversion. 3. Use process order type PI01 for partial conversion. Use partial conversion. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Task 3: Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.Process → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 Which changes have occurred? Answer: The new process order is displayed as a new MRP element. Write down the order number of the planned order that comes next in time. Task 4: 1.

The planned order is still available. 83 . Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##. All rights reserved. a) 2. 3.Ord. the planned opening date. Reqmts Create: Initial screen appears. The planned order was firmed. Task 5: Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##. Change the quantity to 3. Logistics → Production . There are two more planned orders in the list.Process → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 Which changes have occurred? Answer: Due to the partial conversion. Choose Enter.000 kg and save your order. The following information message appears: Orders will be generated for partial quantities before saving. 1. Display the two orders. The planned order is partially converted to a process order. The system proposes a target quantity of 6. The Plnd Ind. and the assigned MRP controller for each of these planned orders. Write down the order number. The planned order quantity has been reduced by the converted quantity. → Partial Conversion Planned order: Planned order number Process order type: PI01 The Partial conversion indicator is set. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) (…) → MRP → Planned Order → Convert to Proc.SCM340 Lesson: Order Creation Convert half of the planned quantity. the system created a process order with a corresponding order quantity. Choose Back to exit the Create Process Order: Initial screen.000 kg. Choose Enter to confirm the message.

Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Planned order a) Planned Opening Date MRP controller Position the cursor on the MRP element of a planned order and choose the Display element icon in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. Convert the two planned orders from Task 5 to process orders. Enter the following criteria for planned order selection: Plant: 1100 MRP controller: I## Creation: Creation date of the planned order that is chronologically first Creation date of the planned order that is chronologically last Continued on next page 84 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Task 6: 1. Use collective conversion. 2005/Q2 .

The Collective Conversion of Planned Orders: List screen appears. All rights reserved. 85 .SCM340 Lesson: Order Creation Choose process order type PI01 for conversion. the system only displays your two planned orders for material T-FI1##. 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. → Collective Conversion Plant: 1100 MRP controller: I## Creation: Creation date of the planned order that is chronologically first . Which changes have occurred? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production . The planned orders were deleted after the conversion.Ord. Select the two planned orders and choose Convert.Creation date of the planned order that is chronologically last Process order type: PI01 Choose the Execute selections icon. The planned orders are now converted to process orders one after the other. a) (…) → MRP → Planned Order → Convert to Proc.Process → MRP → Evaluations → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FI1## Plant: 1100 The two new process orders are displayed as new MRP elements. Choose Back to exit the list. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##. According to the selection criteria you have entered. Task 7: Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FI1##.

All rights reserved. ____________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FI1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PI01 Choose Enter. Continued on next page 86 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Task 8: 1. Save the order and write down the order number. Total quantity: 14. The Create Process Order: Header – General Data screen appears. Enter 14. use the order created in Task 8 as a template to copy from. Save the order and write down the order number: ____________________ Task 9: 1.000 PC Start: Today Choose Enter. The system creates the process order. Create another process order of order type PI01 in plant 1100. Create another process order with reference to your material T-FI1##.000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and today as the basic start date. Choose process order type PI01 and production plant 1100. 2005/Q2 . This time.

All rights reserved. The system schedules the process order. Enter 1 PU (activity unit) as the total quantity and any start date you wish. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Now create a process order of process order type PI01 in plant 1100 without reference to a material.SCM340 Lesson: Order Creation Enter 16. Change the total quantity: Total quantity: 16.000 PC Enter the following basic start date: Start: Today + 1 week Choose Enter. 87 .000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today + 1 week as the basic start date. Task 10: 1. a) (…) → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PI01 Template Process order: Order number from exercise 8-1 Choose Enter. The system creates a new order by copying from the order created in exercise 8-1. Create the order with reference to recipe 1 Clean-out of recipe group T-CLEAN.

The Maintain Settlement Rule: Overview screen appears. Total quantity: 1 PU Start: Any start date in the future If applicable. 88 © 2006 SAP AG. choose Header → Settlement rule. a) (…) → Process Order → Process Order → Create → Without Material Recipe group: T-CLEAN Recipe: 1 Plant: 1100 Process order type: PI01 Choose Enter. 2005/Q2 .Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 In the distribution rules of the settlement rule. All rights reserved. Type: CTR Destination: 4271 Enter Choose Back to go back to the order header. The Create Process Order: Header – General Data screen appears. define cost center 4271 Production food as the settlement receiver for the clean-out order.

89 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order Creation Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the different options for creating a process order • Explain the activities involved in process order creation 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

© 2006 SAP AG. which you can use to read a different or up-to-date production version in the process order at a later stage. All rights reserved. You will make settings for master data selection at order creation in Customizing and the material master. You proceed in the following way: • • • • • • 90 You will define a process order type in Customizing and get an overview of the order type-dependent parameters. Finally. you will be able to: • • • • • • • • Define order types and order type-dependent parameters in Customizing Make the appropriate Customizing settings for master data selection Make the appropriate material master settings for selection using a production version Explain the selection using a production version in manual process order creation and planned order conversion Use the production version selection based on a quota arrangement Select production versions manually Read production versions Include master recipes Business Example You have to complete various scenarios of master data selection for process orders in your company. You will make certain settings for a material to determine that a production version is selected based on a quota arrangement. which you can use to include any master recipe in the order at a later stage. 2005/Q2 . you will test the Include Master Recipe function. You will test the function for manual production version creation when you create a process order without a planned order. In addition.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Lesson Overview This lesson familiarizes you with the process and the settings of master data selection for process orders. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will test the Read Master Data function.

91 .SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Order Type: Customizing Figure 24: Order type: Customizing 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

the connection of the Logistics Information System. They determine the technical properties of orders. In this activity. for example. 2005/Q2 . Order category 40 is used for process orders. Controlling: Here. you determine the parameters that are valid for each order type and plant. such as costing variants for planned and actual costs. Master data: Here. All rights reserved. Other settings that you can make refer.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 The following Customizing activities are basic prerequisites for using process orders: • Customizing: Define order types – – – • Customizing: Define order type-dependent parameters – – – – 92 An order type contains control information that you need to manage orders. and the documentation of goods movements. You must assign a number range to every order type. you define the data that influences production version and master recipe selection as well as order master data maintenance. © 2006 SAP AG. you define the parameters relevant to costing. Order categories are assigned to specific applications in the SAP system. An order category is assigned to every order type. to the documentation of status changes.

alternative selection 3 Selection only by Production Version (recommended) or 2 Selection by Production Version must be defined in the material's MRP data. 93 . a suitable production version is to be determined for the material based on the Validity Period and the Charge Quantity Range. When converting a planned order.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Master Data Selection Figure 25: Master Data Selection For the creation of a process order and a planned order. The BOM application for the process order type must include the selection of a production version (Customizing). and the recipe and BOM for the production version are taken over to the process order. the production version that was determined for the planned order is made known to the process order (and not determined again) and taken over to the corresponding recipe. © 2006 SAP AG. a production version is determined. but rather the dependent requirements of the planned order are converted to reservations for the process order. When the order is created. The BOM is not read again. All rights reserved. Prerequisites and process: • Creation with planned order: – – • Creation without planned order: – – 2005/Q2 For a production version to be used during planned order creation. A production version determines which alternative BOM is used in combination with which master recipe for production.

This means that no production version can be determined for the process order. alternative selection 2 Selection by Production Version or 3 Selection only by Production Version (recommended) must be defined in the material's MRP data. For a production version to be used during planned order creation. the system always tries to create the planned order without a production version (BOM determination without production version). the process order cannot be introduced to a production version. All rights reserved. When a planned order without production version is converted. the production version is taken over from the planned order to the process order.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Planned Order Creation with Production Version Figure 26: Planned Order Creation with Production Version When a planned order is converted. 2005/Q2 . © 2006 SAP AG. Note the following: • • 94 If the system cannot determine a valid production version for a planned order.

you can always select the production version manually in the dialog. With Creation Without Planned Order. You can change the assignment manually. if the assignment is not controlled by quota arrangements. the production version that was determined for the planned order is always automatically assigned to the process order (and not determined again). you always select the production version in the dialog once a material has more than one valid production version. unless the assignment is controlled through quota arrangements and you have not explicitly called up manual selection in the dialog. the first valid production version is automatically assigned to the process order. © 2006 SAP AG. you can manually change the production version assignment to the process order by choosing the Read Master Data function. Note the following: When you need to Convert Planned Order. 95 . production versions can be assigned to a planned order or process order automatically or manually. All rights reserved. In all cases.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Production Version Assignment Figure 27: Production Version Assignment Based on the criteria Validity Period and Charge Quantity Range. – • 2005/Q2 If the Customizing setting Manual Selection of Production Version was made. – If the Customizing setting Automatic Selection of Production Version was made. If several production versions are valid at the same time according to the criteria Validity Period and Charge Quantity Range: • • • The system always assigns the first valid production version to a planned order.

you can create an order without a BOM. First. you can cancel the master data selection and thereby the order creation by selecting the material master setting selection only by production version (Alternative Selection Method field).) The system then checks the validity periods of the corresponding recipe and bill of material (BOM) for the production version determined. 2005/Q2 . Recipe selection and order creation are either terminated. With the other setting.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Checks in Process Order Figure 28: Checks in Process Order The graphic provides a detailed overview of the checks that are carried out in the process order during master data selection. or an order is created with one operation. 96 © 2006 SAP AG. If the system does not find a valid production version. the production version is adopted from the planned order to the process order. If the system is unable to find a valid recipe for the production version. you must manually maintain the operation overview afterwards. In this case. the system tries to select a recipe and a BOM without a production version. All rights reserved. If the system is unable to find a valid BOM. In the latter case. the process can be continued in several different ways depending on the settings made in Customizing. a valid production version for the material to be produced is determined or the production version introduced through the planned order is checked. you can manually assign material components afterwards. (When a planned order is converted.

you define the procedure for alternative BOM determination. Customizing: Define applications • • 2005/Q2 In this activity. 97 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Selection Settings for the Process Order (I) Figure 29: Selection Settings for the Process Order (I) Customizing: Define order type-dependent parameters • • • Production version: This parameter specifies whether a production version is selected automatically or manually for the process order when a process order is created without a planned order. make sure that the ProdVers indicator has been set. It specifies that a valid production version is the selection criterion for master data selection when a process order is created without a planned order. © 2006 SAP AG. Recipe selection: This parameter specifies whether a master recipe is selected for a process order and how it is to be selected. BOM application: This parameter determines how the alternative BOM is selected if a process order is created without a planned order. For process manufacturing.

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Production Version field). Alternative Selection Method field): – – Selection by production version Selection only by production version (recommended) This setting ensures that process orders can only be created based on a production version.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Selection Settings for the Process Order (II) Figure 30: Selection Settings for the Process Order (II) You can specify that the selection of production versions for the process order are automatic or manual when a process order is created without a planned order. A prerequisite for this is that one of the following settings was made for the selection method (material master. MRP4 view. • • You do so in Customizing for Process Orders (order type-dependent parameters. 98 © 2006 SAP AG.

The assigned recipe and alternative BOMs must exist during the whole validity period of the production version. it must fulfill the following requirements: • • 2005/Q2 The lot-size range of the production version must be in the lot-size range of the assigned recipe as well as that of the assigned alternative BOM. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Consistency of a Production Version Figure 31: Consistency of a Production Version In order for a production version to be consistent. The deletion flag must not be set for them. This applies to all change statuses of the recipe and alternative BOMs that are within the validity period of the production version. 99 .

or an alternative BOM If an inconsistency is detected during the check. an error or warning message is displayed in a log on the check result. You can then be sure that a valid recipe or valid BOM actually exists within the whole validity period of the production version.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Production version: Consistency Check Figure 32: Production version: Consistency Check You can check whether the data of a production version is consistent with the data of the master recipe and the data of the alternative BOM assigned to it. for a worklist of selected production versions In the material and recipe for individual production versions In a mass check for all production versions for a material. All rights reserved. recipe. 100 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . The check results are updated in the production version as a check status. You can trigger the check as follows: • • • In the Production Versions transaction.

101 .SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Selection Based on a Quota Arrangement Figure 33: Selection Based on a Quota Arrangement You can maintain a quota arrangement to control which production version is to be used up to which quantity produced or with which priority. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

and choose Selection only by Production Version as the alternative selection method.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 To select by quota arrangement: • • • Maintain the quota arrangement details in Customizing (Process Order -> Operations -> Quota Arrangement): Number ranges and quota arrangement usage Enter a quota arrangement usage that includes production and process orders in the MRP 2 view in the material master of the material to be produced. Maintain the quota arrangement for the material (you can do this. Enter the following: – – – – – 102 E (internal procurement) as the procurement type. 2005/Q2 . via the process order menu). for example. a priority. © 2006 SAP AG. the production version with the next higher priority is used after reaching this quantity. E (in-house production) as the special procurement type The production versions that are valid for the quota arrangement period selected The quotas for the usage of the production versions (will be overridden by priorities) If required. The production version is not used any more after reaching this quantity. a maximum quantity per production version. All rights reserved. If a maximum quantity was also entered. If required. whereby only the production version for which the lowest value was entered as not equal to zero (highest priority = 1) is used.

grp ## in Customizing. All rights reserved. To do so. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. Create order type PO## along with the description Proc. int. copy the parameters for order type L310 of plant 1100. 103 . Define settlement profile PI01 for your order type. number assignmt. use F1 help. int. Here you are able to get the first overview of the parameters and control indicators you can define. 2. Save your settings.order. Assign your order type to the number range PI orders. number assignmt. Task 1: Create order type PO## along with the description Proc. Define the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in Customizing for plant 1100.order. grp ## in Customizing. Task 2: 1.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Exercise 9: Order Type Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Use F1 help for information on the settlement profile functions and on the other parameters and control indicators for the order type. If required. you will be able to: • Define order types • Define order type-dependent parameters Business Example You will define a process order type in Customizing and get an overview of the order type-dependent parameters. 3.

int.order. Create order type PO## along with the description Proc.order. Save your settings. grp ## Define settlement profile PI01 for your order type.order. grp ## in Customizing. grp ## in Customizing. a) Enter the following data in the Profiles for controlling area group box: Settlement profile: PI01 Save your settings. All rights reserved. 2. no. int. assignmt. int.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Solution 9: Order Type Task 1: Create order type PO## along with the description Proc. Use F1 help for information on the settlement profile functions and on the other parameters and control indicators for the order type. a) Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project Press SAP Reference IMG / Production Planning Process Industries → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type Choose New Entries. number assignmt. number assignmt. Continued on next page 104 © 2006 SAP AG. Order category: 40 (cannot be changed) Order type: PO## Proc. 2005/Q2 . 1.

Task 2: 1. Position the cursor on your order type PO## and choose Edit → Select Element. copy the parameters for order type L310 of plant 1100. a) Choose Number Range General. The view appears as “Process Order Dependant Parameter” change: Details Selected Sets. Here you are able to get the first overview of the parameters and control indicators you can define. The order types that have not yet been assigned to a number range are displayed at the end of the list. All rights reserved. Assign your order type to the number range PI orders. The system copies the data. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Your order type is assigned to the Process Orders number range. Choose Back to get back to order type maintenance. If required. Check this. Overwrite order type L310 with your order type PO##. 105 . Select Number Range Process Orders. Save your number range assignment. To do so. Choose Edit → Copy as. Define the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in Customizing for plant 1100. Choose Back again to exit the screen. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters Select the line for order type L310 and plant 1100. Choose Enter. Save your order type-dependent parameters. Then choose Edit → Assign Element Group. The Maintain Number Range Groups screen appears. use F1 help. Choose Enter to confirm the information about the transport of number range intervals.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection 3.

All rights reserved.Unit 3: Order Creation 106 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

Task 2: Display the parameters that have been defined for application PI01 Process manufacturing in Customizing for BOM selection. Task 1: Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing. you will be able to: • Make the appropriate Customizing settings for master data selection • Make the appropriate material master settings for selection using a production version • Explain the selection using a production version in manual process order creation and planned order conversion Business Example You will make settings for master data selection at order creation in Customizing and the material master. 1. Which options for production version selection are available? 4. Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing. Which settings have been maintained for production version selection? Production version: 3. 2. Display the parameters that have been defined for application PI01 Process manufacturing in Customizing for BOM selection. choose the Bill of Material application Process manufacturing for alternative BOM determination. All rights reserved. 1.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Exercise 10: Master Data Selection Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Which other options for recipe selection are available? 7. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 107 . Which settings have been maintained for master recipe selection? Master Recipe Selection: 6. Which task list type is selected when a process order is created? TL type: 5. On the Planning tab.

Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. 2.000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date. Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. 2005/Q2 . display the data on master data selection. Which production version has been defined for the material? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Display the detail data about the production version. 1. After the order has been created. Which information does it provide? Write down the valid lot-size range: From lot size: ________________ To lot size: ________________ Write down the validity period: Valid from: ________________ Valid to: ________________ Write down the master data assigned: Task List Type: ________________ Group: ________________ Group Counter: ________________ Alternative BOM: ________________ Task 4: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Write down the following: Continued on next page 108 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 2. 2. Enter 10. 1. Enter 10.000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date. Which function does this indicator have? Task 3: Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Has the ProdVers indicator been set for application PI01 Process manufacturing? 3.

create a second session and compare the relevant data of the process order and master recipe. How does the system convert the two units of measure for material T-FI1##? For the definition of this conversion.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Production Vers. Why has the system used a valid production version as the criterion for selecting the required master data for order creation? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4. Try to create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1##.: ___________________________________________ Master Recipe Recipe Group: __________________________________________ Recipe: _______________________________________________ Bill of Material Alternative:____________________________________________ 3. To do so. 109 . refer to the material master record. In our example. Task 5: Try to create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1##. All rights reserved. Check whether the system has correctly transferred the operation and phase data along with the material list for your order. the quantity of material T-FI1## is given in PC (pieces). Enter the order quantity 2000 pieces and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date. Enter the order quantity 2000 pieces and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date. ______________________________________________________ 5. the production version’s lot-size range refers to the unit KG. 1. 2. Which error message does the system issue? Why? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In the order.

2005/Q2 . 2. 1. Which setting causes the BOM to be selected using a valid production version for the material? Task 8: Convert the planned order you created in task 7 to a process order. All rights reserved. Use planned order profile LA Stock order. Which function do the settings 2 Selection by production version and 3 Selection only by production version have with regard to the creation of planned orders and process orders? Use field help (F1) to answer this question. Select the MRP area 1100 (=plant 1100) Enter 5000 KG as the order quantity and Today + 2 weeks as the order finish date. Which production version was used to find the BOM for determining component requirements? ______________________________________________________ 4. Use process order type PO##. Save the planned order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ 3. 1. Create a planned order for material T-FI1##. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Task 7: Create a planned order for material T-FI1##. Use process order type PO##.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Task 6: Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Continued on next page © 2006 SAP AG. Display the planned order once again. Which setting has been made in the Selection method field? ______________________________________________________ 3. 110 Convert the planned order you created in task 7 to a process order. Use planned order profile LA Stock order. 2. 1. Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100.

All rights reserved. When converting the planned order to a process order. display the data on master data selection. Which production version was used to select the master data? Why? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Hint: Selection by production version • • 2005/Q2 To specify that you want the system to use the valid production version for the material to select component requirements when you create a planned order. you must enter selection method 2 Selection by production version or 3 Selection only by production version (recommended) in the material master record.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection 2. © 2006 SAP AG. 111 . the system always takes over the production version defined in the planned order and uses it to select the recipe. After converting. you must assign an application for BOM selection in the relevant order type-dependent parameters in Customizing. You must set the ProdVers indicator for this application. To specify that for manual process order creation or creation without a planned order you want the system to use the valid production version to select the master data for a material.

1. Continued on next page 112 © 2006 SAP AG. Which settings have been maintained for production version selection? Production version: a) The Master Data tab appears. Which task list type is selected when a process order is created? TL type: a) 5. All rights reserved. a) Choose the Planning tab. 2. Bill of Material application: Process manufacturing Save your order type-dependent parameters. Which options for production version selection are available? a) 4. TL type: Master Recipe Which settings have been maintained for master recipe selection? Master Recipe Selection: a) Master Recipe Selection: Master recipe mandatory (automatic selection) 6.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Solution 10: Master Data Selection Task 1: Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing. choose the Bill of Material application Process manufacturing for alternative BOM determination. Which other options for recipe selection are available? a) 7. On the Planning tab. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters Double-click on the line for plant 1100 and order type PO##. Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing. Use possible help entries (F4) for the Production Version field to answer this question. Use possible help entries (F4) for the Master Recipe Selection field to answer this question. Production version: Automatic selection of production version 3. 2005/Q2 .

1. Has the ProdVers indicator been set for application PI01 Process manufacturing? a) 3. Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Which function does this indicator have? a) The indicator must be set if you want the system to use a valid production version to select master data when you create a process order without a planned order. Task 3: Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. All rights reserved. Enter Go to plant 1100. 1. Enter 2.SCM340 Lesson: Master Data Selection Task 2: Display the parameters that have been defined for application PI01 Process manufacturing in Customizing for BOM selection. Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Operations → BOM Selection → Define Applications The ProdVers indicator has been set for application PI01.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-FI1## Enter Go to the MRP 4 view. Display the parameters that have been defined for application PI01 Process manufacturing in Customizing for BOM selection. 113 . a) 2. Which production version has been defined for the material? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Display the detail data about the production version. a) Logistics → Production . Which information does it provide? Write down the valid lot-size range: From lot size: ________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100.000 kg Task List Type: Master Recipe Group: T-ICE## Group Counter: 1 Alternative BOM: 1 Task 4: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 To lot size: ________________ Write down the validity period: Valid from: ________________ Valid to: ________________ Write down the master data assigned: Task List Type: ________________ Group: ________________ Group Counter: ________________ Alternative BOM: ________________ a) Choose ProdVersion. 1. Enter 10. Version: 0001 Ice cream production Double-click the production version number. From lot size: 2.000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date. Continued on next page 114 © 2006 SAP AG.000 kg To lot size: 10. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Enter 10,000 pieces as the total quantity you want to produce and Today
+ 1 week as the basic finish date.
a)

Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order →
Process Order → Create → With Material
Material no.:

T-FI1##

Production plant:

1100

Process order type:

PO##

Choose Enter. The Create Process Order: Header – General Data
screen appears.

2.

Total qty:

10,000 PC

Finish:

Today + 1 week

After the order has been created, display the data on master data selection.
Write down the following:
Production Vers.: ___________________________________________
Master Recipe
Recipe Group: __________________________________________
Recipe: _______________________________________________
Bill of Material
Alternative:____________________________________________
a)

Choose the Mast. data tab.
Production Vers.: 0001
Master Recipe
Recipe Group: T-ICE##
Recipe: 1
Bill of Material
Alternative 1

3.

Why has the system used a valid production version as the criterion for
selecting the required master data for order creation?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

115

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
a)

The ProdVers indicator for the BOM application PI01 Process
Manufacturing determines that a valid production version is used to
select master data (see task 2, step 3).
Save the order.

4.

In our example, the production version’s lot-size range refers to the unit KG.
In the order, the quantity of material T-FI1## is given in PC (pieces).
How does the system convert the two units of measure for material T-FI1##?
For the definition of this conversion, refer to the material master record.
______________________________________________________
a)

Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Material Master
→ Material → Display → Display Current
Material: T-FI1##
Enter
Go to the Basic Data 1 view.
Enter
Choose Additional data.
Choose Units of measure.
2 PC ⇔ 1 KG

5.

Check whether the system has correctly transferred the operation and phase
data along with the material list for your order.
To do so, create a second session and compare the relevant data of the
process order and master recipe.
a)
Hint: To create a second session, choose System → Create
Session.

Task 5:
Try to create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1##.
Enter the order quantity 2000 pieces and Today + 1 week as the basic finish date.
1.

Try to create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1##.
Continued on next page

116

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Enter the order quantity 2000 pieces and Today + 1 week as the basic finish
date.
a)

Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order
→ Create → With Material
Material no.:

T-FI1##

Production plant:

1100

Process order type:

PO##

Choose Enter. The Create Process Order: Header – General Data
screen appears.
Total qty:

2000 PC

Finish:

For example: Today + 1 week

Enter
2.

Which error message does the system issue? Why?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
a)

No valid production version exists for the selection criteria because the
total quantity of 2,000 PC you have entered is outside the valid charge
quantity range of the production version for material T-FI1##.

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

117

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Task 6:
Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100.
1.

Display the MRP 4 view for material T-FI1## in plant 1100.
a)

Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Material Master

Material→ Display→ Display Current
Material:

T-FI1##

Enter
Go to the MRP 4 view.
Enter
Go to Plant 1100.
Enter
2.

Which setting has been made in the Selection method field?
______________________________________________________
a)

3.

Selection method: 3 Selection only by production version

Which function do the settings 2 Selection by production version and 3
Selection only by production version have with regard to the creation of
planned orders and process orders? Use field help (F1) to answer this
question.
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________

Continued on next page

118

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

______________________________________________________
a)

Material requirements planning, Selection method 2 and 3:
When you create a planned order, the system uses the valid production
version for the material to select the component requirements.
Note: If the system cannot determine a production version, it
tries to select a BOM for the planned order without reference to
a production version.
Process order creation, Selection method 3:
If the system does not find a valid production version, you cannot
create process orders.
Note: If Selection method 3 is not defined when you create a
process order without a planned order and if the system cannot
determine a valid production version, it tries to select a valid
recipe and BOM without reference to a production version.

Task 7:
Create a planned order for material T-FI1##. Use planned order profile LA Stock
order.
1.

Create a planned order for material T-FI1##. Use planned order profile
LA Stock order.
a)

Logistics → Production Process → MRP → Planned Order → Create
Plnned order profile:

LA

Enter
2.

Select the MRP area 1100 (=plant 1100)
Enter 5000 KG as the order quantity and Today + 2 weeks as the order
finish date.
Save the planned order and write down the order number:

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

119

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

______________________________________________________
a)
Material:

T-FI1##

MRP area:

1100

Order quantity:

5000

Ord.finish:

Today +2 weeks

Save your planned order. The order number is displayed after you
have saved the order.
3.

Display the planned order once again.
Which production version was used to find the BOM for determining
component requirements?
______________________________________________________
a)

(…) → MRP →Planned Order → Display → Individual Display
Planned order:

Order number

Enter
Production Version:
4.

0001

Which setting causes the BOM to be selected using a valid production
version for the material?
a)

The selection method in the material master controls this (see exercise
6-3)..

Task 8:
Convert the planned order you created in task 7 to a process order. Use process
order type PO##.
1.

Convert the planned order you created in task 7 to a process order. Use
process order type PO##.
a)

(…) → MRP → Planned Order → Convert to Proc. Ord. → Individual
Conversion
Planned Order:

Planned order number

Process Order Type:

PO##
Continued on next page

120

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

2.

After converting, display the data on master data selection.
Which production version was used to select the master data? Why?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Hint: Selection by production version

a)

To specify that you want the system to use the valid production
version for the material to select component requirements
when you create a planned order, you must enter selection
method 2 Selection by production version or 3 Selection only
by production version (recommended) in the material master
record. When converting the planned order to a process
order, the system always takes over the production version
defined in the planned order and uses it to select the recipe.
To specify that for manual process order creation or creation
without a planned order you want the system to use the valid
production version to select the master data for a material, you
must assign an application for BOM selection in the relevant
order type-dependent parameters in Customizing. You must set
the ProdVers indicator for this application.

Choose Enter. The system converts the planned order to a process order.
This display appears Create Process Order: Header– General Data.
Choose the Mast. data tab.
Production Vers.:

0001

When converting a planned order to a process order, the system always
uses the production version defined in the planned order to select the
corresponding recipe.

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

121

Unit 3: Order Creation

122

SCM340

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Exercise 11: Production Version Selection
Based on a Quota Arrangement
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Define a selection of production versions based on quotas

Define a selection of production versions based on priorities

Business Example
You will make certain settings for a material to determine that a production version
is selected based on a quota arrangement.

Task 1:
Display the MRP 2 and MRP 4 views for your material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Display the MRP 2 and MRP 4 views for your material T-CERM-## in
plant 1100.

2.

Write down the following information from the MRP 2 view:
Quota arrangement usage:
______________________________________________________
Does the quota arrangement usage maintained allow you to maintain quotas
for the business transaction Process order creation?
Use F1 and F4 help to answer the question.
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________

3.

Write down the following information from the MRP 4 view:
Selection method:
______________________________________________________

4.

Which production versions have been maintained for the material?
______________________________________________________
Display the detailed information for every production version.

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

123

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Task 2:
Create a quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Create a quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.

2.

Enter a quota arrangement period until, for example, the end of the year.

3.

Make the following entries in the item overview:

4.

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Save your quota arrangement.

Task 3:
Create a process order for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. Use order type
PO##.
1.

Create a process order for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. Use order
type PO##.

2.

3.

Total qty:

1,000 kg

Finish:

for example: Today + 1 week

Which production version and quota arrangement item was used to create
the order?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Save the order.

Task 4:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.

2.

Write down the quota-allocated quantity in the following table:

Continued on next page

124

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Task 5:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.

2.

Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.

Task 6:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty.:
2.

1,000 kg

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.

Task 7:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:
2.

2,000 kg

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

125

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Task 8:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

2.

Write down the quota-allocated quantities in the following table:
P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Interpret the results for the tasks 2 to 8:
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________

Task 9:
Change your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-##.
1.

Change your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-##.

2.

Make the following entries in the item overview with regard to the priorities
and maximum quantities:

3.

P

S

PVer Quota

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

E

E

0001 50

4000

10000

1

E

E

0002 50

3000

2

Save your quota arrangement.

Task 10:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.

2.

Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Continued on next page

126

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Save the order.

Task 11:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.

2.

Total qty:

4,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.

Task 12:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.

2.

Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.

Task 13:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

2.

Write down the quota-allocated quantities in the following table:
P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

10000

1
2

Interpret the results for the tasks 9 to13:

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

127

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Task 14:
1.

128

Delete the quota arrangement usage assigned in the MRP 2 view for your
material T-CERM-##.

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Solution 11: Production Version Selection
Based on a Quota Arrangement
Task 1:
Display the MRP 2 and MRP 4 views for your material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Display the MRP 2 and MRP 4 views for your material T-CERM-## in
plant 1100.
a)

Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Material Master

Material→ Display→ Display Current
Material:

T-CERM-##

Enter
Choose the views MRP 2 and MRP 4.
Enter
Go to plant 1100.
Enter
2.

Write down the following information from the MRP 2 view:
Quota arrangement usage:
______________________________________________________
Does the quota arrangement usage maintained allow you to maintain quotas
for the business transaction Process order creation?
Use F1 and F4 help to answer the question.
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
a)

MRP 2 view:
Quota arrangement usage: 4
The quota arrangement usage selected enables a quota arrangement
with regard to process order creation. The total quantity of all process
orders for this material is used in the quota arrangement.
F4 help: The Ord indicator is set.

3.

Write down the following information from the MRP 4 view:
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

129

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Selection method:
______________________________________________________
a)

MRP 4 view:
Selection method: 3 Selection only by production version
Hint: This setting must be made if the above quota
arrangement usage is to become effective with regard to
process orders for this material.

4.

Which production versions have been maintained for the material?
______________________________________________________
Display the detailed information for every production version.
a)

MRP 4 view:
Choose ProdVersion.
Production versions 0001 and 0002 exist for the material.
The lot-size ranges are identical for both production versions.

Task 2:
Create a quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Create a quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
a)

2.

(…)→ Process Order → Environment → Master Data → Quota
Maintenance
Material:

T-CERM-##

Plant:

1100

Enter a quota arrangement period until, for example, the end of the year.
a)

Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Periods
Valid to:

3.

for example, the end of the year

Make the following entries in the item overview:

Continued on next page

130

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

a)

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Goto → Item overview or double-click the line of the valid-to period
you have just entered.
Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Items

4.

P S

PVer Quota

E E

0001 50

E E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Save your quota arrangement.
a)

Save your quota arrangement.

Task 3:
Create a process order for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. Use order type
PO##.
1.

Create a process order for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. Use order
type PO##.
a)

Logistics → Production Process → Process Order →
Process Order → Create → With Material
Material no.:

T-CERM-##

Production plant:

1100

Process order type:

PO##

Choose Enter and the following appears Create Process Order: Header
– General Data.
2.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Finish:

for example: Today + 1 week

a)

Choose Enter to confirm your entries.
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

131

Unit 3: Order Creation

3.

SCM340

Which production version and quota arrangement item was used to create
the order?
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)

Master data tab page:
Production Vers.:

0001

Quota arrangement:

Quota arrangement number/item

Save your order.

Task 4:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
a)

2.

(…)→ Process Order → Environment → Master Data → Quota
Maintenance
Material:

T-CERM-##

Plant:

1100

Write down the quota-allocated quantity in the following table:

Continued on next page

132

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

a)

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Periods
Goto → Item overview or double-click the line of the valid-to period
you have just entered.
Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Items
P S

PVer Quota Alloc. qty.

E E

0001 50

E E

0002 50

Maximum
quantity

Priority

1000

Task 5:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

a)
2.

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0002

Task 6:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

133

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Total qty.:
a)
2.

1,000 kg

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0001

Task 7:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:
a)
2.

2,000 kg

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0001

Task 8:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Write down the quota-allocated quantities in the following table:

Continued on next page

134

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

a)

2.

P S

PVer Quota

Alloc. qty.

E E

0001 50

4000

E E

0002 50

3000

Maximum
quantity

Priority

Interpret the results for the tasks 2 to 8:
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
a)

Due to the quota arrangement you have created for material
T-CERM-##, the system attempts to distribute the process order
quantities between the two production versions 0001 and 0002 in a
50:50 ratio. It creates a process order for the production version with
the smallest quota-allocated quantity.

Task 9:
Change your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-##.
1.

Change your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-##.
a)

2.

(…)→ Process Orders → Environment → Master Data → Quota
Maintenance
Material:

T-CERM-##

Plant:

1100

Make the following entries in the item overview with regard to the priorities
and maximum quantities:

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

135

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

P

S

PVer Quota

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

E

E

0001 50

4000

10000

1

E

E

0002 50

3000

a)

2

Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Periods
Goto → Item overview or double-click the line of the valid-to period
you have just entered.
Screen Maintain Quota Arrangement: Overview of Quota Arr. Items

3.

P S

PVer Quota Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

E E

0001 50

4000

10000

1

E E

0002 50

3000

2

Save your quota arrangement.
a)

Save your quota arrangement.

Task 10:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

a)
2.

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0001

Continued on next page

136

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Task 11:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:

4,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

a)
2.

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0001

Task 12:
Create another process order for material T-CERM-##.
1.
Total qty:

3,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

a)
2.

See exercise

Which production version was used to create the order?
______________________________________________________
Save the order.
a)
Production version:

0002

Task 13:
Display your quota arrangement for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100.
1.

Write down the quota-allocated quantities in the following table:

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

137

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

P

S

PVer Quota

E

E

0001 50

E

E

0002 50

Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

10000

1
2

a)

2.

P S

PVer Quota Alloc. qty.

Maximum
quantity

Priority

E E

0001 50

11000

10000

1

E E

0002 50

6000

2

Interpret the results for the tasks 9 to13:
a)

Due to the changes you have made to the quota arrangement for
material T-CERM-##, the system first only takes production version
0001 with the lowest value of priority 1 into account.
If the maximum quantity of 10,000 is reached or exceeded, production
version 0001 is no longer used.
Production version 0002 with the next higher priority 2 is now used.

Task 14:
1.

Delete the quota arrangement usage assigned in the MRP 2 view for your
material T-CERM-##.
a)

(…) → Material → Change → Immediately
Material:

T-CERM-##

MRP 2 view:

138

Plant:

1100

Quota arrangement usage:

__

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Exercise 12: Manual Production Version
Selection
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Use the manual selection of production versions for creating orders without
a planned order

Read a production version in the order

Include a master recipe in the order

Business Example
You will test the function for manual production version creation when you create
a process order without a planned order.
In addition, you will test the Read Master Data function, which you can use to read
a different or up-to-date production version in the process order at a later stage.
Finally, you will test the Include Master Recipe function, which you can use to
include any master recipe in the order at a later stage.

Task:
1.

In the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant
1100, choose the setting:
Production version:

2.

Manual selection of production
version

Create a process order for material T-CERM-## with reference to your order
type PO## in plant 1100.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Note that you must select a production version in the dialog mode.
3.

In the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant
1100, choose the setting:

Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

139

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Production version:

4.

Automatic selection of production
version

Create another process order for material T-CERM-## with reference to
your order type PO## in plant 1100.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Note that the first production version is now used automatically.
5.

Create yet another process order.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Before confirming your entries on the date and quantities, choose Production
version.
You can now select a production version in the dialog mode.
Select production version 0002 and save the order.
6.

Change the order you created in the previous step.
Change the production version by using the Read master data function.
Read production version 0001.

7.

Change the order once again.
Navigate to the Operation overview and include master recipe 1 of recipe
group T-CLEAN for plant 1100.

140

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Solution 12: Manual Production Version
Selection
Task:
1.

In the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant
1100, choose the setting:
Production version:

a)
2.

Manual selection of production
version

Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order →
Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters

Create a process order for material T-CERM-## with reference to your order
type PO## in plant 1100.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Note that you must select a production version in the dialog mode.
a)
3.

Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Process Order
→ Create → With Material

In the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant
1100, choose the setting:
Production version:

a)
4.

Automatic selection of production
version

See step 1

Create another process order for material T-CERM-## with reference to
your order type PO## in plant 1100.
Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Note that the first production version is now used automatically.
a)
5.

See step 2

Create yet another process order.
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

141

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Total qty:

1,000 kg

Basic date:

Today + 1 week

Before confirming your entries on the date and quantities, choose Production
version.
You can now select a production version in the dialog mode.
Select production version 0002 and save the order.
a)
6.

See step 2

Change the order you created in the previous step.
Change the production version by using the Read master data function.
Read production version 0001.
a)

In the order, choose:
Process order → Functions → Read master data

7.

Change the order once again.
Navigate to the Operation overview and include master recipe 1 of recipe
group T-CLEAN for plant 1100.
a)

In the operation overview for the order, choose:
Operation → Include master recipe ...

142

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Master Data Selection

Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:

Define order types and order type-dependent parameters in Customizing

Make the appropriate Customizing settings for master data selection

Make the appropriate material master settings for selection using a
production version

Explain the selection using a production version in manual process order
creation and planned order conversion

Use the production version selection based on a quota arrangement

Select production versions manually

Read production versions

Include master recipes

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

143

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Lesson: Scheduling
Lesson Overview
This lesson familiarizes you with the process and settings of scheduling for
process orders.

Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Perform the following Customizing activities for scheduling process orders:
define scheduling types, set scheduling parameters, define scheduling
margins
Trace the scheduling of process orders in detail

Business Example
You will define scheduling parameters for your order type and a scheduling margin
key for your product in Customizing. You will then test different scenarios for
process order scheduling in the application.

Scheduling

Figure 34: Scheduling

Starting from the order start or finish dates, process orders are scheduled in
forward or backward scheduling. The system determines the planned start and
finish dates for the order, and its phases and operations.

144

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Scheduling

Depending on the scheduling type, the float before production is either added to
the order start date or the float after production is subtracted from the order finish
date to determine the start or finish date of the production
(scheduled start date, scheduled finish date).
The float before production and float after production are time buffers enabling
you to react to malfunctions in the manufacturing process.
The system determines the start and finish dates of the phases starting from the
scheduled start and finish dates. To do so, it must determine the phase durations
and take relationships into account.
The release date for the order is determined by subtracting the release period
from the scheduled start date. The release date is used as a selection criterion for
the collective release of process orders.

Scheduling: Phase Duration

Figure 35: Scheduling: Phase Duration

To calculate the phase duration, you must define a capacity category to be used as
the scheduling basis and a formula in the resource.
The phase duration is determined on the basis of the standard values and additional
formula parameters.
When determining the phase dates, the available capacity is taken into account
with breaks in the scheduling basis .

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

145

Unit 3: Order Creation

SCM340

Scheduling is carried out at the phase level. Operation dates are derived from the
phase dates.

Scheduling: Customizing

Figure 36: Scheduling: Customizing

Customizing: Specify Scheduling Parameters
In this activity, you define the parameters for scheduling process orders for each
plant, order type, and production scheduler.

Scheduling Margins

Figure 37: Scheduling Margins

Customizing: Define Scheduling Margin Key
In this activity, you specify time floats for order scheduling as well as the release
period for order release.
A suitable scheduling margin key is assigned to a material on the MRP view
of its material master.

146

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2

SCM340

Lesson: Scheduling

Exercise 13: Scheduling
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:

Display the definition of scheduling types in Customizing

Define the setting of scheduling parameters in Customizing

Define a scheduling margin key in Customizing

Explain the scheduling of process orders in the application

Business Example
You will define scheduling parameters for your order type and a scheduling margin
key for your product in Customizing.
You will then test different scenarios for process order scheduling in the
application.

Task 1:
1.

Display the scheduling types defined in Customizing.
Get an overview of the options you have when defining scheduling types.

Task 2:
Define the scheduling parameters for your order type PO## for all production
schedulers in plant 1100. To do so, follow the instructions below.
Note: Process orders are scheduled in detailed scheduling. The data in the
Rate-based scheduling group box (for repetitive manufacturing) and Rough-cut
scheduling group box (for rough-cut planning) do not apply to process order
management.
1.

Define the scheduling parameters for your order type PO## for all production
schedulers in plant 1100. To do so, follow the instructions below.

2.

For the phases of process orders, you want the system to create capacity
requirements for the scheduled phase dates.

3.

When the process order dates are changed, you want the system to adjust
the basic order dates.

4.

When you create a process order, you want the system to propose scheduling
type Forwards by default.

5.

You want the system to always schedule an order every time it is saved.
Continued on next page

2005/Q2

© 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

147

1. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. Which scheduling type does the system propose? Which setting controls this? Continued on next page 148 © 2006 SAP AG.. Display the scheduling margin keys defined in Customizing. 2. Task 4: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. assign scheduling margin key I## to your material T-FI1##. SCM340 If required. use the field help (F1) for more information on the other scheduling control parameters for detailed scheduling. Plant Key Ope . 1. Task 3: Display the scheduling margin keys defined in Customizing. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. Float After Float Befor . 4. Release P . Save your scheduling margin key. On the MRP 2 view for plant 1100. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100....Unit 3: Order Creation 6. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . 1100 I## 5 1 2 5 Use field help (F1) for information on the meaning of settings for the various time intervals.. 2.. Define scheduling margin key I## for plant 1100 and enter the following data: 3.

Planned phase start dates and phase end dates: How did the system determine these dates? Compare the phase duration and dates that the system has determined with the standard values and phase relationships. create a second session and display the relationships for recipe T-ICE## in the graphic mode. 149 . Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Check the following dates: 1. Which scheduling margin key does the system use when determining the order dates? Which setting controls this? 4.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling 3. If required. Scheduled order start: How did the system determine this date? 2. Which additional scheduling indicators does the system set on the Control data tab? Which settings control this? Task 5: Starting from the basic start date. check whether the system has determined the correct dates for the process order you have created in exercise 4.

Scheduled release date: How did the system determine this date? 6. 2005/Q2 . Scheduled order finish: How did the system determine this date? 4. In Customizing for the scheduling parameters of plant 1100 and order type PO##. define the following reduction strategy: 2. Basic order finish: How did the system determine this date? 5. define the following reduction strategy: 1. All rights reserved. Maximum reduction level Do not reduce beyond reduction level 3 % reduction in floats 30 60 100 Continued on next page 150 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 3. Requirement dates of the assigned material components: How did the system determine these requirement dates? Task 6: In Customizing for the scheduling parameters of plant 1100 and order type PO##.

Choose next Monday (or the first workday of next week) as the basic start date. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. Change the basic order finish date to one more workday closer to the present and schedule the order again. Task 7: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Which reduction level does the system use? How does reduction affect the order dates? 3. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. change the basic order finish to one workday closer to the present and schedule the order again. 2. Use field help (F1) for information on the function and meaning of the reduction strategy above. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Save your settings. Choose next Monday (or the first workday of next week) as the basic start date. Delete the settings for the reduction strategy and schedule the order again. 151 . Which new order status has been set? Reschedule the order. 1. Change the basic order finish to one workday closer to the present. compare the scheduled production dates with the dates in forward scheduling. Which reduction level does the system use? How does reduction affect the order dates? 4. Again. Now choose scheduling type Backwards and schedule the order again. Display the scheduling parameters that you can still change in the order.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling 3. All rights reserved. What does the scheduling result look like? 6. How does changing the scheduling type affect the order dates? In particular. Which reduction level does the system use? How does reduction affect the order dates? 5.

2005/Q2 . SCM340 Now you want to schedule the order again starting from a changed production finish date. How do these changes affect the order dates? 152 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 3: Order Creation 7. Schedule the order again. Choose the corresponding function in the order and then change the scheduled finish date from 24:00:00 to 20:00:00. All rights reserved.

follow the instructions below. adjust dep. reqmts to order start Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Operations → Scheduling → Specify Scheduling Type Task 2: Define the scheduling parameters for your order type PO## for all production schedulers in plant 1100. To do so. follow the instructions below. All rights reserved. When the process order dates are changed. a) Detailed scheduling X Generate Capacity Reqs. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Operations → Scheduling → Specify Scheduling Parameters New Entries 2. Get an overview of the options you have when defining scheduling types. 153 . To do so. 1. 3. a) Adjust Scheduling Adjust basic dates. you want the system to create capacity requirements for the scheduled phase dates. Display the scheduling types defined in Customizing. Plant: 1100 Order type: PO## ProdScheduler: * For the phases of process orders. Note: Process orders are scheduled in detailed scheduling. Define the scheduling parameters for your order type PO## for all production schedulers in plant 1100. you want the system to adjust the basic order dates. The data in the Rate-based scheduling group box (for repetitive manufacturing) and Rough-cut scheduling group box (for rough-cut planning) do not apply to process order management.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling Solution 13: Scheduling Task 1: 1.

Float After Float Befor . a) No further instruction required Task 3: Display the scheduling margin keys defined in Customizing.. Save your scheduling margin key. a) Scheduling control for detailed scheduling X Automatic Scheduling Save your scheduling parameter. 1. a) No further instruction required Continued on next page 154 © 2006 SAP AG... 2005/Q2 . Display the scheduling margin keys defined in Customizing. Release P .. Define scheduling margin key I## for plant 1100 and enter the following data: Plant Key Ope . you want the system to propose scheduling type Forwards by default. All rights reserved. If required.. 1100 I## 5 1 2 5 a) 3. a) 2. a) Scheduling control for detailed scheduling Scheduling Type Forwards 5. use the field help (F1) for more information on the other scheduling control parameters for detailed scheduling. You want the system to always schedule an order every time it is saved. SCM340 When you create a process order. 6.Unit 3: Order Creation 4. Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Operations → Scheduling → Define Scheduling Margin Key New Entries Use field help (F1) for information on the meaning of settings for the various time intervals..

Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter SchedMargin key: I## Save your material master record. assign scheduling margin key I## to your material T-FI1##. Enter Go to plant 1100. 1. 155 . Task 4: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. On the MRP 2 view for plant 1100. a) Logistics → Production Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Material: T-FI1## Enter Go to the MRP 2 view. All rights reserved. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling 4.

a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. the system sets the Capacity Requirements indicator and the Automatic Scheduling indicator (see exercises 2-2 and 2-5).Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. 2005/Q2 . Which scheduling type does the system propose? Which setting controls this? Answer: In accordance with the scheduling parameters you have defined in Customizing. the system proposes scheduling type Forwards (see exercise 2-4). Total qty: Quantity within the valid charge quantity range Start: For example: Today + 1 week Enter 2.: T-FI1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Choose Enter and the following appears Create Process Order: Header – General Data. the system proposes scheduling margin key I## (see exercise 3-4). 4. 3. Which additional scheduling indicators does the system set on the Control data tab? Which settings control this? Answer: Choose the Control data tab. Which scheduling margin key does the system use when determining the order dates? Which setting controls this? Answer: According to the settings you have made in the material master record for material T-FI1##. Continued on next page 156 © 2006 SAP AG. In accordance with the scheduling parameters you have defined in Customizing. All rights reserved.

see the page “Scheduling” in your participant handbook. The requirement dates of the components are displayed in the General Data for the material list items. Requirement dates of the assigned material components: How did the system determine these requirement dates? Answer: Choose Materials. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. create a second session and display the relationships for recipe T-ICE## in the graphic mode. check whether the system has determined the correct dates for the process order you have created in exercise 4. Answer: For some corresponding information on this topic. for example. Scheduled order start: How did the system determine this date? Answer: For some corresponding information on this topic.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling Task 5: Starting from the basic start date. see the page “Scheduling” in your participant handbook. Scheduled order finish: How did the system determine this date? Answer: For some corresponding information on this topic. Scheduled release date: How did the system determine this date? Answer: For some corresponding information on this topic. see the page “Scheduling” in your participant handbook. Planned phase start dates and phase end dates: How did the system determine these dates? Compare the phase duration and dates that the system has determined with the standard values and phase relationships. All rights reserved. 4. If required. The requirement dates are identical to the earliest phase dates according to the material component/phase assignments. You can display the General Data. 157 . see the page “Scheduling” in your participant handbook and “Scheduling: Phase Duration”. Basic order finish: How did the system determine this date? Answer: For some corresponding information on this topic. by double-clicking the item number of a material component. Check the following dates: 1. 3. 2. 6. 5. see the page “Scheduling” in your participant handbook.

60 100 Make the settings and save your scheduling parameters. Continued on next page 158 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . define the following reduction strategy: 1. Choose next Monday (or the first workday of next week) as the basic start date. define the following reduction strategy: a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Operations → Scheduling → Specify Scheduling Parameters Double-click on the line for plant 1100 and order type PO##. In Customizing for the scheduling parameters of plant 1100 and order type PO##. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. Maximum reduction level Do not reduce beyond reduction level 3 % reduction in floats 30 a) 3. Use field help (F1) for information on the function and meaning of the reduction strategy above. Enter a total quantity to be produced that is within the valid charge quantity range. All rights reserved.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Task 6: In Customizing for the scheduling parameters of plant 1100 and order type PO##. 1. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. Save your settings. a) No further instruction required Task 7: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FI1## in plant 1100. 2.

Total qty: Quantity within the valid charge quantity range Start: Next Monday (or the first workday of the next week) Enter 2. Reduction: Reduction level 1 The float before production was reduced by one day. As a result. Choose the Schedule order icon. Change the basic order finish date to one more workday closer to the present and schedule the order again. the scheduled start date is now one day closer to the present. Which reduction level does the system use? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling Choose next Monday (or the first workday of next week) as the basic start date.: T-FI1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Choose Enter and the following appears Create Process Order: Header – General Data. a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. All rights reserved. Which new order status has been set? Reschedule the order. Status: NTUP Dates are not updated Choose Back. Which reduction level does the system use? How does reduction affect the order dates? a) Choose the Status (i) icon for the status line. 159 . Change the basic order finish to one workday closer to the present. 3.

Delete the settings for the reduction strategy and schedule the order again. the order receives a new scheduled finish date and due to this. Now choose scheduling type Backwards and schedule the order again. new phase dates as well as a new scheduled start date. the scheduled start date is now one more day closer to the present. 4. the system schedules the order backward. As a result. 5.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 How does reduction affect the order dates? a) Reduction: Reduction level 2 The float after production is used up. Continued on next page 160 © 2006 SAP AG. How does changing the scheduling type affect the order dates? In particular. Display the scheduling parameters that you can still change in the order. The basic order dates stay the same. 2005/Q2 . As a result. Again. a) Starting from the basic order finish. Which reduction level does the system use? How does reduction affect the order dates? a) Reduction: Reduction level 3 The float before production is used up. 6.. What does the scheduling result look like? a) Choose Process order → Settings → Scheduling parameters.. change the basic order finish to one workday closer to the present and schedule the order again. Delete the settings for the reduction strategy and schedule the order again. All rights reserved. compare the scheduled production dates with the dates in forward scheduling. The system has adjusted the basic order finish in accordance with the corresponding scheduling parameter settings in Customizing (see exercise 2-3).

Change the scheduled finish date from 24:00:00 to 20:00:00 and schedule the order again. Schedule the order again. You can now change the scheduled production dates. Choose the corresponding function in the order and then change the scheduled finish date from 24:00:00 to 20:00:00. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 161 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Scheduling 7. How do these changes affect the order dates? a) On the General data tab of the order header. The system schedules the order starting from the changed scheduled finish date. Now you want to schedule the order again starting from a changed production finish date. choose the Change scheduled dates icon in the Dates section.

set scheduling parameters. All rights reserved.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Perform the following Customizing activities for scheduling process orders: define scheduling types. define scheduling margins • Trace the scheduling of process orders in detail 162 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

All rights reserved. Within the order. you will be able to: • Determine the planned costs for a process order. the order type-dependent parameters must be set up accordingly in Customizing. The CO object enables different cost itemizations for the process order. 163 . The costs incurred for an order can be calculated manually or automatically. there are lists for the following terms: Itemization (detailed overview of the individual costing items) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Business Example You will analyze the planned costs for a process order.SCM340 Lesson: Costing Lesson: Costing Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about calculating planned costs for process orders. Calculating Planned Costs (I) Figure 38: Calculating Planned Costs (I) If you use order-related Cost Object Controlling. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. a cost object is managed for every single process object. For this.

)) Cost component split (overview based on costing-based costs components) Calculating Planned Costs (II) Figure 39: Calculating Planned Costs (II) 164 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Analysis (overview based on cost elements (material costs.. All rights reserved. production costs.. . overhead costs.

2005/Q2 3. 1. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Costing Exercise 14: Costing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 2. Display one of the process orders you created for material T-FI1##. Display the costs that the system determined when you created the order in the cost analysis. Task: Display one of the process orders you created for material T-FI1##. How did the system determine the debits with regard to the planned resource activities (→ Confirmations)? 5. you will be able to: • Explain the determination of planned costs during process order creation Business Example You will analyze the planned costs for a process order. Describe how the system determined the above planned costs. How did the system determine the debits with regard to the planned material components (→ Goods Issues)? 4. 165 . How did the system determine the credits with regard to the planned production quantity (→ Goods Receipt)? © 2006 SAP AG.

© 2006 SAP AG. 1. See also the pages “Calculating Planned Costs (I) and (II)” in your participant handbook. 5. The Display Process Order: Header – General Data screen appears. 2005/Q2 . Choose Goto → Costs → Analysis 3. How did the system determine the credits with regard to the planned production quantity (→ Goods Receipt)? a) 166 The system uses the price maintained in the material master record of the product to determine the credits with regard to the planned production quantity ( → Goods Receipt). 4. See also the pages “Calculating Planned Costs (I) and (II)” in your participant handbook. How did the system determine the debits with regard to the planned material components (→ Goods Issues)? a) The system uses the prices maintained in the material master records to determine the debits with regard to the planned material components ( → Goods Issues). Describe how the system determined the above planned costs. Order number Display the costs that the system determined when you created the order in the cost analysis. How did the system determine the debits with regard to the planned resource activities (→ Confirmations)? a) The system uses the tariffs defined for the activity types and cost centers of the resources to determine the debits with regard to the planned resource activities (→ Confirmations). a) (…) Process Order → Display Process order: 2. All rights reserved.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Solution 14: Costing Task: Display one of the process orders you created for material T-FI1##. a) Choose Enter. Display one of the process orders you created for material T-FI1##.

Access the mass processing function for process orders. Capacity requirements creation and Costing functions previously explained for several process orders simultaneously. Capacity requirements creation and Costing can be carried out for several process orders in mass processing. and create and calculate capacity requirements Business Example You will get an overview of how Scheduling. Note that here you can trigger the Scheduling. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Perform scheduling in mass processing. All rights reserved. 167 .SCM340 Lesson: Costing Exercise 15: Mass Processing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Task: 1.

a) 168 (…) Process Order → Tools → Mass Processing © 2006 SAP AG. Note that here you can trigger the Scheduling. All rights reserved. Capacity requirements creation and Costing functions previously explained for several process orders simultaneously.Unit 3: Order Creation SCM340 Solution 15: Mass Processing Task: 1. 2005/Q2 . Access the mass processing function for process orders.

169 . All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Costing Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Determine the planned costs for a process order.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. define scheduling margins • Trace the scheduling of process orders in detail • Determine the planned costs for a process order. 170 © 2006 SAP AG. set scheduling parameters.Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Use the different options for creating a process order • Explain the activities involved in process order creation • Define order types and order type-dependent parameters in Customizing • Make the appropriate Customizing settings for master data selection • Make the appropriate material master settings for selection using a production version • Explain the selection using a production version in manual process order creation and planned order conversion • Use the production version selection based on a quota arrangement • Select production versions manually • Read production versions • Include master recipes • Perform the following Customizing activities for scheduling process orders: define scheduling types.

SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. Name the basic activities of order creation. 171 . All rights reserved. 2. Name the key cost components of the order © 2006 SAP AG. What information is defined in a production version? 3. Which dates are determined within an order scheduling? 4.

Which dates are determined within an order scheduling? Answer: • Order dates – – • • 4. Start and finish dates Scheduled start and finish dates (production dates) Operation and phase dates Dates for material staging process Name the key cost components of the order Answer: • • • • 172 Production costs Material costs Overhead costs Process costs © 2006 SAP AG. 3. 2005/Q2 .Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. Name the basic activities of order creation. Order type determination Definition of order quantity and dates Production version determination Scheduling Capacity requirements determination Planned costs calculation What information is defined in a production version? Answer: A production version determines which alternative BOM is used in combination with which master recipe for production. Answer: • • • • • • 2. All rights reserved.

you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2005/Q2 List the range of activities in process planning. active ingredient management. Name the different options for making resource reservations Describe the basics and the general process of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning) Dispatch operations in the capacity planning table of the ECC system Perform system-aided resource selection in the ECC System Release a process order Explain the order release function © 2006 SAP AG. Name the Customizing settings required for material availability checks Explain the functions of the material availability check and carry them out in the system Explain the Customizing settings for batch determination Create a batch search strategy Make the appropriate settings for batch determination in the material master records of your material components Carry out batch determination for your process order Carry out a sample scenario on how to use the functions of batch determination.Unit 4 Process Planning and Order Release Unit Overview Topics: • • • • • Material availability check Batch determination Batch determination and material quantity calculation Resource reservation (capacity requirements planning) Order release Unit Objectives After completing this unit. and material quantity calculation together. 173 . All rights reserved.

...191 Lesson: Batch Determination .............................177 Exercise 16: Material Availability Check: Customizing Settings ..............................223 Exercise 19: Batch Determination: Customizing Settings ........ All rights reserved..............................292 Exercise 24: Resource Reservation: Overview ......227 Exercise 20: Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy.........319 Exercise 26: Statuses and Business Transactions .........218 Exercise 18: Batch Determination: Overview................................241 Exercise 21: Batch Determination: Applying in Process Orders ..........................................................................................................................297 Exercise 25: Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table in the ECC System .............175 Lesson: Material Availability Check ....................................................261 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation ....279 Lesson: Resource Reservation ...............................Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release • • SCM340 Explain the definition and application of a production scheduling profile Describbe the function of system and user statuses Unit Contents Lesson: Process Planning ....323 Exercise 27: Production Scheduling Profile................................337 174 © 2006 SAP AG......270 Exercise 23: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation.......................................329 Exercise 28: System Statuses and User Statuses................181 Exercise 17: Material Availability Check: Applying in Process Orders ................................................................................247 Exercise 22: Batch Determination: Batch Entry Scenarios .......................................................... 2005/Q2 ..301 Lesson: Order Release .....

All rights reserved. Process Planning Figure 40: Process Planning Process planning comprises all activities that are performed during the time between creation and release of a process order.SCM340 Lesson: Process Planning Lesson: Process Planning Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of the range of activities in process planning. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 175 . Business Example Between creating and releasing the order. you can perform different planning activities with reference to process orders. You will get an overview of these possible steps in process planning. you will be able to: • List the range of activities in process planning.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • List the range of activities in process planning. All rights reserved. 176 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

you will test the functions of the material availability check in the application. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • • Name the Customizing settings required for material availability checks Explain the functions of the material availability check and carry them out in the system Business Example You will get an overview of the Customizing settings required for material availability checks for process orders. All rights reserved. Material Availability Check Figure 41: Material Availability Check Availability checks for material components ensure that only those orders are released for which the required material quantity is available on the calculated requirements date. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. Afterwards. 177 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Lesson: Material Availability Check Lesson Overview This lesson familiarizes you with the functions and settings of the material availability check for process orders.

In Customizing. ATP Method: Example Figure 42: ATP Method: Example All the relevant receipt and issue elements are checked dynamically. All rights reserved. If the total required quantity of a material component is not available at the required date. you can specify that orders with a material shortage are locked and cannot be released. The scope of the availability check is specified for each material and order type. The results of the availability check are recorded in the availability log. you define whether the availability is to be checked during order creation and/or order release. All receipt and issue elements to be considered are checked dynamically according to the ATP method (Available-to-Promise). the system sets the order status 'Material shortage'. or in a separate check for each component (only manually). In Customizing.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 The availability check can be triggered automatically or manually. 2005/Q2 . you specify for each order type and plant whether an automatic availability check is to be carried out. You can display missing parts for the order in the missing parts overview. Furthermore. Material quantities (including partial quantities) that are available at the requirements date are confirmed in the order. You can either check the availability in a collective check for all components (automatically or manually). 178 © 2006 SAP AG. A manual check can be carried out any time. Availability checks are carried out according to checking rules that are defined in Customizing with reference to a material or application.

The MRP controller can use the ATP quantities to determine whether the master production schedule covers all issues and which part of the warehouse stock or production schedule is still available for new issues. However. Availability Check: Customizing Figure 43: Availability Check: Customizing 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. the fourth check also detects that the material is not available although the material stock available at the requirements date would cover the requirement. The system carries out availability checks 1 to 4 for the existing reservations. In the third check. Check period: The check can be performed along the entire time axis but can also be restricted to the total replenishment lead time (material master). the material stock was promised to the other reservations by checks 1 to 3. a material shortage is detected as the planned material receipts do not cover the requirements quantity. Due to the ATP logic (Available-to-Promise). The graphic illustrates the following scenario: It shows the planned material receipts and issues for material XYZ . Material quantities that are available at the requirements date are confirmed in the order. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check The check is performed according to the ATP method (Available-to-Promise). 179 .

It groups together materials that are checked according to the same criteria. you define for each order type and plant whether the material availability is to be checked. and using which checking rule. In check control.. The scope of check defines.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 The following elements control the material availability check: • • • • 180 You assign a checking group to each material in the material master. © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . You define a checking rule for each application (for example. All rights reserved. for example. sales and distribution. The checking rule and checking group together define the scope of the availability check. how... which MRP elements and stock categories are taken into account in the check.). and whether availability is to be checked when an order is created or released. material requirements planning. process order management.

Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Create checking rules • Define checking controls • Display checking groups • Set up the scopes of availability checks Business Example You will make Customizing settings for the material availability check. Task 1: 1. Define checking rule ## Checking rule. Which elements control material availability checks for process orders? What do the individual elements mean and how do they depend on each other? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Exercise 16: Material Availability Check: Customizing Settings Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. use this one. If a checking rule has already been created for your group. grp ## in Customizing for the availability check. 181 . All rights reserved.

Save your settings. Set this indicator for capacity availability.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 3: Define the check control for your order type PO## in plant 1100 in Customizing for the availability check as described in the following paragraphs. Specify that checking rule ## is to be used during a material availability check for order creation. Specify that checking rule ## is to be used during a material availability check for a released order. Specify that the user can decide whether an order will be released if material components are missing. Define Check availability during order creation. Specify that you want the system to automatically check material availability during order release. The check is not to be restricted to a query of the Material shortage status. Specify that you do not want the system to automatically check material availability during order creation. To which checking group have your material components T-RTA## and T-RTB## been assigned? Continued on next page 182 © 2006 SAP AG. An ATP check is to be performed. 2. set the No check indicator for the PRT availability. An ATP check is to be performed. as we will only look at material availability in this unit. 2005/Q2 . Define that you want the system to automatically check material availability when the order is saved. Define that you do not want the system to automatically check material availability when the order is saved. Note:The process order does not support production resources/tools. All rights reserved. Use the field help (F1) and the possible entries help (F4) to display information on creation control for collective conversion. Define Check availability during order release. Save your settings. Task 4: 1. 1. Therefore. too.

Availability Check: ________________________________________ Task 5: Now define the scope of the check for checking group CH and checking rule ## in Customizing for the availability check.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check The assignment is made in the material master (on the MRP 3 view. To do so. Get an overview of the indicators that have been set and the settings you can make for your scope of check. Now define the scope of the check for checking group CH and checking rule ## in Customizing for the availability check. 2. 4. 1. copy the scope of check defined for checking group CH and checking rule PP. 2005/Q2 3. If a scope of check has already been created for checking group CH and checking rule ##. in the Availability check field). Now define the scope of check for checking group 01 and checking rule ## by copying the scope of check for checking group 01 and checking rule PP. 183 . All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. delete it and create it again.

use this one. a) Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Order → Operations → Availability Check → Define Checking Rule Choose New Entries.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Solution 16: Material Availability Check: Customizing Settings Task 1: 1. Continued on next page 184 © 2006 SAP AG. see the page “Availability Check: Customizing” in your participant handbook. Which elements control material availability checks for process orders? What do the individual elements mean and how do they depend on each other? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) For information on the elements that control material availability checks for process orders. Task 2: 1. All rights reserved. If a checking rule has already been created for your group. ChR: ## Description of checking rule: Checking rule grp ## Save your checking rule. grp ## in Customizing for the availability check. Define checking rule ## Checking rule. 2005/Q2 .

Use the field help (F1) and the possible entries help (F4) to display information on creation control for collective conversion. 185 . Define that you do not want the system to automatically check material availability when the order is saved. Specify that you do not want the system to automatically check material availability during order creation. Set this indicator for capacity availability. Specify that checking rule ## is to be used during a material availability check for order creation. Define Check availability during order creation. 1. Therefore. All rights reserved. set the No check indicator for the PRT availability.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Task 3: Define the check control for your order type PO## in plant 1100 in Customizing for the availability check as described in the following paragraphs. Note:The process order does not support production resources/tools. too. as we will only look at material availability in this unit. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. An ATP check is to be performed.

Define that you want the system to automatically check material availability when the order is saved. Specify that checking rule ## is to be used during a material availability check for a released order. The check is not to be restricted to a query of the Material shortage status. An ATP check is to be performed. Specify that the user can decide whether an order will be released if material components are missing. Define Check availability during order release. Specify that you want the system to automatically check material availability during order release. 2. Continued on next page 186 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . Plant: 1100 Order Type: PO## Availability Check: 1 Check availability during order creation Material availability: X No check _ Check material availability when saving order Checking Rule ## Checking rule grp ## Component Check Type __ ATP check PRT availability: X No check Capacity availability: X No check Save your settings. a) Customizing: (…) → Availability Check → Define Checking Control Choose New Entries. All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Save your settings.

Task 4: 1. 187 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Save your settings. All rights reserved. Plant: 1100 Order Type: PO## Availability Check: 2 Check availability during order release Material availability: _ No check _ Status check X Check material availability when saving order Checking Rule ## Checking rule grp ## Component Check Type __ ATP check Release material 1 User decides on release if parts are missing PRT availability: X No check Capacity availability: X No check Save your settings. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. To which checking group have your material components T-RTA## and T-RTB## been assigned? The assignment is made in the material master (on the MRP 3 view. a) Choose New Entries. in the Availability check field).

1.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Availability Check: ________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production . 2005/Q2 . copy the scope of check defined for checking group CH and checking rule PP. a) 2. Enter Go to plant 1100. Now define the scope of the check for checking group CH and checking rule ## in Customizing for the availability check. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 188 © 2006 SAP AG. Customizing: (…) → Availability Check → Define Scope of Check To do so. Enter Availability Check: CH Batches The checking groups are defined under Customizing: (…) → Availability Check → Define Checking Group Task 5: Now define the scope of the check for checking group CH and checking rule ## in Customizing for the availability check.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-RTA## or T-RTB## Enter Go to the MRP 3 view.

The system now copies the scope of check for your checking rule. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. The system issues a warning about the name space you have used. Hint: If a scope of check has already been created for checking group 01 and checking rule ##. Select the entry for the checking group (Av) CH and for the checking rule (ChR) PP. delete it and create it again. a) Select the entry for checking group (Av) 01 and for checking rule (ChR) PP. The system issues a warning about the name space you have used. Choose the Copy as . All rights reserved. Choose Enter again. a) 4. Save the scope of check you have created. icon. 3. 189 . delete it and create it again. Choose Enter.. icon. Get an overview of the indicators that have been set and the settings you can make for your scope of check. Overwrite checking rule PP with your own checking rule ##. The system now copies the scope of check for your checking rule. Hint: If a scope of check has already been created for checking group CH and checking rule ##. Overwrite checking rule PP with your own checking rule ##. Save the scope of check you have created. No further instruction required Now define the scope of check for checking group 01 and checking rule ## by copying the scope of check for checking group 01 and checking rule PP. The “Change View "Availability Check Control": Details of Selected Set” screen appears. Choose Enter again. delete it and create it again.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check If a scope of check has already been created for checking group CH and checking rule ##. Choose the Copy As . a) The “Change View "Availability Check Control": Overview” screen appears... The “Change View "Availability Check Control": Details of Selected Set” screen appears.. Choose Enter.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 190 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. . All rights reserved.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##. Write down the data displayed in the list in the following table: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Use the automatic check during order release • Trigger a manual check • Explain the ATP checking procedure • Evaluate missing parts Business Example You will test the different options and functions for carrying out a material availability check in a sample scenario. Order quantity: 500.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Exercise 17: Material Availability Check: Applying in Process Orders Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 191 . Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Create another process order of order type PO## for your material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. All rights reserved. Enter Today +4 weeks as the basic start date. 2. Enter 600 000 g as the quantity to be produced. 1. Enter 600 000 g as the quantity to be produced. Task 1: 1.000 g Start: Today + 2 months Enter Task 2: Create another process order of order type PO## for your material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Enter Today + 4 weeks as the basic start date.

Write down the data displayed in these lists in the following tables: T-RTA## Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. 2005/Q2 ./reqd.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Date 3./reqd. 1. Go to the material list of the process order and display the general data on the assigned material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##. qty Available qty Display the stock/requirements lists for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. All rights reserved. qty Available qty T-RTB## Date Task 3: Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1## again. go into the process order that is chronologically first in the change mode. From the list. MRP element SCM340 MRP element data Rec. Write down the following: Continued on next page 192 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. qty Available qty MRP element MRP element data Rec./reqd.

Why did the system check material availability when you released the order? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 6. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Release the order. All rights reserved. Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. Then display the general data for components T-RTA## and T-RTB## again. Why did the system not check material availability when you created the order? Which settings would you have to make to specify that an automatic availability check is carried out during order creation? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4. 193 . Display the ATP quantities.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty Have quantities been committed for the components by an availability check? ______________________________________________________ 3. Which new order status was set with regard to the material availability check? ______________________________________________________ 7. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the following: T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty 5.

Task 4: You are back in the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##. Check whether the availability check was carried out successfully by displaying the order status and the general data on the material components. 2. Save your order. 2005/Q2 . manually check the material availability of all material components in the order. 4. 1. Display the ATP quantities. Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. 3. enter the other process order that comes later in time in the change mode./reqd. All rights reserved. From the list. Write down the following: Continued on next page 194 © 2006 SAP AG. Conqty firmed Available qty STOCK SimReq Simulated requirements OrdRes Totals record Now display the scope of check. In this scenario.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Write down the following: Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. Do not release this order.

/reqd. All rights reserved. Post a goods issue for batch RA3050 of material T-RTA##. storage location 0002.300 l from plant 1100. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the following information about the stock situation: Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 Warehouse 0002 Batch RA3050 3. Conqty firmed Available qty STOCK SimReq Totals record OrdRes Simulated requirements How would you interpret the result? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Save the order. 2.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. Withdraw 1. Task 5: 1. Display the stock overview for material T-RTA## again. 4. 195 . Use movement type 201 and debit cost center 4258 for this. Display the stock overview of your material component T-RTA## in inventory management.

/reqd. 2005/Q2 . qty Available qty 3.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 Storage location 0002 Batch RA3050 Task 6: 1. Manually check the material availability of the material components in a collective check. From the list. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Enter today's date as the basic start date. Which information is displayed here? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the following: Requirement quantity: _________________________________________ Continued on next page 196 © 2006 SAP AG. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 5. 4. Enter 400. go into the process order you have just created in the change mode. 2. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##. Write down the data displayed in the list in the following table: Date MRP element MRP element data Rec.000 g as the quantity to be produced. Go to the Material shortfall overview. All rights reserved.

Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. Try to release the order. Conqty firmed Cum. Which new order status was set with regard to the missing material availability? _____________________________________________________ 7. Write down the following: Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. Write down the following: T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty 8. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Which setting determines the fact that the material availability for the order is automatically checked during order release? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG./reqd. Display the ATP quantities. All rights reserved. Display the general data on material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Confirmed quantity: _____________________________________ 6. 197 . ATP qty STOCK SimReq Simulated requirements OrdRes Totals record OrdRes Totals record How would you interpret the result? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 9.

4. Choose the order headers list and the standard layout. Change the committed quantity for the reservation that is furthest away in the future from 250 L to 200 L. 3. 2005/Q2 . 2. Choose checking rule ##. Enter backorder processing for material T-RTA##.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Which settings determine that users can decide whether they want to release the order despite the material shortage? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Do not release the order. All rights reserved. Save the order.) → Process Order → Reporting → Missing Parts Info System Hint: From the missing parts info system.. Task 7: Missing parts information system: 1. Choose (. Change the committed quantity for the earliest reservation from 150 L to 200 L. Task 8: Backorder processing: 1.. you can navigate directly to backorder processing. Save the data in backorder processing. Go into the mass processing for process orders. You can use the missing parts information system to analyze material shortage situations. Task 9: Collective availability check in mass processing: 1. Note: After changing the confirmation. the order status MACM that may have been set is removed. Continued on next page 198 © 2006 SAP AG.

Compare the result to your backorder processing in task 8. In the mass processing tab page. Analyze your three process orders from the list with regard to the committed quantities for the individual components from the list of the order information system. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. T-RTA##). To check whether the material document was canceled successfully. 2. choose the function material availability check. choose the production plant 1100 and the MRP controller S##. The function is to be executed immediately. Trigger the mass processing for all three orders at the same time.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check In the selection tab page. You can reset the availability data in an order using Process Order → Functions → Availability check → Reset material Task 12: 1. To get an ATP quantity overview for a material (for example. Set the function parameters so that the availability data is reset and that an ATP check for all materials is specified in the scope of processing. Now execute the function. All rights reserved. 199 . the system displays a list with your three orders for material T-HTB1##. Task 10: ATP quantity overview 1. display the stock overview for the material. For the following exercises. 3. cancel the material document you posted for the goods issue of material T-RTA## in task 5. choose Logistics → Production → Production Control → Control → Availability Overview Task 11: Reset the availability data in the order 1. According to your selection criteria.

: T-HTB1## Plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 600. All rights reserved. Create another process order of order type PO## for your material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Enter Today +4 weeks as the basic start date. 2005/Q2 .000 G Start: Today + 4 weeks Enter Save your order. Enter 600 000 g as the quantity to be produced. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Order quantity: 500.) → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. a) (.000 g Start: Today + 2 months Enter a) See description in the exercise Task 2: Create another process order of order type PO## for your material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Continued on next page 200 © 2006 SAP AG.. Enter 600 000 g as the quantity to be produced..Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Solution 17: Material Availability Check: Applying in Process Orders Task 1: 1. Enter Today + 4 weeks as the basic start date. 1.

/reqd. qty Available qty (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-HTB1## Plant: 1100 Enter 3. Date MRP element MRP element data Rec.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check 2. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##. Write down the data displayed in these lists in the following tables: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved./reqd. 201 . qty Available qty Today STOCK Reqmts date PR-ORD Order number /PO## 600 000 600 000 Reqmts date PR-ORD Order number /PO## 500 000 1 100 000 0 Display the stock/requirements lists for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. Write down the data displayed in the list in the following table: Date a) MRP element MRP element data Rec.

qty Available qty T-RTB## Date a) T-RTA## Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. qty Available qty Today STOCK Reqmts date OrdRes T-HTB1## 300 - 1 750 Reqmts date OrdRes T-HTB1## 250 - 1 450 2 000 T-RTB## 2 000 Continued on next page 202 © 2006 SAP AG./reqd.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 T-RTA## Date MRP element MRP element data Rec./reqd./reqd./reqd. qty Available qty MRP element MRP element data Rec. qty Available qty Today STOCK Reqmts date OrdRes T-HTB1## 300 - 1 700 Reqmts date OrdRes T-HTB1## 250 - 1 450 Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

3. From the list. Go to the material list of the process order and display the general data on the assigned material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Task 3: Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1## again. All rights reserved. Write down the following: T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty Have quantities been committed for the components by an availability check? ______________________________________________________ a) Choose Materials. T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity 300 l 300 kg Confirmed qty 0 0 No quantities have been committed by an availability check. Why did the system not check material availability when you created the order? Which settings would you have to make to specify that an automatic availability check is carried out during order creation? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Solution: See the exercise “Material availability check: Customizing settings”. task 3 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. Position the cursor on the MRP element of the process order that is chronologically first and choose the Change element icon. go into the process order that is chronologically first in the change mode. 203 . a) 2.

MACM Material committed 7. 5. the system automatically checked the availability of the material components. Solution: See the exercise “Material availability check: Customizing settings”. Display the ATP quantities. During order release. The requirements quantities were committed. T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity 300 l 300 kg Confirmed qty 300 l 300 kg Why did the system check material availability when you released the order? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) 6. Write down the following: Continued on next page 204 © 2006 SAP AG. Then display the general data for components T-RTA## and T-RTB## again.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 4. Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. All rights reserved. SCM340 Release the order. task 3 Which new order status was set with regard to the material availability check? ______________________________________________________ a) Go to the order header. 2005/Q2 . What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the following: T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty a) Choose the Release icon in the order.

All rights reserved. Conqty firmed Available qty STOCK SimReq Simulated requirements OrdRes Totals record Now display the scope of check. a) Position the cursor on the MRP element of the process order that is chronologically last and choose the Change Element icon. Save your order./reqd. a) In the material list. select the line for component T-RTA## and choose Material → Check availability. Choose ATP quantities./reqd. Date MRP element Today STOCK Reqmts date SimReq Reqmts date OrdRes MRP element data Rec. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. Conqty firmed Available qty 2 000 2 000 Simulated requirements 300 - 2 000 Totals record 250 - 0 2 000 Choose Scope of check. The Confirmation Proposal screen appears. enter the other process order that comes later in time in the change mode. From the list. 205 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. Go back to the material list and save your order. Task 4: You are back in the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##.

a) 4./reqd. No further instruction required Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. Conqty firmed Available qty STOCK SimReq Totals record OrdRes Simulated requirements How would you interpret the result? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 206 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the ATP quantities. Write down the following: Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. Check whether the availability check was carried out successfully by displaying the order status and the general data on the material components. SCM340 Do not release this order. Choose Material (Material availability check . 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 2.ATP) in the order. In this scenario. manually check the material availability of all material components in the order. a) 3.

Task 5: 1. a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-RTA## Plant: 1100 Execute icon 2. 207 . a) In the material list. Conqty firmed Available qty Today STOCK 2 000 1 700 Reqmts date SimReq Totals record 300 - Reqmts date OrdRes Simulated requirements 250 - 300 1 700 1 700 During the availability check of the process order that is chronologically first. The Confirmation Proposal screen appears. Go back to the material list and save the order. Choose ATP quantities.000 L of the present material stock is available for the current order. Write down the following information about the stock situation: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Save the order. an ATP quantity (available-to-promise quantity) of only 1. Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. For this reason. select the line for component T-RTA## and choose Material → Check availability. Display the stock overview of your material component T-RTA## in inventory management.700 L out of the 2./reqd. the system confirmed 300 L of component T-RTA## to this order. All rights reserved.

Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 2 000 550 Storage location 0002 2 000 550 Batch RA3050 2 000 0 Post a goods issue for batch RA3050 of material T-RTA##. Withdraw 1. Cost Center: 4258 Material: T-RTA## Quantity: 1300 Batch: RA3050 Save the goods issue. All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 Warehouse 0002 Batch RA3050 a) 3. Display the stock overview for material T-RTA## again. a) (…) → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Issue Movement type: 201 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Choose Enter. Use movement type 201 and debit cost center 4258 for this. 4. Write down the following: Continued on next page 208 © 2006 SAP AG.300 l from plant 1100. storage location 0002. 2005/Q2 . The Enter Goods Issue: New Items screen appears.

2. Write down the data displayed in the list in the following table: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter 400..) → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-HTB1## Plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 400.000 G Start: Today Enter Save your order. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 Storage location 0002 Batch RA3050 a) (…) → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Unrestricted use Reserved Plant 1100 700 550 Storage location 0002 700 550 Batch RA3050 700 0 Task 6: 1.. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-HTB1##. All rights reserved.000 g as the quantity to be produced. a) (. 209 . Enter today's date as the basic start date.

The system issues the message Material shortage for order. MRP element data Rec. All rights reserved. 5. qty Available qty (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Date MRP MRP element element data Today STOCK Rec. 2005/Q2 . Which information is displayed here? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the following: Continued on next page 210 © 2006 SAP AG. a) 4.ATP) in the order./reqd. go into the process order you have just created in the change mode.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Date a) 3. Manually check the material availability of the material components in a collective check. Go to the Material shortfall overview. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Choose Material (Material availability check ./reqd. qty Available qty 0 Reqmts PR-ORD Order number date /PO## 400 000 400 000 Reqmts PR-ORD Order number date /PO##/FR 600 000 1 000 000 Reqmts PR-ORD Order number date /PO## 500 000 1 500 000 From the list. MRP element SCM340 Position the cursor on the MRP element of the new process order and choose the Change element icon.

MSPT Material shortage Display the general data on material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##. However. All rights reserved. T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity 200 L 200 kg Confirmed qty 150 L 200 kg Check the material availability for component T-RTA## individually. Write down the following: T-RTA## T-RTB## Requirement quantity Confirmed qty a) 8. Display the ATP quantities. only 150 L can be confirmed. the requirements quantity for material component T-RTA## amounts to 200 L. 6.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Requirement quantity: _________________________________________ Confirmed quantity: _____________________________________ a) Choose Material shortfall overvi For the current process order. 211 . Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Requirement quantity: 200 Confirmed qty: 150 Which new order status was set with regard to the missing material availability? _____________________________________________________ a) 7.

/reqd. the system cannot cover the requirements quantity of 200 L although 700 L would be available on the requirements date. ATP qty Today STOCK 700 150 Reqmts date SimReq Simulated requirements 200 - 0 150 Reqmts date OrdRes Totals record 300 - 300 150 Reqmts date OrdRes Totals record 250 - 250 150 For the current order. Conqty firmed Cum. Try to release the order. an ATP quantity of 150 L is available for component T-RTA##.Conqty firmed Cum.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Date MRP element SCM340 MRP element data Rec./reqd. The reason for this is that 550 L of component T-RTA## have already been promised to later process orders in availability checks carried out before. Due to the ATP logic. 9. ATP qty STOCK SimReq Simulated requirements OrdRes Totals record OrdRes Totals record How would you interpret the result? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Date MRP element MRP element data Rec. 2005/Q2 . Which message does the system issue? Continued on next page 212 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

You can use the missing parts information system to analyze material shortage situations. Save the order. Do not release the order. Due to the Customizing settings for the checking control that you have made in the exercise “Material availability check: Customizing settings”. you also specified that the user decides whether an order will be released in case of a material shortage. All rights reserved. In the checking control settings. 213 . the material availability is automatically checked during order release. Choose (. Save the order. task 3. Task 7: Missing parts information system: 1. a) See exercise Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.) → Process Order → Reporting → Missing Parts Info System Hint: From the missing parts info system.. the system tells you that there is a Material shortage. Choose Cancel. you can navigate directly to backorder processing.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Which setting determines the fact that the material availability for the order is automatically checked during order release? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Which settings determine that users can decide whether they want to release the order despite the material shortage? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Do not release the order.. a) When you try to release the order.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 8: Backorder processing: 1. Change the committed quantity for the reservation that is furthest away in the future from 250 L to 200 L. Choose checking rule ##. a) Select the line of the reservation that comes first in time and choose Change confirmation. a) No further instruction required Continued on next page 214 © 2006 SAP AG. Committed: 200 Choose Edit → Copy or the relevant function key. 2005/Q2 . Save the data in backorder processing. 4. 2. 3. a) Select the line for the reservation that is furthest away in the future and choose Change confirmation. the order status MACM that may have been set is removed. a) (…) → Process Order → Reporting → Backorder Processing → Material Material: T-RTA## Plant: 1100 MRP area: 1100 Checking Rule: ## Enter The Backorder Processing: Overview screen appears. Change the committed quantity for the earliest reservation from 150 L to 200 L. All rights reserved. Enter backorder processing for material T-RTA##. Note: After changing the confirmation. Committed: 200 Choose Edit → Copy or the relevant function key.

choose the production plant 1100 and the MRP controller S##. To get an ATP quantity overview for a material (for example. the system displays a list with your three orders for material T-HTB1##. Set the function parameters so that the availability data is reset and that an ATP check for all materials is specified in the scope of processing. a) To navigate to an order from within the list.SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Task 9: Collective availability check in mass processing: 1. choose Change order or Display order. a) 2. 215 . Now execute the function. In the mass processing tab page. See description in the exercise Analyze your three process orders from the list with regard to the committed quantities for the individual components from the list of the order information system. All rights reserved. In the selection tab page. Choose the order headers list and the standard layout. The function is to be executed immediately. You can reset the availability data in an order using Process Order → Functions → Availability check → Reset material Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Trigger the mass processing for all three orders at the same time. T-RTA##). (…) → Process Order → Tools → Mass Processing According to your selection criteria. a) 3. choose the function material availability check. Compare the result to your backorder processing in task 8. choose Logistics → Production → Production Control → Control → Availability Overview a) See exercise Task 11: Reset the availability data in the order 1. Task 10: ATP quantity overview 1. Go into the mass processing for process orders.

display the stock overview for the material.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release a) SCM340 See exercise Task 12: 1. cancel the material document you posted for the goods issue of material T-RTA## in task 5. a) (…) → Inventory Management → Material Document → Cancel/Reverse Use matchcode search (F4 for the Material doc. field) to search for the desired material document: Material: T-RTA## Movement type: 201 Execute icon The system displays the material document. The system issues a warning in which it tells you that batch RA3050 has already been posted in stock. Save your cancellation. Double-click the line in the list. For the following exercises. 2005/Q2 . Choose Enter to confirm this warning. 216 © 2006 SAP AG. The Cancel Material Document: Selection Screen appears. field. All rights reserved. The system copies the document number in the Material doc. Choose Enter. To check whether the material document was canceled successfully.

SCM340 Lesson: Material Availability Check Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the Customizing settings required for material availability checks • Explain the functions of the material availability check and carry them out in the system 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 217 .

you will be able to: • • • • Explain the Customizing settings for batch determination Create a batch search strategy Make the appropriate settings for batch determination in the material master records of your material components Carry out batch determination for your process order Business Example You will get an overview of the Customizing settings required for batch determination for process orders. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. Afterwards. 2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Lesson Overview This lesson familiarizes you with the functions and settings of the batch determination for process orders. All rights reserved. Batch Determination in the Process Order Figure 44: Batch Determination in the Process Order 218 © 2006 SAP AG. you will create a batch search strategy and test the batch determination function in different scenarios.

The batch determination function is also available for the following applications: • • • • • Production order Repetitive manufacturing Sales (sales order and delivery) Inventory management (goods movement) Warehouse management Batch Determination: Search Strategy Figure 45: Batch Determination: Search Strategy The batch search strategy specifies the criteria according to which batches are selected in batch determination and the steps that are further taken with them. 219 . The system looks for batches in stock according to user-defined selection criteria. You can assign this class either directly to the material component or to a search strategy. You can define the selection conditions for batch determination as characteristic values in classes of class type Batch. The characteristics of a batch are also defined by characteristic values.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination You can use the batch determination function to assign batches required for production. All rights reserved. On the basis of the selection conditions and batch classification. the system selects suitable batches in stock. The batch search strategy is an application-specific master record. An availability check is carried out at batch level. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

The following information can be stored: • • • A selection class A sort rule Control parameters for batch split and the quantity proposal The search procedure is the starting point for batch determination. Batch Determination: Customizing Figure 46: Batch Determination: Customizing Condition tables define the combination of fields representing the key of the batch search strategy. Search procedures are assigned to application-specific keys (in process manufacturing. 220 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. During batch determination.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 You create a batch search strategy with reference to a strategy type (= condition type) defined in Customizing. 2005/Q2 . A strategy type contains default values that are taken over when a batch search strategy is created. this is the process order) in a 1:1 relationship. the system tries to find strategy records (= batch search strategies) for these strategy types. The access sequence specifies the sequence in which the system accesses condition tables during batch determination. A search procedure is assigned several strategy types.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 221 .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Batch Determination: Process Figure 47: Batch Determination: Process Settings in the Material Master Record Figure 48: Settings in the Material Master Record The 'Batch entry' indicator determines when batches have to be determined for the material components of orders.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. The batches must be entered in the order before the goods issue is posted. © 2006 SAP AG. The batches are automatically determined when the order is released. You do not need to enter a batch number in the process order. The batches must be entered in the order before the order is released.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 The indicator can have the following meanings: • • • • 222 The batches must only be determined when posting the goods issues. but not necessarily before the order is released.

Task: 1. Which elements can you use to control batch determination for process orders? Outline the meaning of these elements and how they depend on each other. All rights reserved. You will outline the general process of batch determination. you will be able to: • Explain the elements controlling batch determination for process orders • Describe the general process of batch determination Business Example You will get an overview of the elements available for controlling batch determination for process orders. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Exercise 18: Batch Determination: Overview Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 223 .

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 2. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 224 © 2006 SAP AG. SCM340 Outline the general process of batch determination for process orders.

Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. For information on the elements that control batch determination. “Batch Determination: Search Strategy”. Outline the general process of batch determination for process orders. 225 . Which elements can you use to control batch determination for process orders? Outline the meaning of these elements and how they depend on each other.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Solution 18: Batch Determination: Overview Task: 1. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) 2. All rights reserved. and “Batch Determination: Customizing” in your participant handbook. see the pages “Batch Determination in the Process Order”.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) 226 For information on the batch determination process. see the page “Batch Determination: Process” in your participant handbook.

227 . All rights reserved. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Display condition tables • Maintain access sequences • Create strategy types • Create batch search procedures • Define sort rules Business Example You will make the appropriate Customizing settings for batch determination for process orders. Task 1: 1. Display condition tables 30 and 599 for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. get an overview of the Customizing activities that must be carried out for setting up batch determination for process orders. 2. Task 2: Display condition tables 30 and 599 for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. Once again. 1. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. Write down which fields have been selected from the field catalog for table 30 Order type/plant/component. Write down which fields have been selected from the field catalog for table 599 Order type/plant.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Exercise 19: Batch Determination: Customizing Settings Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise.

2005/Q2 . Tab Display the fields for the above tables. Display the accesses for access sequence CO01 OrdType/plant/material. Display the access sequences that have been defined for batch determination in process orders in Customizing.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 3: Display the access sequences that have been defined for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. 3. define strategy type GR## Strategy type grp ## for batch determination in process orders as follows: 1. 2. All rights reserved. ## 2. Write down the field descriptions of the fields which can be used as the key for a search strategy (see task 2). Access sequence CO01 Accesses AcNo 3. Access CO01 10 Table 30 Field name long Access CO01 20 Table 599 Field name long Task 4: In Customizing. Write down in which sequence the system accesses which condition tables during batch determination. 1. Define the strategy type Grp. Do not yet define a selection class. Continued on next page 228 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter access sequence CO01 for the strategy type.

Specify that a batch split of no more than 3 batches is allowed for the time being. Task 6: 1. Save your settings. 1. Task 5: In Customizing. Save your strategy type. Display the classification data. Batch determination is to be carried out interactively. Assign your batch search procedure ZZGR## to your process order type PO## in plant 1100 in Customizing. Use the field help (F1) for information on the meaning of this indicator. To which classes of class type 023 Batch have the materials been assigned? Which characteristics have been assigned to these classes? To answer the second question. define batch search procedure ZZGR## Batch search procedure grp ## for batch determination in process orders. 1. 229 . 5. 2.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination 4. 9. 2. Save your batch search procedure. Do not yet define a sort sequence. Define the batch search procedure. Define strategy type (= condition type) GR## as step 1 / counter 1 for batch search procedure control. Specify that the quantities are displayed in the material's stockkeeping unit during batch determination. All rights reserved. Task 7: Create a second session and display the classification data of the material master records for materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. Specify that an overdelivery is allowed in batch determination. 8. Set the Check batch indicator. 7. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. jump to the assigned class for the relevant material from the classification view. 6. Specify that the number of batch splits may be changed in the process order.

1. Task 10: 1. Save your sort rule. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. Specify that during batch determination in the process order you want the system to sort the batches found for materials T-RTA## or T-RTB## in descending order of the values for characteristics N-001 or N-002. 2. Create the selection class. Task 9: Create sort rule SOGR## Sort sequence grp ## in Customizing. Assign the characteristics N-001 Refractive index and N-002 Melting point to the selection class.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Class SCM340 Description Characteristic description T-RTA## T-RTB## Task 8: Create selection class SEGR## Selection class grp ## in Customizing. 3. 1. Create sort rule SOGR## 'Sort sequence grp ##' in Customizing. 2005/Q2 . 2. Assign the above characteristics N-001 and N-002 to your sort sequence. Save the selection class. 230 Assign your selection class SEGR## and sort sequence SOGR## to your strategy type GR##.

Write down which fields have been selected from the field catalog for table 599 Order type/plant. Write down which fields have been selected from the field catalog for table 30 Order type/plant/component. Task 2: Display condition tables 30 and 599 for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. get an overview of the Customizing activities that must be carried out for setting up batch determination for process orders. Display condition tables 30 and 599 for batch determination in process orders in Customizing.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Solution 19: Batch Determination: Customizing Settings Task 1: 1. Once again. All rights reserved. 2. see the page “Batch determination: Customizing” in your participant handbook.General → Batch Management → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Condition Tables → Define process order condition tables Choose Display batch determination condition table (process order). 231 . a) Customizing: Logistics . a) For information on the settings for batch determination for process orders. 1. 3. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Table: 30 Enter Selected fields: Order type Plant Material Choose Back. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Table: 599 Enter Selected fields: Order type Plant Task 3: Display the access sequences that have been defined for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. Continued on next page 232 © 2006 SAP AG.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Assess Sequences → Define process order access sequences Choose Enter to confirm the information telling you that the table is client-independent. Display the access sequences that have been defined for batch determination in process orders in Customizing. a) Customizing: (.. Write down in which sequence the system accesses which condition tables during batch determination.. 2. Display the accesses for access sequence CO01 OrdType/plant/material. 1.

Access CO01 10 Table 30 Field name long Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Access sequence CO01 Accesses AcNo a) Tab Select the line for access sequence CO01 and choose Accesses in the dialog structure. 233 . Write down the field descriptions of the fields which can be used as the key for a search strategy (see task 2). All rights reserved. AcNo Tab 10 30 Order type/plant/component 20 599 Order type/plant Display the fields for the above tables. Access sequence CO01 Accesses 3.

. Define the strategy type Grp.. GR## Strategy type grp ## Enter access sequence CO01 for the strategy type. All rights reserved. Access CO01 10 Table 30 Field name Order type long Plant Material Access CO01 20 Table 599 Field name Order type long Plant Task 4: In Customizing.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Access CO01 20 Table 599 Field name long a) Select the line for the relevant table and choose Fields in the dialog structure. 2005/Q2 . define strategy type GR## Strategy type grp ## for batch determination in process orders as follows: 1. ## a) Customizing: (.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Strategy Types → Define Process Order Strategy Types Choose New Entries. a) Access sequence: CO01 Continued on next page 234 © 2006 SAP AG. Condition type: 2.

Do not yet define a selection class. ____ (no entry) Do not yet define a sort sequence. a) No. a) Sort sequence: 5. a) Class: 4. ____ (no entry) Specify that a batch split of no more than 3 batches is allowed for the time being. a) Display UoM: 9. A Batch determination is to be carried out interactively. of splits: 6. 235 . 3 Specify that the number of batch splits may be changed in the process order. a) X 7. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Changes allowed Specify that an overdelivery is allowed in batch determination. OverDel allowed Specify that the quantities are displayed in the material's stockkeeping unit during batch determination.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination 3. All rights reserved. a) X 8.

Level: 1 Cntr: 1 CTyp: GR## Save your batch search procedure. Task 6: 1.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Save your strategy type.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search Procedure Definition → Define Process Order Search Procedure Choose New Entries. 2005/Q2 . a) Customizing: (. Define the batch search procedure. 2.. Save your batch search procedure. Save your strategy type. Continued on next page 236 © 2006 SAP AG.. Assign your batch search procedure ZZGR## to your process order type PO## in plant 1100 in Customizing. a) Select the line for your search procedure and choose Control in the dialog structure. All rights reserved. 1. Task 5: In Customizing. define batch search procedure ZZGR## Batch search procedure grp ## for batch determination in process orders. Choose New Entries. a) X Dialog batch determin. Procedure: ZZGR## Description: Batch search procedure grp ## Define strategy type (= condition type) GR## as step 1 / counter 1 for batch search procedure control.

237 . a) Customizing: (…) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation → Assign Search Procedures to Production and Activate Check → Assign Search Procedure to Process Order and Activate Check Make the following assignment: Plant: 1100 Type: PO## Search: ZZGR## Check batch: X Save your settings.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-RTA## or T-RTB## Enter Choose Classification. Save your settings. Display the classification data. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter 2. Use the field help (F1) for information on the meaning of this indicator. 1. All rights reserved. jump to the assigned class for the relevant material from the classification view. a) Logistics → Production . To which classes of class type 023 Batch have the materials been assigned? Which characteristics have been assigned to these classes? To answer the second question.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Set the Check batch indicator. Task 7: Create a second session and display the classification data of the material master records for materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##.

tab. 2005/Q2 .. Class Description Characteristic description T-RTA## N-001 N-001 Refractive index T-RTB## N-002 N-002 Melting point Task 8: Create selection class SEGR## Selection class grp ## in Customizing. a) See exercise Continued on next page 238 © 2006 SAP AG. Class: SEGR## Class type: 023 Enter Description: 2. Select the line for the class and choose Environment → Display Master Data. All rights reserved.. To display the assigned characteristic. a) Customizing: (.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Class SCM340 Description Characteristic description T-RTA## T-RTB## a) Choose class type 023 Batch. choose the Char. Selection class grp ## Assign the characteristics N-001 Refractive index and N-002 Melting point to the selection class. Save the selection class. Create the selection class.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Define Selection Classes Choose Create Selection Classes. 1.

Sort sequence grp ## Assign the above characteristics N-001 and N-002 to your sort sequence. a) Description Descending N-001 X N-002 X Save your selection class. Save your sort rule. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Create sort rule SOGR## 'Sort sequence grp ##' in Customizing.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Create Selection Classes Choose Create Selection Classes. 1. a) Customizing: (.. 239 . All rights reserved..SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Task 9: Create sort rule SOGR## Sort sequence grp ## in Customizing. Sort sequence: SOGR## Enter Description: 2. Description N-001 N-002 3. a) Choose characteristics. Specify that during batch determination in the process order you want the system to sort the batches found for materials T-RTA## or T-RTB## in descending order of the values for characteristics N-001 or N-002.

Assign your selection class SEGR## and sort sequence SOGR## to your strategy type GR##.. Save. 240 © 2006 SAP AG.) → Batch Determination and Batch Check → Strategy Types → Define Process Order Strategy Types Double-click on Strategy type GR##.. 2005/Q2 . Enter selection class SEGR##. a) Customizing: (.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 10: 1. All rights reserved. Enter sort sequence SOGR##.

Display the detail data for both strategies and check whether the system has correctly copied the settings you made in Customizing for strategy type GR##. and your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. Task 1: 1. 5. you will be able to: • Describe the function of a batch search strategy • Create a batch search strategy Business Example You will create batch search strategies with reference to the strategy type you defined in Customizing. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. Create strategy records for your order type PO##. 4. Which prerequisite must be fulfilled to be able to create a batch search strategy? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: Create batch search strategies with reference to your strategy type GR##. 2. No selection class has been assigned to the components.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Exercise 20: Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Select key combination Order type/plant/component. Outline the function of batch search strategies. 3. Create batch search strategies with reference to your strategy type GR##. All rights reserved. 241 . plant 1100.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Choose Selection criteria to adopt selection class SEGR## assigned to your strategy type GR## for each component. 155 .165 No sort sequence has been assigned to the components.3895 – 1. 2005/Q2 . Choose Sort to adopt sort sequence SOGR## assigned to your strategy type GR## for each component. 242 © 2006 SAP AG.3913 Melting point Material T-RTB## Characteristic description Value Refractive index Melting point 6. Assign the following values to the characteristics as selection criteria for batch determination: Material T-RTA## Characteristic description Value Refractive index 1. All rights reserved.

Which prerequisite must be fulfilled to be able to create a batch search strategy? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the elements that control material availability checks for process orders. 243 . a) Key combination: X Order type/plant/component Enter Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Outline the function of batch search strategies. All rights reserved. 1. a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Environment → Batch Search Strategy → Create Strategy type: GR## Enter 2. Create batch search strategies with reference to your strategy type GR##.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Solution 20: Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy Task 1: 1. Task 2: Create batch search strategies with reference to your strategy type GR##. see the page “Batch determination: Search strategy” in your participant handbook. Select key combination Order type/plant/component.

No selection class has been assigned to the components.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 3. Continued on next page 244 © 2006 SAP AG. 155 .165 Select the line for the corresponding material and choose Selection criteria. 2005/Q2 . a) Order type: PO## Plant: 1100 Material T-RTA## T-RTB## 4. No sort sequence has been assigned to the components.3895 – 1. SCM340 Create strategy records for your order type PO##. a) 5.3913 Melting point Material T-RTB## Characteristic description Value Refractive index Melting point a) 6. Choose Selection criteria to adopt selection class SEGR## assigned to your strategy type GR## for each component. plant 1100. Select the line for the corresponding material and choose the Details icon. All rights reserved. and your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. Assign the following values to the characteristics as selection criteria for batch determination: Material T-RTA## Characteristic description Value Refractive index 1. Display the detail data for both strategies and check whether the system has correctly copied the settings you made in Customizing for strategy type GR##.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. a) Select the line for the corresponding material and choose Sort.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Choose Sort to adopt sort sequence SOGR## assigned to your strategy type GR## for each component. 245 . Save your strategy records.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 246 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. . All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. T-RTA## and T-RTB## are raw materials and are subject to batch management. 247 . 1. we need the material components T-RTA## and T-RTB## to produce material T-HTB1##. Write down the following: Component Class Characteristic value T-RTA## T-RTB## 2. The selection criteria for batch determination have been defined as characteristic values for the BOM components in master recipe T-ASA##. you will be able to: • Perform a manual batch determination in the dialog mode • Analyze the process of batch determination Business Example You will test the batch determination function in the process order. Display the selection criteria.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Exercise 21: Batch Determination: Applying in Process Orders Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Where can you define criteria for the selection of batches for batch determination in process orders? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: In our example. Task 1: 1. Note: BOM classification overrules the selection class from the search strategy. Display the stock lists for materials T-RTA## and T-RTB## in inventory management.

1. 3. Which information message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Which additional option is available to define selection criteria for batch determination? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 248 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.3907 T-RTB## 2000 RB4042 162 T-RTB## 2000 RB4043 164 Display the stock lists for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB## again to check the goods receipt posting. 2. Determine a batch manually for material component T-RTA##. 4. Task 3: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Post further goods receipts for your components T-RTA## and T-RTB## as described in the following: Movement type: 501 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Material Quantity Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## 2000 RA3051 1. 2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Which batches are available in stock? Which classification data do these batches have? Write down the following: Material Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## T-RTB## 3.3905 T-RTA## 2000 RA3052 1. Go to the material list. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date.

Which batches did the system select in stock? Write down the following: Batch 8. steps 2 & 3). Compare the selected batches with the stock situation of material T-RTA## (see task 2. Display the strategy analysis. 4. 249 . Why did the system not select batch RA3052? ______________________________________________________ Compare the classification data for the batches selected with the selection criteria. Display the log on batch determination. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Which setting has top priority? _____________________________________________________ Confirm the info message. What information does the system provide on the batch determination process for component T-RTA##? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 7. Which batch search strategy did the system use for batch determination? _____________________________________________________ For which strategy type of the batch search procedure did the system find a strategy record (= condition record)? _____________________________________________________ 6. The batch selection screen appears. Split quantity Available qty SLoc Characteristic sort. Why is batch determination carried out in the dialog mode? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 5.

11. Task 5: Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Task 4: In the following scenario. 2005/Q2 . Copy the batch determination result to your process order. 2. SCM340 Why does the system propose the stock of batch RA3051 as the stock to be used to cover the requirements quantity? ______________________________________________________ Display the assigned sort rule in the strategy information. All rights reserved. Analyze batch determination for this scenario in the same way as in exercise 3. Determine a batch manually for material component T-RTA##. Compare the strategy information with the strategy you have created for the key combination Order type PO##/plant 1100/material T-RTA## (see the exercise “Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy”. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. 1. 10. batch determination is to take place using the selection criteria of your selection class SEGR##. Therefore. Now the value ranges of selection class SEGR## are used as the criteria for batch selection. delete the class assignments for components T-RTA## and T-RTB## in the BOM for recipe T-ASA##. Go to the material list. 1. task 2). 3. 250 © 2006 SAP AG. Which information message does the system issue in this scenario? ______________________________________________________ 4.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 9.

The selection criteria for batch determination have been defined as characteristic values for the BOM components in master recipe T-ASA##. Where can you define criteria for the selection of batches for batch determination in process orders? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the criteria for the selection of batches for batch determination in process orders. T-RTA## and T-RTB## are raw materials and are subject to batch management.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Solution 21: Batch Determination: Applying in Process Orders Task 1: 1. Note: BOM classification overrules the selection class from the search strategy. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 2: In our example. we need the material components T-RTA## and T-RTB## to produce material T-HTB1##. see the page “Batch determination in process orders” in your participant handbook. Display the selection criteria. All rights reserved. 1. 251 .

All rights reserved.3905 T-RTB## N-002 Melting point 158.0 – 162. Component Class Characteristic Description T-RTA## N-001 Refractive index 1.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Component SCM340 Class Characteristic value T-RTA## T-RTB## a) Logistics → Production . 2005/Q2 .Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Display Recipe Group: T-ASA## Choose Enter. Which batches are available in stock? Which classification data do these batches have? Write down the following: Continued on next page 252 © 2006 SAP AG. The operation overview appears. Choose the Materials tab. Choose BOM.3901 -1.0 Display the stock lists for materials T-RTA## and T-RTB## in inventory management. Select the relevant BOM item and choose Extras → Batch Classification. 2.

253 . Material Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## RA3050 Refractive index 1.3903 T-RTB## RB4041 Melting point 160 Post further goods receipts for your components T-RTA## and T-RTB## as described in the following: Movement type: 501 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 3. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Material Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## T-RTB## a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-RTA## or T-RTB## Execute icon Position the cursor on the list line of the batch displayed and choose Extras → Batch classification.

All rights reserved.3907 T-RTB## RB4042 162 T-RTB## RB4043 164 Save your goods receipts. Continued on next page 254 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .3907 T-RTB## 2000 RB4042 162 T-RTB## 2000 RB4043 164 a) (…) → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Movement type: 501 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Material Quantity Batch T-RTA## 2000 RA3051 T-RTA## 2000 RA3052 T-RTB## 2000 RB4042 T-RTB## 2000 RB4043 Enter The system now displays the characteristics of the above four batches one after the other for value assignment. Enter the following values for the batch characteristics. Material Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## RA3051 1.3905 T-RTA## RA3052 1.3905 T-RTA## 2000 RA3052 1.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Material Quantity Batch Characteristic Description T-RTA## 2000 RA3051 1.

Which information message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Which additional option is available to define selection criteria for batch determination? _____________________________________________________ Which setting has top priority? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.000 G Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. 255 . Go to the material list. Display the stock lists for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB## again to check the goods receipt posting.. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Select the material list item for component T-RTA## and choose Material → Batch Management → Trigger Batch Determination or the relevant icon in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen.: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 100. a) Choose Materials. 3. Determine a batch manually for material component T-RTA##. a) (. 1..SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination 4.) Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. All rights reserved. a) (…) → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-RTA## or T-RTB## Execute icon Task 3: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100.

As an alternative to BOM classification. Which batch search strategy did the system use for batch determination? _____________________________________________________ For which strategy type of the batch search procedure did the system find a strategy record (= condition record)? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Strategy analysis. 2005/Q2 . 6. The Batch Determination: Select Batches screen appears. a) The system issues the following message: Batches are selected for T-RTA## according to BOM classification. 5. task 2). The batch selection screen appears. Why is batch determination carried out in the dialog mode? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Enter. Batch search procedure: ZZGR## Strategy type: GR## Choose Back. and the exercise “Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy”. Display the strategy analysis. you can assign a selection class to the batch search strategy.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Confirm the info message. BOM classification has priority over the selection class. All rights reserved. Display the log on batch determination. task 4. 4. What information does the system provide on the batch determination process for component T-RTA##? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 256 © 2006 SAP AG. Batch determination is carried out in the dialog mode because you have made the corresponding settings in the batch search strategy (see the exercise “Batch Determination: Customizing Settings”.

Which batches did the system select in stock? Write down the following: Batch Split quantity Available qty SLoc Characteristic sort. All rights reserved. Position the cursor on the relevant batch and choose Classification. 7. Batch records are being read .. a) The classification data of batch RA3052 do not match the selection criteria.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Logs. RA3051 50 2000 0002 1. Availability of batches ... 257 . If you choose the Expand all icon..3903 RA3050 8. The selection criteria from the strategy record have been overwritten Search according to selection criteria . the system displays further details. steps 2 & 3).. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. The system displays a comparison of the batch classification data and the selection criteria for the relevant BOM item. a) Batch Split quantity Available quantity SLoc Characteristic sort. Batches are being sorted .3905 2000 0002 1... Compare the selected batches with the stock situation of material T-RTA## (see task 2.. Why did the system not select batch RA3052? ______________________________________________________ Compare the classification data for the batches selected with the selection criteria.

The system copies the batch it proposed to the material list. Compare the strategy information with the strategy you have created for the key combination Order type PO##/plant 1100/material T-RTA## (see the exercise “Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy”. 10. delete the class assignments for components T-RTA## and T-RTB## in the BOM for recipe T-ASA##. Choose BOM. task 2 step 9). SCM340 Why does the system propose the stock of batch RA3051 as the stock to be used to cover the requirements quantity? ______________________________________________________ Display the assigned sort rule in the strategy information. Task 4: In the following scenario. The operation overview appears. Continued on next page 258 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Production Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: T-ASA## Choose Enter. the system proposes to withdraw the requirements quantity from the stock of batch RA3051. 2005/Q2 . 11. Choose the Materials tab. Copy the batch determination result to your process order. a) Choose Strategy info. Select the line for the assigned class and choose Edit → Delete.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 9. a) Due to the sort rule you defined in the batch search strategy (see the exercise “Batch Determination: Batch Search Strategy”. batch determination is to take place using the selection criteria of your selection class SEGR##. Therefore. All rights reserved. The system displays the assigned sort rule as well as miscellaneous other information. Save your master recipe. a) Choose Copy. 1. task 2). Select the relevant BOM item and choose Extras → Batch Classification.

. 3. Determine a batch manually for material component T-RTA##. Which information message does the system issue in this scenario? ______________________________________________________ a) 4.: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 100. a) 2005/Q2 No further instruction required © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Task 5: Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Select the material list item for component T-RTA## and choose Material → Batch Management → Trigger Batch Determination or the relevant icon in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. All rights reserved. a) (. 259 . Now the value ranges of selection class SEGR## are used as the criteria for batch selection. Go to the material list.. Analyze batch determination for this scenario in the same way as in exercise 3. The system issues the following message: Batches are selected for T-RTA## according to component strategy.000 G Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date.) Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. 1. a) Choose Materials.

All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 260 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. .

Which options are available for this indicator? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 4. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Display the log on order release. 1. Which function does the Batch entry indicator have? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. Task 1: Enter the MRP 2 view of your material T-RTA## in plant 1100 in the change mode. 1. 261 . Try to release the order. 2. Task 2: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. you will be able to: • Set various batch entry scenarios for the components of your process orders Business Example You will test different batch determination scenarios. Assign the value 1 to the Batch entry indicator.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Exercise 22: Batch Determination: Batch Entry Scenarios Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 2. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Why can you not release the order? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. All rights reserved. Enter the MRP 2 view of your material T-RTA## in plant 1100 in the change mode. Save the material master record.

Can you release the order now? _____________________________________________________ Task 3: 1. All rights reserved. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 of plant 1100. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. 2. Which error message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ 4. Try to post a goods issue for your material component T-RTA## for this order. Again. Assign the value 2 to the Batch entry indicator for your material T-RTA##. 1. Use movement type 261. Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. Save the order. 5.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 _____________________________________________________ 3. Now try to release the order again. 2005/Q2 . Continued on next page 262 © 2006 SAP AG. Release the order. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Assign the value 3 to the Batch entry indicator for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. 4. Manually carry out batch determination for component T-RTA##. try to post a goods issue for your material component T-RTA##. Enter your process order in the change mode and manually carry out batch determination for component T-RTA#. Save your order and write down the order number: ___________________ 3. Task 4: Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. Can you now post a goods issue for the order? _____________________________________________________ Task 5: 1.

Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. Display the material list after you have released the order. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. Release the order.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Task 6: Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. 263 . Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. All rights reserved. 1.

Which function does the Batch entry indicator have? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) 3. Continued on next page 264 © 2006 SAP AG. a) (…) Material → Change → Immediately Material: T-RTA## Enter Go to the MRP 2 view.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Solution 22: Batch Determination: Batch Entry Scenarios Task 1: Enter the MRP 2 view of your material T-RTA## in plant 1100 in the change mode. Enter Go to plant 1100. Save the material master record. see the page “Settings in the Material Master Record” in your participant handbook. 2005/Q2 . see the page “Settings in the Material Master Record” in your participant handbook. Assign the value 1 to the Batch entry indicator. Enter the MRP 2 view of your material T-RTA## in plant 1100 in the change mode. For information on the different options for the Batch entry indicator. 1. a) Batch entry: 1 Save the material master record. For information on the different options for the Batch entry indicator. All rights reserved. Which options are available for this indicator? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) 4. Enter 2.

Try to release the order. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100..SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Task 2: Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. 265 . See exercise Now try to release the order again. a) 4.) Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. Manually carry out batch determination for component T-RTA##.. 1. Why can you not release the order? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Release icon The system issues the message: Release rejected (check log). The log contains the message: You must enter the batch for material T-RTA##.: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 100. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Display the log on order release. All rights reserved. Goto → Logs → Release Choose Error messages. a) (.000 G Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. Can you release the order now? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 3.

) Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 100. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 of plant 1100.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 _____________________________________________________ a) After batch determination for component T-RTA##. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. All rights reserved. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. Try to post a goods issue for your material component T-RTA## for this order. you can release the order.. Task 3: 1. Continued on next page 266 © 2006 SAP AG. Use movement type 261. 1. plant 1100: Batch entry: 2 Task 4: Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. Release the order. Save your order and write down the order number: ___________________ a) Choose the Release icon Save your order. Assign the value 2 to the Batch entry indicator for your material T-RTA##. MRP 2 view.. 2005/Q2 .000 G Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. a) Change material T-RTA##. a) (. 3.

Save the order. 4. MRP 2 view. Enter the order number from exercise 4-2.. 267 . Task 5: 1. The system displays the error message: No batch specified in production order. All rights reserved. See exercise Again. you can post a goods issue for the order for this component. Select component T-RTA## and save. The Enter Goods Issue: Selection Screen appears. Can you now post a goods issue for the order? _____________________________________________________ a) After you have carried out batch determination for component T-RTA## in the order.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Which error message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Movement type: 261 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Choose To order . Choose Enter.. a) Change materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. Enter your process order in the change mode and manually carry out batch determination for component T-RTA#. Assign the value 3 to the Batch entry indicator for your materials T-RTA## and T-RTB##. plant 1100: Batch entry: 3 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. The system offers you the two material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##. a) 5. try to post a goods issue for your material component T-RTA##.

Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. 2005/Q2 . The system automatically carried out batch determination for material components T-RTA## and T-RTB## during order release 268 © 2006 SAP AG.000 G Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2.) Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. 1. Display the material list after you have released the order. Release the order. All rights reserved. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. a) (.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 6: Create a process order for material T-HTB1##. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Release icon Choose Materials...: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 100. Create a process order for material T-HTB1##.

269 .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the Customizing settings for batch determination • Create a batch search strategy • Make the appropriate settings for batch determination in the material master records of your material components • Carry out batch determination for your process order 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

and material quantity calculation together. active ingredient management. 270 © 2006 SAP AG. The dependencies between the production quantity and the component quantities are defined in formulas of material quantity calculation. In process order execution.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an example scenario for using the material quantity calculation with reference to batch determination processes. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • Carry out a sample scenario on how to use the functions of batch determination. the planners specify the quantities of material components that are subject to batch management in proportion units (active ingredient units of measure). In recipe maintenance. 2005/Q2 . the system recalculates the production quantity and component quantities based on the batches assigned in batch determination. Business Example You produce fruit juice in your company. All rights reserved.

yield ratios of the products and by-products as well as specific batch properties (for example. you define formulas to calculate the material quantities to be used or obtained in a production process. taking into account the mixing ratios of the ingredients. you can perform active ingredient management in a process order. You can also define formulas for calculating phase quantities in material quantity calculation. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. By using batch determination together with material quantity calculation. active ingredient content). concentration. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Material Quantity Calculation Figure 49: Material Quantity Calculation In material quantity calculation. 271 .

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Basic Process Figure 50: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Basic Process Master Recipe for the Sample Scenario Figure 51: Master Recipe for the Sample Scenario 272 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Proportion Quantities (Active Ingredient Quantities) and Batches Figure 52: Proportion Quantities (Active Ingredient Quantities) and Batches 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 273 .

Batch determination settings specify that the batches must always be used up. All rights reserved. 274 © 2006 SAP AG. the planned quantities and planned characteristic values for the Fruit juice product and the material components are available. The batches are available in containers of 1200 L. All other values are variable. In our scenario. After the process order has been created. An overdelivery is allowed. the values of the Fruit content and Acidity characteristics of the Fruit juice product are the fixed target values of production. You must withdraw enough containers so that you do not fall below the planned production quantity. 2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (I) Figure 53: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (I) After the process order has been created. batch determination is carried out for the Fruit premix component in our scenario.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. material quantity calculation must be used to recalculate the production quantities for the Fruit juice. and the Sugar and Water quantities. 275 .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (II) Figure 54: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (II) Since production requirements make it necessary to withdraw more fruit premix and since the characteristic values of the assigned batch deviate from the planned values. All rights reserved. the proportion quantities for the Lemon juice.

276 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (III) Figure 55: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (III) Afterwards. 2005/Q2 . In our scenario. the required quantity is charged from a big storage tank. All rights reserved. a batch determination is carried out for the citric acid based on the recalculated proportion quantity.

277 . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (IV) Figure 56: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation: Sample Scenario (IV) Then the material quantity is used to recalculate the Water quantity that needs to be added based on the production quantity (Fruit juice) and the added quantities of Fruit premix and Lemon juice.

All rights reserved. .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 278 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

batch determination is triggered for the fruit premix. To obtain the target values Fruit content 35 % and Acidity 2% for your product fruit juice. Afterwards. The characteristic values of the fruit premix batches and lemon juice batches available in stock usually vary enormously. Since the characteristic values usually differ from the planned values here as well. lemon juice. Due to this excess withdrawal and the batch characteristic values that deviate from the planning. The fruit premix is available in 1200-liter barrels. The lemon juice batches have been assigned the characteristic Acidity. batch determination is carried out for the lemon juice according to the recalculated quantities. The fruit premix batches have been assigned the characteristics Fruit content and Acidity. the product quantity and the material component quantities must be adjusted in material quantity calculation.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Exercise 23: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. You need the components fruit premix. you have defined formulas in material quantity calculation of the master recipe to be used. Process planning for the fruit juice production is typically carried out as follows in the process order: After the process order has been created. The fruit premix and lemon juice are subject to batch management. The proportion quantity LF (liter fruit) required according to the planning must at least be complied with. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. which must always be used up completely. 279 . material quantity calculation must then be carried out once again to be able to adjust the water quantity accordingly and guarantee the target values. These formulas map the necessary dependencies between the material quantities with regard to the batch characteristic values onto the system. you will be able to: • Perform quantity planning using the material quantity calculation • Work with proportion quantities for material components in the process order • Use batch determination together with material quantity calculation Business Example You manufacture fruit juice in your company that meets the following requirements: The fruit juice's fruit content should be 35 % and its acidity should be 2 %. water and sugar to produce the fruit juice. This means that usually more fruit premix is withdrawn. All rights reserved.

Object 1:Qty UOM 2:Fruit content UOM 3:Acidity UOM T-FJU## T-RJU1## T-RJU2## T-RI5## T-RJU3## Note: Formulas have been maintained for the objects with the formula indicator a/b. Task 1: Master recipe 1. Write down the recipe description. All rights reserved. Write down the planned quantities and characteristic values defined in material quantity calculation.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 The order can now be released. Item text Call up material quantity calculation for the recipe. Display the material assignments for the recipe. Navigate to the material list. _____________________________________________________ 3. Which material components have been assigned? Material 5. 2. 2005/Q2 . Display master recipe T-JUI##. Which material has been assigned as the product? Material: _____________________________________________ Material description: ______________________________________ 4. Continued on next page 280 © 2006 SAP AG. These formulas define the above-mentioned dependencies between the material quantities and batch characteristics.

Task 2: Process order 1.000 L as the order quantity and any basic start date. Batch determination for fruit premix T-RJU1## Create a second session. Write down the following information about the existing batches: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. How would you interpret the result? 3. 2. step 5. When you access it the first time. Material quantities after order creation Display the material list for the order after order creation. Create a process order for material T-FJU## in plant 1100.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation To display the formulas choose the Formula overview icon. Write down the following: Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure Compare the requirements quantities with the planned quantities in material quantity calculation in task 1. Display the stock overview for material T-RJU1## Fruit premix in plant 1100 in the second session. enter LF (liter fruit). Access the stock overview twice. enter L (liter) as the proportion quantity. All rights reserved. Enter 5. These formulas have been explained in more detail in the training course PLM115 Basic Data for Process Manufacturing. Choose order type PI01. The second time. 281 .

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Batch number Unrestricted use (unit of measure L) SCM340 Unrestricted use (unit of measure LF) Fruit content Acidity End the second session. step 2) and the existing stocks (task 2. 2005/Q2 . Copy the material quantity calculation result to your order. Write down the following information from the material list after batch determination: Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure Batch T-RJU1## -------------------- LF T-RJU1## LF T-RJU1## LF -------------------- Compare the batch determination result with the original requirements quantity (task 2. All rights reserved. Interpret the result. step 3). step 2). 4. Adjust the product quantity in accordance with the above assigned batch quantities and characteristics of component T-RJU1##. Carry out batch determination for the material component T-RJU## Fruit premix. The component quantities are also adjusted at the same time. Compare the order's present product and component quantities in material quantity calculation with the values after order creation (task 2. Material quantity calculation: Adjusting the product quantity of material T-FJU## and the component quantities in accordance with the assigned batches of component T-RJU1## Call up material quantity calculation. According to which criteria was the batch assigned? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 5. Continued on next page 282 © 2006 SAP AG.

SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation 6. 283 . step 2). The formulas are executed automatically. Then call up material quantity calculation to adjust the required water quantity. Copy the material quantity calculation result to your order. an increase in the quantity of goods received is expected in the stock/requirements list for product T-FJU## Fruit juice. Result: You can now release and process the order. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. The batch quantities and material quantities determined by material quantity calculation are now staged. 7. Batch determination for lemon juice T-RJU2##. In addition. Compare the order header quantity and the component quantities with the quantities after order creation (see task 2. material quantity calculation: Adjusting the water quantity T-RI5## Carry out batch determination for the material component T-RJU2## Lemon juice.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Solution 23: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Task 1: Master recipe 1. Description: Fruit juice Display the material assignments for the recipe. 2005/Q2 . Which material has been assigned as the product? Material: _____________________________________________ Material description: ______________________________________ a) Recipe header tab page Choose Material assignments Material: T-FJU## Material description: Fruit juice 4. Navigate to the material list. Display master recipe T-JUI##. Write down the recipe description. a) (…) → Recipe and Material List → Display Recipe group: T-JUI## 2. _____________________________________________________ a) 3. Which material components have been assigned? Continued on next page 284 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

These formulas define the above-mentioned dependencies between the material quantities and batch characteristics. 285 . 5.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Material a) Item text Recipes tab page Materials icon The Materials tab appears. To display the formulas choose the Formula overview icon. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Object 1:Qty UOM 2:Fruit content UOM 3:Acidity UOM T-FJU## T-RJU1## T-RJU2## T-RI5## T-RJU3## Note: Formulas have been maintained for the objects with the formula indicator a/b. All rights reserved. Material Item text T-RJU1## Fruit premix T-RJU2## Lemon juice T-RI5## Treated water T-RJU3## Sugar Call up material quantity calculation for the recipe. Write down the planned quantities and characteristic values defined in material quantity calculation.

Create a process order for material T-FJU## in plant 1100..) icon. Choose order type PI01. 5000 L Material quantities after order creation Display the material list for the order after order creation. All rights reserved..Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 These formulas have been explained in more detail in the training course PLM115 Basic Data for Process Manufacturing. 2005/Q2 . Object 1:Qty UOM 2:Fruit UOM content 3:Acidity UOM T-FJU## -1000 L 35 % 2 % T-RJU1## 350 LF 80 % 3 % T-RJU2## 6. a) Choose the a/b (Material quantity calc. a) (.) → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FJU## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PI01 Enter Total quantity: 2.875 LS 40 % T-RI5## L 545 T-RJU3## 10 KG Task 2: Process order 1.000 L as the order quantity and any basic start date. Write down the following: Continued on next page 286 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter 5.

step 5. Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure T-RJU1## 1750 LF T-RJU2## 34. Write down the following information about the existing batches: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.375 LS T-RI5## 2727 L T-RJU3## 50 KG Material quantity calculation was carried out at order creation. enter LF (liter fruit).SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure Compare the requirements quantities with the planned quantities in material quantity calculation in task 1. The second time. Access the stock overview twice. All rights reserved. When you access it the first time. How would you interpret the result? a) Choose Materials. Batch determination for fruit premix T-RJU1## Create a second session. 3. enter L (liter) as the proportion quantity. 287 . The planned quantities from material quantity calculation that were originally based on 1000 L have been adjusted to the production quantity of 5000 L. Display the stock overview for material T-RJU1## Fruit premix in plant 1100 in the second session.

LF (second access) Execute icon To display the batch characteristics. Carry out batch determination for the material component T-RJU## Fruit premix. All rights reserved. Batch number Unrestricted use (unit of measure L) Unrestricted use (unit of measure LF) Fruit content Acidity Batch number 1200 1080 90 % 4% Batch number 1200 960 80 % 3% Delete the second session.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Batch number Unrestricted use (unit of measure L) SCM340 Unrestricted use (unit of measure LF) Fruit content Acidity End the second session. choose Extras → Batch classification. System → Delete session 4. a) System → Create session Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-RJU1## Plant: 1100 Display unit of measure: L (first access). Write down the following information from the material list after batch determination: Continued on next page 288 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

The component quantities are also adjusted at the same time. Interpret the result. step 2) and the existing stocks (task 2.LF -------------------- T-RJU1## 1080 LF Batch number T-RJU1## 960 LF Batch number The stock quantities of the two batches for material T-RJU1## have been assigned completely. The planned requirements quantity must at least be covered. the batches for the fruit premix RJU1## are assigned according to the following criteria: 1. An overdelivery that may occur because the assigned batches must be used up is allowed. 2. Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure Batch T-RJU1## -------------------. 5. According to which criteria was the batch assigned? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Execute batch determination icon. All rights reserved. Assigned batches must be used up completely. step 3). In our scenario. Adjust the product quantity in accordance with the above assigned batch quantities and characteristics of component T-RJU1##. Material quantity calculation: Adjusting the product quantity of material T-FJU## and the component quantities in accordance with the assigned batches of component T-RJU1## Call up material quantity calculation. 289 .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Material Reqmts quantity Unit of measure Batch T-RJU1## -------------------- LF T-RJU1## LF T-RJU1## LF -------------------- Compare the batch determination result with the original requirements quantity (task 2. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

a) For lemon juice T-RJ2##: Choose the Execute batch determination icon. All rights reserved. Result: You can now release and process the order. 2005/Q2 . After you analyze the result: Choose the Save formula and copy result icon. a) Material quantity calculation icon Choose Calculate product quantity. step 2). 7. The batch quantities and material quantities determined by material quantity calculation are now staged. a) Material quantity calculation icon The formulas are executed automatically. Copy the material quantity calculation result to your order. In addition. Batch determination for lemon juice T-RJU2##. Compare the order header quantity and the component quantities with the quantities after order creation (see task 2. 290 © 2006 SAP AG. step 2). Then call up material quantity calculation to adjust the required water quantity. material quantity calculation: Adjusting the water quantity T-RI5## Carry out batch determination for the material component T-RJU2## Lemon juice. Choose the Save formula and copy result icon.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Compare the order's present product and component quantities in material quantity calculation with the values after order creation (task 2. an increase in the quantity of goods received is expected in the stock/requirements list for product T-FJU## Fruit juice. 6. Copy the material quantity calculation result to your order. The formulas are executed automatically.

291 . active ingredient management. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Determination and Material Quantity Calculation Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Carry out a sample scenario on how to use the functions of batch determination. and material quantity calculation together.

292 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . In doing so. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • • • • Name the different options for making resource reservations Describe the basics and the general process of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning) Dispatch operations in the capacity planning table of the ECC system Perform system-aided resource selection in the ECC System Business Example You will get an overview of the alternative ways to realize resource reservations with the SAP System.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Lesson Overview This lesson gives you an overview of the objectives and methods of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning). Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will use the resource selection function. You will test the function for dispatching operations at resources in the ECC capacity planning table.

A prerequisite for all methods of detailed scheduling should be long-term or medium-term capacity requirements planning. For this purpose. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you must set up a special layout. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Resource Reservation Figure 57: Resource Reservation Detailed scheduling (resource/work center scheduling) can be performed both in ECC (capacity requirements planning) and in SCM(APO) (PP/DS). You can use the order information system to easily generate a list of the operations per resource. 293 .

The capacity requirement specifies the time requirement an operation of an order has regarding a resource to be used. All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Basics and Process Figure 58: Basics and Process The available capacity describes the availability of a resource with regard to time. guaranteeing of available capacity for a specific time © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . The following activities usually determine the process of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning): • • • • 294 Definition of available capacities of resources (master data maintenance) Calculation of the capacity requirements of operations in orders Capacity evaluation: comparison of available capacities and capacity requirements Capacity leveling: dispatching of operations at resources.

providing a graphic presentation of the available capacity or capacity requirements with start and finish dates. All rights reserved. The diagram section is a window on the time axis. © 2006 SAP AG. The planning table is made up of different charts in which the available capacity and capacity requirements are grouped according to different criteria and are displayed over a common time axis. the data can be prepared according to different views (for example. Depending on your request and system (ECC or APO). the capacity situation of a resource or the capacity situation of all resources required for an order) and displayed in different charts. 295 . They can be used interactively and enable you to dispatch operations or activities (APO) at available capacities of resources at exact points in time. Each chart has a title bar and comprises a table section and a diagram section: • • 2005/Q2 The table section contains information on the identification and description of the objects displayed in the diagram section.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table Figure 59: Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table The graphical planning tables in the ECC and SCM(APO) systems enable you to carry out capacity requirements planning over time.

In system-aided resource selection. All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Resource Selection in ECC Figure 60: Resource Selection in ECC The following functions are only available in the ECC System: • • • 296 You can use the resource selection function to find suitable resources for carrying out an operation at the time of production. can be taken into account during resource selection. © 2006 SAP AG. the system compares the characteristic values maintained for the resources and operations (classification in class type 019 Work center class). representing the physical connection of resources. The resource network. 2005/Q2 .

Task: 1. basics. Describe the basics and basic process of capacity requirements planning with SAP. basics and the general process of resource reservation with SAP Business Example You will get an overview of the objectives. and general process of resource reservation with SAP. All rights reserved. 297 .SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Exercise 24: Resource Reservation: Overview Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Explain the objectives. Which goals do you want to reach by creating a resource schedule? Which options are available in SAP to reach these goals? Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 2. methods. methods.

2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 298 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. For information on the goals of resource reservations. © 2006 SAP AG. see the page “Basics and Process” in your participant handbook. Describe the basics and basic process of capacity requirements planning with SAP. Which goals do you want to reach by creating a resource schedule? Which options are available in SAP to reach these goals? Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) 2. see the page “Resource Reservation” in your participant handbook. 299 .SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Solution 24: Resource Reservation: Overview Task: 1. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) 2005/Q2 For information on the basics and the process of capacity requirements planning with SAP.

.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 300 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

You will carry out system-aided resource selection for this operation. All rights reserved. 301 . You will dispatch an operation in the capacity planning table. Display the material/recipe assignment. Display the master recipe of recipe group T-RC1##. 2. Task 1: 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. Outline the functions and basic structure of the capacity planning table. you will be able to: • Describe the function and structure of the capacity planning table • Dispatch operations in the capacity planning table • Use the system-supported resource selection Business Example You will create a process order and display the capacity requirements and available capacity for the operations in the ECC capacity planning table.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Exercise 25: Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table in the ECC System Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise.

for example. Compare the resources in the resource network with those assigned in the operation overview. Copy down the resource network: 5. To use system-aided resource selection. 2005/Q2 . Phase 4. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Note: Resource T-GT1## is used provisionally for one of the available reaction vessels of the resource network.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 The recipe describes the production of which material? ______________________________________________________ 3. You can. The task list usage restricts the usage of this resource to the process planning stage. Before you release an order. you must replace the planning resource with a physically existing resource from the resource network. Resource Description Navigate to the recipe header. Navigate to the operation overview. Which operations have been created in the recipe? Which resources are assigned to these operations? Write down the following: Operation. you can define resource selection conditions for the corresponding operation. the system uses the resource selection function to compare these selection conditions with the attributes of the resources in the resource network and to propose suitable resources. do this during capacity requirements planning. Display the resource selection conditions for operation 200 REACTION. Continued on next page 302 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Display the resource network that has been assigned to the recipe. 6. In the process order.

T-RT2##. Write down the following: Resource Class Characteristic Description T-RT1## T-RT2## T-RT3## Task 3: 1. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Which status information do you get? _____________________________________________________ Display the status for operation 200.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Class 7. All rights reserved. Display the release log and write down the error messages. Characteristic Description Display the classification data of reaction vessels T-RT1##.000 L as the quantity to be produced. Enter 10. 303 . Enter today's date as the basic start date. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Try to release the order. and T-RT3## of the resource network to compare them with the selection conditions. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF1## in plant 1100. 2. What does the status WCRE mean? _____________________________________________________ 3.

Note:This exercise only aims at demonstrating the basic principles of capacity requirements planning. 3. Task 4: You now want to carry out resource selection for operation 200. functions. 2. All rights reserved. 1. Order Operation Choose Hourly period split as the scale for the planning table. Enter plant 1100 and capacity planner group V## as the selection criteria. The reaction vessels represent critical bottleneck resources of your production line as far as the capacity load is concerned. you carry out resource selection during capacity requirements planning in the capacity planning table. and environment of the capacity planning table. For this reason. Enter the capacity planning table from the resource view. Continued on next page 304 © 2006 SAP AG. we will only look at one process order in the capacity planning table. 2005/Q2 . For which resources does the system display available capacities in the Resources chart? Resources Resource 4.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 _____________________________________________________ Save your order. For this reason. First. get an overview of the elements. Description For which process orders and operations does the system display capacity requirements in the Pool chart? Pool Material 5. Search for your operations in the Pool chart.

display the classification data of the suggested resources. and the resource network. Which resources does the system offer you in resource selection? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4. To which resource has operation 200 been assigned? ___________________________________________________________ Task 6: 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Go to the operation overview and carry out resource selection for operation 200. In resource selection.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Enlarge the display if necessary. Choose one of the resources. All rights reserved. Try to dispatch operation 200. 2. Exit the order and go back to the capacity planning table. 305 . Enter your process order in the change mode from the capacity planning table. 3. To be able to dispatch operation 200. Task 5: 1. you must first carry out resource selection to replace the provisional resource T-GT1## with a physically existing resource. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 7: 1. Why does the system not dispatch the operation? Analyze the planning log. the selection conditions defined for the operation.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 8: 1. 4. 2. All rights reserved. Manually move the dispatched operation towards the future. Go to the order header and try to reschedule the order. Now try to schedule the order again. What happens to the operations that have not yet been dispatched? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Save your plan. 306 © 2006 SAP AG. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ Why can you not reschedule the order? Display the scheduling log to answer this question. Which new operation status has been set due to dispatching? _____________________________________________________ 3. 2005/Q2 . _____________________________________________________ Go back to the planning table. Delete the basic finish date and modify the basic start date so that it is one week later. Use the Dispatch planning table function to dispatch operation 200. Display the dispatched operation in the change mode from the planning table.

Outline the functions and basic structure of the capacity planning table. 307 . T-RC1## Display the material/recipe assignment. Task 2: 1.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Display Recipe Group: 2. The recipe describes the production of which material? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. see the page “Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table” in your participant handbook. a) Logistics → Production .SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Solution 25: Resource Reservation Using the Capacity Planning Table in the ECC System Task 1: 1. Display the master recipe of recipe group T-RC1##. Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the function and basic structure of the capacity planning table.

Display the resource network that has been assigned to the recipe. Which operations have been created in the recipe? Which resources are assigned to these operations? Write down the following: Operation. Fertilizer. liquid. Network Graphic icon. form A. Phase a) Resource Description Choose the Recipes tab. 4.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 ______________________________________________________ a) Choose Recipe header. Compare the resources in the resource network with those assigned in the operation overview. All rights reserved. Choose Material Assignments. Recipe 1 of recipe group T-RC1## describes the production of material T-FF1## . 3. 5. Operation Resource Description 100 T-MT1## CHARGING 200 T-GT1## REACTION 300 T-ST1## SEPARATION Navigate to the recipe header. Choose the Res. Copy down the resource network: a) Choose the Recipe header tab. 2005/Q2 . Choose the Operations icon. Navigate to the operation overview. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Note: Continued on next page 308 © 2006 SAP AG.

you can define resource selection conditions for the corresponding operation. Class Characteristic Description REAK_00 Surface coating polyethylene coated Rounds per minute 100 7. you must replace the planning resource with a physically existing resource from the resource network. resource T-GT1## has been assigned.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Resource T-GT1## is used provisionally for one of the available reaction vessels of the resource network. 6. this resource is not contained in the resource network. for example. T-RT2##. and T-RT3## of the resource network to compare them with the selection conditions. Write down the following: Resource Class Characteristic Description T-RT1## Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 309 . However. To use system-aided resource selection. Instead. In the process order. Read the information in the note for this exercise. All rights reserved. a) None of the reaction vessels T-RT*## has been assigned to operation 200 REACTION. Display the classification data of reaction vessels T-RT1##. Before you release an order. The task list usage restricts the usage of this resource to the process planning stage. You can. Class a) Characteristic Description Select operation 200 REACTION in the operation overview and choose Goto → Resource selection condition or the corresponding button in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen. do this during capacity requirements planning. Display the resource selection conditions for operation 200 REACTION. the system uses the resource selection function to compare these selection conditions with the attributes of the resources in the resource network and to propose suitable resources.

Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF1## in plant 1100.Process → Master Data → Resources → Resource → Display Plant: 1100 Resource: T-RT1## or T-RT2## or T-RT3## Enter Choose Classifiation (at the bottom of the screen) Resource Class Characteristic Description T-RT1## REAK_00 Surface coating glass coated Rounds per minute 50 .150 Task 3: 1. All rights reserved.000 L as the quantity to be produced.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release Resource SCM340 Class Characteristic Description T-RT2## T-RT3## a) Logistics → Production .150 T-RT2## REAK_00 Surface coating polyethylene coated Rounds per minute 50 . 2005/Q2 . Continued on next page 310 © 2006 SAP AG.150 T-RT3## REAK_00 Surface coating polyethylene coated Rounds per minute 50 . Enter 10.

Display the release log and write down the error messages. Choose Status information. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Which status information do you get? _____________________________________________________ Display the status for operation 200.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Enter today's date as the basic start date. Double-click the message line to display more detailed information. Go to the operation overview. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. All rights reserved.: T-FF1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 10. 311 . The following message is displayed: System status WCRE is active. Try to release the order. What does the status WCRE mean? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Release icon The Status Processing: Release dialog box appears in which the system informs you that the business transaction cannot be carried out. Double-click the System status field for operation 200: WCRE Work center until release 3.000 L Start: Today Enter 2.

get an overview of the elements.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Save your order. 2. All rights reserved. The system loads the capacity planning table with the capacity requirements and available capacities that match your selection criteria. a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Planning → Capacity Leveling → Resource View → Capacity Planning Table Plant: 1100 Capacity planner grp: V## Choose Enter. 2005/Q2 . functions. System status WCRE is active Save your order. First. Enter the capacity planning table from the resource view. Resource T-GT1## in operation 200 can only be used until release. Resource T-GT1## in operation 200 does not meet resource selection criteria. a) See exercise Continued on next page 312 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 4: You now want to carry out resource selection for operation 200. you carry out resource selection during capacity requirements planning in the capacity planning table. For this reason. Resource T-GT1## in operation 200 is not in resource network. Note:This exercise only aims at demonstrating the basic principles of capacity requirements planning. and environment of the capacity planning table. Enter plant 1100 and capacity planner group V## as the selection criteria. For this reason. The reaction vessels represent critical bottleneck resources of your production line as far as the capacity load is concerned. 1. we will only look at one process order in the capacity planning table. a) Goto → Logs → On release Choose Error messages.

313 . Resource Description T-GT1## Reaction vessel group T-MT1## Charge vessel T-RT1## Reaction vessel 1 T-RT2## Reaction vessel 2 T-RT3## Reaction vessel 3 T-ST1## Separation vessel For which process orders and operations does the system display capacity requirements in the Pool chart? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation 3. For which resources does the system display available capacities in the Resources chart? Resources Resource Description a) Resources 4. All rights reserved.

Try to dispatch operation 200. Material Order Operation T-FF1## Order number 100 T-FF1## Order number 200 T-FF1## Order number 300 Choose Hourly period split as the scale for the planning table. Task 5: 1. Operation 200 is assigned to resource (=WrkCntr) T-GT1##.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Pool Material Order Operation a) Pool 5. a) Settings → Scale → Hourly period split To search for operations. Search for your operations in the Pool chart. choose the Zoom in icon. To which resource has operation 200 been assigned? ___________________________________________________________ a) The information is displayed in the text area in the Pool chart. To enlarge the display. the provisional resource. Enlarge the display if necessary. Why does the system not dispatch the operation? Continued on next page 314 © 2006 SAP AG. select a line in the Pool chart and choose GrafObj. All rights reserved. Task 6: 1. 2005/Q2 .

SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Analyze the planning log. Choose Plan. All rights reserved. The system does not dispatch the operation. polyethylene coated T-RT3## Reaction vessel 3. Choose Error messages. a) 2. The system tells you to check the status logic of the relevant object. Enter your process order in the change mode from the capacity planning table. Task 7: 1. Which resources does the system offer you in resource selection? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) T-RT2## Reaction vessel 2. 315 . you must first carry out resource selection to replace the provisional resource T-GT1## with a physically existing resource. which in our case is operation 200. polyethylene coated Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.log. Select a line in the text area of the Pool chart and choose the Order icon. Select operation 200 and choose Operation → Functions for phase / for operation → Resource selection Or choose Execute resource selection 3. Go to the operation overview and carry out resource selection for operation 200. To be able to dispatch operation 200. Display the long text for the error message (Long text icon). ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) Select the icon for operation 200 in the pool and choose the Dispatch icon in the standard toolbar. a) Choose Operations.

What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ Why can you not reschedule the order? Display the scheduling log to answer this question. Choose Selection cond. and the resource network. Which new operation status has been set due to dispatching? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Operations. Task 8: 1. Select operation 200 and choose the Dispatch icon. the selection conditions defined for the operation. 3. a) 2. Delete the basic finish date and modify the basic start date so that it is one week later. Go back to the planning table. the system replaces the provisional planning resource T-GT1## by the resource you have selected. a) Position the cursor on one of the resources the system offers and choose Classification to display the classification data. display the classification data of the suggested resources. Display the dispatched operation in the change mode from the planning table. Go to the order header and try to reschedule the order. _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 316 © 2006 SAP AG. Use the Dispatch planning table function to dispatch operation 200. In the operation overview. Choose Resource network to display the resource network. Choose one of the resources. Choose the Status icon for the operation status.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 4. The new operation status DSPT Dispatched has been assigned. All rights reserved. to display the selection conditions that have been defined for operation 200. 2005/Q2 . SCM340 In resource selection. Position the cursor on one of the resources the system offers and choose Choose. Now try to schedule the order again. Exit the order and go back to the capacity planning table.

4. Manually move the dispatched operation towards the future. Save your plan. What happens to the operations that have not yet been dispatched? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Save your plan.SCM340 Lesson: Resource Reservation Go back to the planning table. 317 . The system carries out a midpoint scheduling for the order. Go back to the planning table. a) Select the operation. Starting from the dispatched operation. the system reschedules the operations that are not dispatched in forward or backward scheduling. The scheduling log informs you that operation 200 and the related phases have been dispatched. This means that the operation is fixed and cannot be moved by scheduling. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Goto → Logs → On scheduling Choose Information messages. a) The order was not rescheduled starting from the new start date. All rights reserved. Use the mouse to drag it towards a date in the future. The order dates are the same as the original dates.

All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different options for making resource reservations • Describe the basics and the general process of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning) • Dispatch operations in the capacity planning table of the ECC system • Perform system-aided resource selection in the ECC System 318 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

319 . In this context. you will find out about the definition and application of production scheduling profiles to define business transactions to be executed in parallel. you will see how you can complement the system status network for process orders by defining user statuses.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Lesson: Order Release Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the order release function. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • • • Release a process order Explain the order release function Explain the definition and application of a production scheduling profile Describbe the function of system and user statuses Business Example You will become familiar with the order release function. Order Release Functions Figure 61: Order Release Functions 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In addition. All rights reserved.

You can release individual phases and operations.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Process orders have a status management which controls the possible processing sequence of the individual business transactions. When an order is released. the corresponding status is set. one complete order. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Various activities can be triggered automatically when an order is released: • • • • • Batch number assignment for the product Batch determination for the material components Material availability check Control recipe creation Inspection lot creation for in-process quality inspections Customizing: Production Scheduling Profile Figure 62: Customizing: Production Scheduling Profile 320 © 2006 SAP AG. The process order must have status Released so that the business transactions for process order execution and process management can be carried out. or several orders at once.

System Statuses and User Statuses: Example Figure 63: System Statuses and User Statuses: Example Statuses control which business transactions are permitted for an order. Two different types of statuses are available: system statuses and user statuses A system status is an internal status set by the system. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. The production scheduling profile is taken over to the process order when you create the order.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Customizing: Define Production Scheduling Profiles • • In a production scheduling profile. you can specify the following: – • • Whether a batch is automatically created for the product on order creation or order release – Whether and how a batch is to be classified You can assign a production scheduling profile to a material and/or production scheduler. It it set or deleted by a business transaction but not by a user status. for example: – Order release on order creation – Control recipe creation on order release – Scheduling on order release For batch management. 321 . The assignment to the material has a higher priority. All rights reserved. you can specify that particular business transactions are carried out in parallel in a process order.

you must activate change document creation for the corresponding order type. You can log status changes. The system status network cannot be influenced by the user. They are defined by the users according to their needs. a maximum of 20 lists may be called up. User statuses are linked to orders by a status profile defined in Customizing. For each order. All rights reserved. To do so.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 System statuses follow a fixed sequence. 2005/Q2 . User statuses can be set and withdrawn by business transactions. User statuses complement status management by the system. 322 © 2006 SAP AG. Shop Floor Papers (Standard Lists) Figure 64: Shop Floor Papers (Standard Lists) A number of different lists are offered in the standard system.

Which system statuses are set when you create a process order? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. you will be able to: • Describe how to influence the business transactions in a process order by assigning the statuses Created and Released Business Example You will examine how the business transactions in a process order are influenced by the system statuses Created and Released. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Display how the present order status influences the business transactions. 323 . Task: 1. Display the process order status. Enter 100 000 g as the production quantity and any basic start date. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Exercise 26: Statuses and Business Transactions Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. check whether the following transactions are allowed or not allowed at the present status Created: Operation Influence Schedule order Release Determine costs Check material availability Confirm order Create control recipe Goods movement Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In particular. 2.

Which new statuses have been set during order release? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 5. Release the process order. check how the present status Released influences the following transactions: Operation Influence Schedule order Determine costs Check material availability Confirm order Create control recipe Goods movement Display the transaction analysis for some of the transactions. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . In particular. 4.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Display the transaction analysis for some of the transactions. 324 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the business transactions again.

CRTD Created SETC Settlement rule entered BCRQ Order to be handled in batches MANC Mat. All rights reserved. availability not checked PRC Pre-costed (after order is saved) Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 325 . Which system statuses are set when you create a process order? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Status icon for the status line of the order header. The Change Status screen appears.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Solution 26: Statuses and Business Transactions Task: 1. Enter 100 000 g as the production quantity and any basic start date. a) Logistics → Production . Display the process order status. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 100 000 g Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2.

Operation Influence Schedule order Allowed (= green traffic light) Release Allowed Determine costs Allowed Check material availability Allowed Confirm order Not allowed Create control recipe Not allowed Goods movement Not allowed To analyze a business transaction.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release 3. SCM340 Display how the present order status influences the business transactions. All rights reserved. select the relevant transaction and choose Transaction analysis. a) Choose the Business processes tab on the Change Status screen. In particular. 4. check whether the following transactions are allowed or not allowed at the present status Created: Operation Influence Schedule order Release Determine costs Check material availability Confirm order Create control recipe Goods movement Display the transaction analysis for some of the transactions. Release the process order. 2005/Q2 . Which new statuses have been set during order release? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 326 © 2006 SAP AG.

Operation Influence Schedule order Allowed (= green traffic light) Determine costs Allowed Check material availability Allowed Confirm order Allowed Create control recipe Allowed Goods movement Allowed © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release _____________________________________________________ a) 5. check how the present status Released influences the following transactions: Operation Influence Schedule order Determine costs Check material availability Confirm order Create control recipe Goods movement Display the transaction analysis for some of the transactions. REL Released MACM Material committed Display the business transactions again. All rights reserved. Choose the Release icon. 327 . a) 2005/Q2 Choose the Business processes tab on the Change Status screen. In particular.

All rights reserved. .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 328 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. Define production scheduling profile GR## in Customizing for plant 1100. Task 1: 1. You will assign the production scheduling profile to a material and create a process order for this material to test the profile's functions. for example. control recipe creation. and batch creation at order creation Business Example You will define a production scheduling profile in Customizing. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 329 . you will be able to: • Describe the function of a production scheduling profile • Define a production scheduling profile in Customizing • Assign a production scheduling profile to a material • Check the activation of the automatic batch number assignment • Set and check the automatic release.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Exercise 27: Production Scheduling Profile Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Describe the function of a production scheduling profile. 2. __________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. This profile will determine. that an order is automatically released after it has been created and that control recipes are automatically created after the order has been released. Make the profile settings as described in the following: Specify that an order is automatically released after creation.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. Make sure that automatic batch number assignment has been activated in Customizing for Batch Management. Convert your planned order to a process order. Save your production scheduling profile. Use collective conversion. Save the planned order. Enter Production scheduling profile grp ## as the description of the profile in the overview screen for production scheduling profiles. Task 4: 1. Specify that your order type PO## is set as the default for make-to-stock production. Task 5: 1. 4. Create a planned order for material T-HTB1## in MRP area 1100. 6. Specify that you want the system to automatically create all control recipes when the order is released. use field help (F1) to display information on the meaning and function of the various indicators of the production scheduling profile. 7. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. Task 3: 1. Use process order type PO## for conversion. If required.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 3. Specify that you do not want the system to update surpluses or deficits by confirmations. 5. Enter Today + 2 weeks as the basic finish date. 2. Assign your production scheduling profile GR## to your material T-HTB1## on the Work Scheduling view of plant 1100. Enter planning plant 1100 and your MRP controller S## as the criteria for planned order selection. Specify that you want the system to automatically create a batch master record for the product you want to manufacture when you create an order. Continued on next page 330 © 2006 SAP AG. Use planned order profile LA Stock order.

Display your new process order after conversion. All rights reserved. 331 . and the material list.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release 3. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. display the order statuses. Which activities did the system carry out automatically after the process order was created? To answer this question. the data on the Goods receipt tab.

Define production scheduling profile GR## in Customizing for plant 1100. All rights reserved. a) On release X Create control recipe Continued on next page 332 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Solution 27: Production Scheduling Profile Task 1: 1. see the page “Customizing: Production scheduling profile” in your participant handbook. 2. Task 2: 1. a) Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Order → Master Data → Define Production Scheduling Profiles Choose New Entries. __________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the function of a production scheduling profile. Specify that you want the system to automatically create all control recipes when the order is released. 2005/Q2 . a) At creation X Release 3. Plant: 1100 ProdProfile: GR## Make the profile settings as described in the following: Specify that an order is automatically released after creation. Describe the function of a production scheduling profile.

Specify that you want the system to automatically create a batch master record for the product you want to manufacture when you create an order. a) Save your production scheduling profile. All rights reserved. If required. batch creation: Autom. Specify that your order type PO## is set as the default for make-to-stock production. Specify that you do not want the system to update surpluses or deficits by confirmations. use field help (F1) to display information on the meaning and function of the various indicators of the production scheduling profile. a) Order type Make-to-stock production: PO## 7. Enter Production scheduling profile grp ## as the description of the profile in the overview screen for production scheduling profiles. Save your production scheduling profile. batch creation at order creation 5. a) Confirmation X No update of surplus X No update of deficit 6. Choose Back. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Batch management Autom.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release 4. The system takes you back to the overview screen for production scheduling profiles. 333 . You can enter the profile description Production scheduling profile grp ##.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 3: 1. replace it with your new Production scheduling profile: GR## Save the material master record. Enter If a profile has already been stored. Enter Go to plant 1100.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Change → Immediately Material: T-HTB1## Enter Choose Work scheduling. Create a planned order for material T-HTB1## in MRP area 1100. Task 4: 1. X Automatic batch number assignment active Task 5: 1. Use planned order profile LA Stock order.General → Batch Management → Batch Number Assignment → Activate Internal Batch Number Assignment Choose Activate Batch Number Assignment. 2005/Q2 . Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity. a) Logistics → Production . Continued on next page 334 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Customizing: Logistics . All rights reserved. Assign your production scheduling profile GR## to your material T-HTB1## on the Work Scheduling view of plant 1100. Make sure that automatic batch number assignment has been activated in Customizing for Batch Management.

Which activities did the system carry out automatically after the process order was created? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. The system converts the planned order to a process order. Enter planning plant 1100 and your MRP controller S## as the criteria for planned order selection.Ord. Use collective conversion. Convert your planned order to a process order. Save the planned order. The Collective Conversion of Planned Orders: List screen appears. 2. 335 . a) Logistics → Production-Process → MRP → Planned Order → Create Planned order profile: LA Enter Material: T-HTB1## MRP area: 1100 Order quantity: 100 000 Finish: Today +2 weeks Save your planned order. Select the line for the planned order in the list and choose Convert.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Enter Today + 2 weeks as the basic finish date. Choose Back to exit the list. In accordance with the selection criteria you have entered. 3. → Collective Conversion Planning plant: 1100 MRP controller: S## Process order type: PO## Choose the Execute selections icon. a) (…) → MRP → Planned Order → Convert to Proc. the system only displays your planned order for material T-HTB1##. Display your new process order after conversion. Use process order type PO## for conversion.

step 2 After creating the process order. and the material list. All rights reserved. the data on the Goods receipt tab. display the order statuses. see automatically created batch number in tab page Goods receipt in the order header Batch determination for material components T-RTA## and T-RTB##: See automatically assigned batches in the material list 336 © 2006 SAP AG.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number from task 5.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 To answer this question. 2005/Q2 . the system automatically carried out the following activities: Order release: See status REL “Released” Material availability check: See status MACM “Material committed” Control recipe creation: See status CRCR “Control recipe created” Creation of batch master record for product T-HTB1##: See status BASC “Batch assignment complete”. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production .

All rights reserved. order operations. Describe the functions of system statuses and user statuses. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Describe the function of the system and user statuses • Define a user status profile in Customizing • Assign the user status profile to an order type • Perform order processing using user statuses • Evaluate change documents for status changes in the process order Business Example You will analyze a user status profile in Customizing. You will test the status profile function in process order processing and analyze the change documents created for status changes. and material components.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Exercise 28: System Statuses and User Statuses Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. You will assign this status profile to your order type PO##. In the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO##. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. 337 . Task 1: 1. define that change documents are written for status changes to the order header.

Status Short text Initial status Display transaction control for the user statuses CAPA and PLAN. 2005/Q2 . Display the user status profiles defined in Customizing. Process Ord. 4. For which object type may the status profile be used? _____________________________________________________ 3. Continued on next page 338 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 3: 1. Pl. 2. Assign status profile PI_CRP to your order type PO## in Customizing. Which user statuses have been defined for the profile? Write down the following: Status No. check the settings made for status profile PI_CRP Capacity Req. In particular. Write down the following: Status CAPA Business transaction Influence Status PLAN Business transaction Influence Task 4: 1.

Why can the order not be released? _____________________________________________________ 4. Display all changes and write down the following for statuses PLAN. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Note:In our scenario. Display the status information for the message.Req. 3. and CRTD: User status Action Date Time User Action Date Time User PLAN CAPA System status Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 5. Cap. 339 .SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Task 5: 1. He or she has a special authorization to set the PLAN status in the order afterwards. Display the release log. the capacity planner responsible for the order must carry out capacity requirements planning for the order. All rights reserved.Pl. Can you release the order now? _____________________________________________________ Save the order. Task 6: 1. Display your order once again. Which message does the system issue on status processing Release? ______________________________________________________ 3. 6. CAPA. Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. Set the user status PLAN. Display the list of all change documents created for status changes. REL. 2. Try to release the order. confirmed. 2.

340 To carry out the following exercises. 2005/Q2 .Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release User status Action SCM340 Date Time User CRTD REL Task 7: 1. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. withdraw the assignment of status profile PI_CRP to order type PO## in Customizing.

All rights reserved. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters Double-click on the line for plant 1100 and order type PO##. Status Change Documents: X Header X Operation X Material Save the new entries for the order-type dependent parameters.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Solution 28: System Statuses and User Statuses Task 1: 1. The “Change View ”"Order Type-Dependent Parameters": Details screen appears. Task 2: 1. Choose the Implementation tab. order operations. In the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO##. define that change documents are written for status changes to the order header. Describe the functions of system statuses and user statuses. 341 . ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the functions of system statuses and user statuses. and material components. see the page “System Statuses and User Statuses: Example” in your participant handbook. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

confirmed Display transaction control for the user statuses CAPA and PLAN. a) 2. Process Ord. Which user statuses have been defined for the profile? Write down the following: Status No. a) 4. In particular.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Task 3: 1. Status Short text Initial status 1 CAPA Cap. Status No. Display the user status profiles defined in Customizing. required X 2 PLAN Cap. check the settings made for status profile PI_CRP Capacity Req. Status Short text Initial status Choose Goto → User status or press User status.Req.Pl. 2005/Q2 . Write down the following: Status CAPA Business transaction Influence Continued on next page 342 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Req.Pl. Pl. Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Status Profiles For which object type may the status profile be used? _____________________________________________________ a) Position the cursor on status profile PI_CRP and choose Goto → Object types. X Process order 3.

All rights reserved. 343 . a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types Double-click on your order type PO##. Task 5: 1. Status CAPA Business transaction Influence Partially release order Disallowed Release Disallowed Release operation Disallowed Status PLAN Business transaction Influence Partially release order Allowed Release Allowed Release operation Allowed Task 4: 1.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Status PLAN Business transaction a) Influence Position the cursor on the relevant status and choose Goto → Business transaction control. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Status profile: PI_CRP Save the new entry for the order type. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB1## in plant 1100. Assign status profile PI_CRP to your order type PO## in Customizing.

Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 Enter 100 000 g as the order quantity and any basic start date. 4. Goto → Logs → On release Note:In our scenario. Set the user status PLAN. 2005/Q2 . a) 5. Set the user status PLAN. Why can the order not be released? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Status information. Cap. The system issues the following message with regard to order release: The business transaction cannot be carried out. Cap. a) Choose the Status icon in the order header. Display the status information for the message. the capacity planner responsible for the order must carry out capacity requirements planning for the order. Display the release log. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 344 © 2006 SAP AG.: T-HTB1## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 100 000 g Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. He or she has a special authorization to set the PLAN status in the order afterwards.Pl.Pl. Choose Back to exit the Change Status screen. 6. confirmed on the Change Status screen. a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no.Req. The following message is displayed: User status CAPA is active. confirmed. Try to release the order. Which message does the system issue on status processing Release? ______________________________________________________ a) 3.Req.

and CRTD: User status Action Date Time User Action Date Time User PLAN CAPA System status Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Can you release the order now? _____________________________________________________ Save the order. 345 . 3. All rights reserved. a) 2. Task 6: 1. REL. On the Change Status screen. you can release the process order. Display your order once again. (…) → Process Order → Display Display the list of all change documents created for status changes. CAPA. Display all changes and write down the following for statuses PLAN. a) Choose the Release icon After you have set the PLAN user status. a) Choose the Status icon in the order header. choose: Extras → Change Documents → All.

Delete the entry PI_CRP in the Status profile field and save the order type. All rights reserved. To carry out the following exercises. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types Double-click on your order type PO##. withdraw the assignment of status profile PI_CRP to order type PO## in Customizing. 2005/Q2 . User status Action PLAN Active CAPA Inactive Date Time User Date Time User Active System status Action CRTD Inactive Active REL Active Task 7: 1.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release User status Action SCM340 Date Time User CRTD REL a) On the Change Documents in Status Management screen. choose All changes. 346 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. 347 .SCM340 Lesson: Order Release Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Release a process order • Explain the order release function • Explain the definition and application of a production scheduling profile • Describbe the function of system and user statuses 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. and material quantity calculation together.Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • List the range of activities in process planning. • Name the different options for making resource reservations • Describe the basics and the general process of resource reservation (capacity requirements planning) • Dispatch operations in the capacity planning table of the ECC system • Perform system-aided resource selection in the ECC System • Release a process order • Explain the order release function • Explain the definition and application of a production scheduling profile • Describbe the function of system and user statuses 348 © 2006 SAP AG. • Name the Customizing settings required for material availability checks • Explain the functions of the material availability check and carry them out in the system • Explain the Customizing settings for batch determination • Create a batch search strategy • Make the appropriate settings for batch determination in the material master records of your material components • Carry out batch determination for your process order • Carry out a sample scenario on how to use the functions of batch determination. 2005/Q2 . active ingredient management.

Which methods can be used to reserve resources with SAP? 6. Name a number of activities that are only possible after the order is released. 4. Name the main activities of process planning. 349 . What is the material quantity calculation for? 5.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. Which application-specific master record is used to determine the batch determination process. © 2006 SAP AG. 2. All rights reserved. How can you trigger a material availability check? 3.

2005/Q2 . 350 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Answer: • • • • • • 2. Name the main activities of process planning. 4. You can also determine the phase quantities. yield ratios of the products and the specific batch attributes. What is the material quantity calculation for? Answer: In material quantity calculation. you can determine the material quantities to be used or obtained in a production process. Answer: It is defined using a batch search strategy. Order creation Batch number assignment Resource/line reservation Batch determination Material quantity calculation Material availability check How can you trigger a material availability check? Answer: Automatically • During order creation • During order release Manually at any time • • • 3. In mass processing for a number of orders For an entire order For individual components of an order Which application-specific master record is used to determine the batch determination process. taking into account the mixing ratios of the input materials.Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1.

Answer: • • • • • 2005/Q2 Printing documents (order documents) Creating control recipes for the order Posting material withdrawals for the order Posting order confirmations Posting goods receipts for the order © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge 5. Simultaneous material and capacity requirements planning DS planning board (continuous with regard to time) Product planning table (period-oriented) Planning optimization. 351 . Which methods can be used to reserve resources with SAP? Answer: Capacity requirements planning with SAP ECC • Tabular planning tables • Graphical planning tables • Mass planning in the background Detailed scheduling with SAP SCM(APO) • • • • 6. production campaigns Name a number of activities that are only possible after the order is released. All rights reserved.

.Unit 4: Process Planning and Order Release SCM340 352 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Unit 5 Principle of Process Management (I) Unit Overview Topics: • • • • • • • Principle of process management Creating and sending control recipes Control recipe monitor PI sheet Postings for process orders Flexible data entry with process messages Message monitor Unit Objectives After completing this unit..... you will be able to: • Describe the principle of process management Unit Contents Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) . 353 . All rights reserved...................354 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG........

You want to use the ECC Process Management for process control.Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) Lesson Overview This lesson gives you an initial overview of the principle of process management. so you first get an overview of the basic principles. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. or manually. 2005/Q2 . Process Management Figure 65: Process Management 354 © 2006 SAP AG. depending on the area. you will be able to: • Describe the principle of process management Business Example The production in your company is controlled automatically through process control systems. partially automatically. All rights reserved.

partially automated. © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 355 . The process instructions define. and sending process messages with actual process data from the process control system or the PI sheet Data is exchanged with process control systems using the PI-PCS interface. for example. Creating and Sending Control Recipes: Alternative 1 Figure 66: Creating and Sending Control Recipes: Alternative 1 Alternative 1: Maintaining process instructions for the phases • • 2005/Q2 You can define information relevant for process control in the process order in the form of process instructions for the phases of the order. as well as manually operated lines. the process steps to be executed and the process data to be confirmed (using process messages) in detail. Due to its flexible structure. checking. The process management groups the process instructions to control recipes and transfers these to the control recipe destinations assigned to the phases. it can be linked to fully automated. Process management includes the following functions: • • • • Receiving control recipes with process instructions from released process orders.SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) Process management is the interface between PP-PI and the systems involved in process control. Sending control recipes to the corresponding process operators or process control systems Manual processing: Displaying control recipes in natural language in the form of PI sheets that can be displayed and maintained on the screen by the process operator Receiving.

Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) SCM340 Creating and Sending Control Recipes: Alternative 2 Figure 67: Creating and Sending Control Recipes: Alternative 2 Alternative 2: Maintaining process instructions for XSteps • 356 From SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2. All rights reserved.00 (EA_APPL_2. Using XSteps enables you to maintain process instructions in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. the data for the process management can alternatively be maintained in the form of XSteps (execution steps). © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available.00).

On the basis of this information.SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) Control Recipe Monitor Figure 68: Control Recipe Monitor The control recipe monitor provides information on the current processing status of a control recipe. you can carry out the following transactions from within the monitor: • • 2005/Q2 Send control recipes if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing. All rights reserved. you can call up different logs containing more detailed information on the individual process steps carried out and the errors that occurred during control recipe processing. 357 . From the monitor. Delete control recipes © 2006 SAP AG.

graphics. or complete data interactively. All rights reserved. 358 © 2006 SAP AG. and so on) Input fields and tables for entering process data. you can generate PI sheets in HTML. confirm. notes. the PI sheet has the following elements and functions. the Internet and intranet. Depending on the process instructions contained in a control recipe. input validations. for linking to documents. for example. for example: • • • • • • • • Display of information on process (control instructions.6C. 2005/Q2 . signatures Batch determination and batch check Process data calculation Reading and writing data from internal or external applications Link to QM inspection results recording Sequence definition for determining the processing sequence of phases Comments on documentation and messages from process events As of Release 4. It gives you the advantage of a flexible. which means the process operator is to enter. The browser-based PI sheet enhances the ABAP list-based PI sheet.Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) SCM340 HTML-Based PI Sheet (I) Figure 69: HTML-Based PI Sheet (I) The SAP PI sheet provides for processing on the screen. user-specific layout definition and allows you to define frames.

All rights reserved. 359 .SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) HTML-Based PI Sheet (II) Figure 70: HTML-Based PI Sheet (II) Standard Postings for Process Orders Figure 71: Standard Postings for Process Orders 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

goods receipt) can be performed using manual data entry in the ECC System or process messages from a PI sheet or a process control system. 360 © 2006 SAP AG. You can define process messages in Customizing according to your own specific requirements. confirmation. Flexible Data Entry with Process Messages Figure 72: Flexible Data Entry with Process Messages Process messages are data structures with which actual data for a process is confirmed from process control to one or more destinations. All rights reserved. The process instructions of the control recipe for an order define which process messages are requested by a PI sheet or a process control system. not for operations).Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) SCM340 The standard postings for process orders (goods issue. The simplest confirmation procedure is the confirmation for the process order. They are then checked and forwarded to pre-defined destinations. Confirmations are entered for phases and secondary resources (however. The standard SAP System contains a number of predefined message categories enabling you to transfer current data from process control to the ECC System. The process messages are first sent to the process management. 2005/Q2 .

you can carry out the following transactions from within the monitor: • • • 2005/Q2 Complete or correct messages Send messages if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing Delete messages © 2006 SAP AG. On the basis of this information.SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) Message Monitor Figure 73: Message Monitor The message monitor provides information on the current processing status of process messages. you can call up various logs containing more detailed information on the processing of individual messages and errors that occurred. From the monitor. 361 . All rights reserved.

and manually operated lines. the process instructions maintained in the process order are grouped into control recipes. process management can be linked to automated. process management receives process messages from the process control level and transfers them to the various message destinations. Control recipes are either transferred to process control systems via the PCS interface or they are displayed for process operators in the form of a PI sheet. partially automated. In return. Due to its flexible structure. After a process order has been released for production. Control recipes are either transferred to process control systems via the PCS interface or they are displayed for process operators in the form of a PI sheet. © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit 5: Principle of Process Management (I) SCM340 Principle of Process Management: Topic Summary • • • • • • 362 Process management coordinates the transfer of data between the ECC System and the process control level.

All rights reserved. 363 .SCM340 Lesson: Principle of Process Management (I) Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the principle of process management 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the principle of process management 364 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

2005/Q2 Try to summarize the principle of process management © 2006 SAP AG. 365 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 1.

© 2006 SAP AG. In the PI sheet. All rights reserved. and manually operated lines. Control recipes are either transferred to process control systems via the PCS interface or they are displayed for process operators in the form of a PI sheet. In return. the process instructions are displayed in natural language on the screen. After a process order has been released for production. 2005/Q2 . Due to its flexible structure. partially automated. Try to summarize the principle of process management Answer: • • • • • • 366 Process management coordinates the transfer of data between the ECC System and the process control level. process management can be linked to automated. the process instructions maintained in the process order are grouped into control recipes. process management receives process messages from the process control level and transfers them to the various message destinations.Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1.

.....Unit 6 Material Staging and Withdrawal Unit Overview Topics: • • • Options for material staging Manual goods issue posting Goods issue posting using process messages Unit Objectives After completing this unit..........................................379 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG...............................368 Exercise 29: Material Staging Options ........................ you will be able to: • • • Name the possible material staging procedures Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using process messages from the PI sheet Unit Contents Lesson: Material Staging Options ........376 Exercise 30: Goods Issue Posting ....... All rights reserved.... 367 ......................................371 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting ...........

All rights reserved. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • Name the possible material staging procedures Business Example You will become familiar with the representation of the possible procedures for performing material staging for process orders.The procedures are • • • 368 a) Warehouse management using the component MM-IM (Inventory Management) b) Replenishment control using the component Kanban c) Storage location management and replenishment control using the component MM-WM (Warehouse Management System) © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Lesson: Material Staging Options Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of the possible procedures for material staging. The Material Staging Process (I) Figure 74: The Material Staging Process (I) The ECC System has various procedures for controlling material staging. 2005/Q2 .

pull lists. pick lists and similar documents. • • 2005/Q2 Crate parts are requested manually when a container is almost empty. 369 . the stock situation is taken into account in the production and the replenishment storage types. you can create transfer requirements manually or automatically when you release the order. The Warehouse Management System has three options. © 2006 SAP AG. as well as PI sheets and weighing systems linked via the PI-PCS interface. The required quantity is calculated using the target quantities of the components in the selected released orders. All rights reserved. Here.SCM340 Lesson: Material Staging Options The Material Staging Process (II) Figure 75: The Material Staging Process (II) The basis for material withdrawal for process orders are material withdrawal slips. Release order parts are requested manually. which are described below: • Pick list items are provided for the process order in exactly the same quantity as the requirements quantity. These parts can be provided for the process order at a physical storage location or dynamic storage location (process order). Thereby.

All rights reserved. .Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 370 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. 371 . On the Mass processing for process orders screen. Task: 1. Notes: _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ 2. you will be able to: • Name the options for material staging • Put together a pick list Business Example Material components must be staged for production on a specific date and in a specific quantity. As an example. In the Introduction unit. you will create a pick list for an order to withdraw the required materials from the warehouse and post the relevant goods issue. There are different procedures for material staging. You will become familiar with the different procedures for material staging. Use the information in your participant handbook to get an overview of the different procedures for material staging. you released an order for the production of material T-FI1##. choose: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Use the mass processing function (component list) to create a pick list for the order to stage the material components in the warehouse.SCM340 Lesson: Material Staging Options Exercise 29: Material Staging Options Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise.

and in inventory management). choose: Function: Pick Execute Function: Execute function in dialog Processing mode: Execute goods movement in dialog Finally. Note: Data update will be dealt with in more detail in the following exercises. in the order information system. Select all components and save. In particular. All rights reserved. 3. you can now analyze the data updates that the goods issue postings triggered (for example. execute the program. status: REL In the Mass processing tab page. 2005/Q2 . 372 © 2006 SAP AG. in the order. Note that you can still change the data in the list. If required. Note that you can print the list. A list with the components for the order appears. note the Batch determination option in the list. choose: Material: T-FI1## Sys.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 List: Components Profile: Picking profile In the Selection tab page. Note that you can record an unplanned goods issue. The goods issue postings for the material components are made. Select all material components and then execute the mass processing: A picking list with all reservation items to be picked appears.

Use the mass processing function (component list) to create a pick list for the order to stage the material components in the warehouse. choose: List: Components Profile: Picking profile In the Selection tab page. choose: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Notes: _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ a) 2. status: REL In the Mass processing tab page. Use the information in your participant handbook to get an overview of the different procedures for material staging. 373 . you released an order for the production of material T-FI1##.SCM340 Lesson: Material Staging Options Solution 29: Material Staging Options Task: 1. choose: Material: T-FI1## Sys. (II)” in your participant handbook. On the Mass processing for process orders screen. see to the pages “The Material Staging Process (I). For more information. In the Introduction unit. All rights reserved.

a) 374 See exercise © 2006 SAP AG. in the order information system. a) 3.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Function: Pick Execute Function: Execute function in dialog Processing mode: Execute goods movement in dialog Finally. Note that you can still change the data in the list. In particular. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. you can now analyze the data updates that the goods issue postings triggered (for example. note the Batch determination option in the list. Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Tools → Mass Processing If required. Note: Data update will be dealt with in more detail in the following exercises. Select all material components and then execute the mass processing: A picking list with all reservation items to be picked appears. execute the program. and in inventory management). The goods issue postings for the material components are made. Select all components and save. Note that you can record an unplanned goods issue. A list with the components for the order appears. Note that you can print the list. in the order.

SCM340 Lesson: Material Staging Options Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the possible material staging procedures 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 375 .

Material Withdrawal (Goods Issue) Figure 76: Material Withdrawal (Goods Issue) The material components required for production are withdrawn from the warehouse as goods issues.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the goods issue posting for process orders. 2005/Q2 . Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. Since not all areas in your company use the functions of process management. 376 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • • Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using process messages from the PI sheet Business Example You will test goods receipt posting for process orders. you must become familiar with both inventory postings using process messages and manual postings using the corresponding ECC transactions.

You can carry out planned goods issues (that is. 377 . Goods Issue Figure 77: Goods Issue You can post material receipts manually by using the corresponding ECC transactions or by sending process messages from the PI sheet or a process control system. When you create a process order. for the reservation items) and unplanned goods issues. Planned goods issues reduce the reservation.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting The delivery of the material produced to the warehouse is recorded in the form of goods receipts. All rights reserved. the system automatically creates a reservation for the material components required for the order. The system updates the stock values in the material master as well as the material stock and consumption accounts. Both goods movements trigger the following activities in the system: • • • • The system creates a material document that describes the goods movement from the materials management point of view. the system only updates costs. The system updates the material's stock quantities. For unplanned withdrawals. The system creates an accounting document describing the material movement from the accounting point of view. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Each material component of the order is given an item number within the reservation.

Goods Issue Using a Process Message: Example Figure 78: Goods Issue Using a Process Message: Example You can use process messages to trigger goods issue postings from a process control system or the PI sheet. In our example. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 You can also post goods issues automatically during confirmation (backflushing). The message is sent to the corresponding message destination. The message destination of message category PI_CONS is the Goods Issue Posting function module. for example. The graphic shows a goods issue posting from a PI sheet. The system assumes that the material is staged at the corresponding work center. a process message of category PI_CONS to post a goods issue is created when the quantity of ammonia charged is entered in the PI sheet. if you do not want to physically issue a material from the warehouse with reference to an order. 378 © 2006 SAP AG. You can use backflushing.

enter process events directly in the PI sheet in ECC and thus report them using process messages.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Exercise 30: Goods Issue Posting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Which business transactions are triggered by a goods issue posting? Notes: _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. for example. All rights reserved. For example. You will perform manual goods issue postings. you will be able to: • Perform goods issue posting manually • Differentiate between planned and unplanned withdrawals • Perform goods issue posting using process messages Business Example You will test different scenarios for goods issue postings for process orders. You will post goods issues by maintaining the PI sheet. Name the different ways in which goods issues can be entered for process orders. withdraws the material or materials. and posts the goods issue with reference to the material withdrawal slip. A process operator can. Task 1: 1. a process operator/worker takes the material withdrawal slip to the warehouse. 379 .

Continued on next page 380 © 2006 SAP AG. qty Batch 0010 ------- 0020 ------- 0030 ------- Phase 0040 3. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Write down the material list items along with the phases to which they are assigned: Itm Material Reqrd. 2. Display the General Data for material components T-RF7##. In the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO##. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ Task 4: 1. Enter 1. All rights reserved. 3. enter the Standard Profile for the evaluation of documented goods movements in the order info system. Display the material list. 2005/Q2 . Task 3: Manual goods issue posting 1. Display the process order.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Task 2: 1. specify that the following goods movements must be documented: • Goods receipts for the order • Planned goods issues for the reservation • Unplanned goods issues for the order In the Goods Movements field. and for the batch single record for component T-RF8##. Make sure that the order was automatically released after order creation. 2. Enter today's date as the basic start date.000 L as the quantity to be produced. T-RF9##.

381 . and reservation items: Reqmts quantity Committed qty Reservation T-RF7## T-RF9## T-RF8## B1001 4. Write down the first two lines for each material component: T-RF7## Date MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity T-RF9## Date T-RF8## Date Task 5: 1. All rights reserved. reservation quantities. Display the stock/requirements list for the material components. Post a material withdrawal for material component T-RF7## for the order from exercise 3. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Write down the requirements quantities. issue quantities.

The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan. On the selection screen for the goods issue. Accept the quantity that the system proposes and save the goods issue posting. Display the current stock/requirements list for material T-RF7##. Again. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ 7. enter a quantity of 50 L to be withdrawn and save your goods issue. SCM340 Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal 2. Display the General Data for material component T-RF7## in your process order. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Why has this indicator been set? ______________________________________________________ 6. display the General Data for your material component T-RF7## in your process order. Committed qty Final issue What does the Final issue indicator mean? Use the field help (F1) to answer this question. All rights reserved. Write down the following: Reqmts quantity 5. Write down the following: Continued on next page 382 © 2006 SAP AG. Post an additional material withdrawal of 50 L for component T-RF7##. 2005/Q2 . 4. 3. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. you must set the Suggest zero lines indicator on the initial screen. Since the final issue indicator has been set for the reservation item. 8. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100.

Only withdraw half of the planned requirements quantity. Post a partial issue of material component T-RF9## for your current order. Committed qty Final issue Display the costs incurred by the order. Task 6: 1. Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the goods issues. Save your goods issue posting. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. Write down the following: Reqmts quantity 5. 383 .SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Reqmts quantity 9. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ Write down the first two lines: T-RF9## MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 3. Display the General Data for material component T-RF9## in your process order. The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan. Change the proposed quantity. 4. 2. All rights reserved. Committed qty Final issue Display the stock/requirements list for material T-RF9##. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100.

6. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. 3. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ Task 8: 1. Committed qty Final issue Display the costs incurred by the order. Only withdraw half of the quantity yet to be withdrawn. The system proposes the quantity still to be withdrawn according to the plan. All rights reserved. 4. Enter the number of your process order when you enter the goods issue. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. Display the General Data for material component T-RF9## in your process order. Save the goods issue. you want to deviate from the plan and do not want to withdraw further quantities. Post another partial issue of material component T-RF9## for the order. Post an unplanned withdrawal with regard to batch 1-RI5## of material T-RI5##. 2005/Q2 . Change the proposed quantity. Post a goods issue quantity of 50 L. 2. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. Continued on next page 384 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the goods issues. For this reason.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Task 7: 1. 3. Furthermore. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-RF9##. Save your goods issue posting. Select movement type 261. set the final issue indicator FIs when you enter the goods issue. Write down the following: Reqmts quantity 5.

Task 10: 1. Display the goods movement list in the process order. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FI.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting 4. All rights reserved. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FI. doc. Recipe 10. Delete the process instruction FE_PROD in phase 220 Save your recipe. 385 . Display the order costs in the process order. MvT SLoc Batch You can use input help (F4) to obtain information on the goods movement indicator GMov. Enter 1000 L as the quantity to be produced. Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the unplanned goods issue. make the following changes in your master recipe: 2. 3. 5. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Therefore. Choose layout /SCM340 in the order information system. Write down the following: Material GMov Mat. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating goods issue posting using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the master recipe T-RC9#. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Task 9: Goods issue posting using process messages 1.

Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. 3. Task 12: 1. Compare the updated issue quantities with your entries in the PI sheet. 386 Display the costs incurred by your order. In this scenario. 2. The planned values from the order are set as default values. Display the General Data for the material components. Save the order and write down the order number: __________________________________________________ Task 11: 1. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Enter Today +1 week as the basic start date. Send the messages. Find and maintain the PI sheet. All rights reserved. 3. By executing your signature (with ECC user and ECC password) at the end of the PI sheet. 2005/Q2 . you transfer the process messages containing the material consumption recorded to the message monitor. Display the process order. Task 13: 1. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_CONS that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. 2. the PI sheet’s only purpose is to record and report quantities consumed. You can overwrite these values. Task 14: 1. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation.

Task 2: 1. 387 . In the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO##. Name the different ways in which goods issues can be entered for process orders. Which business transactions are triggered by a goods issue posting? Notes: _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ a) For some corresponding information see the page “Goods Issue” in your participant handbook. specify that the following goods movements must be documented: • Goods receipts for the order • Planned goods issues for the reservation • Unplanned goods issues for the order Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Solution 30: Goods Issue Posting Task 1: 1.

Enter today's date as the basic start date.000 L as the quantity to be produced. Choose the Implementation tab. Make sure that the order was automatically released after order creation. Enter 1.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 In the Goods Movements field. The order status REL must have been set after order creation. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. a) 3.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 1. Task 3: Manual goods issue posting 1. enter the Standard Profile for the evaluation of documented goods movements in the order info system. All rights reserved.000 l Start: Today Enter 2. Save the order and write down the order number: Continued on next page 388 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . Documentation of goods movements: Goods movements: Standard profile X planned goods issue X unplanned goods issue X goods receipt for process order Save the new entries for the order-type dependent parameters. a) Logistics → Production . a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters Double-click on the line for plant 1100 and order type PO##.

qty Batch 0010 ------- 0020 ------- 0030 ------- Phase 0040 a) 3. and for the batch single record for component T-RF8##.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting ______________________________________________________ a) Save the order and write down the order number. Choose Materials. Display the process order. Order number Display the material list. Write down the material list items along with the phases to which they are assigned: Itm Material Reqrd. Itm Material Reqrd. 389 . All rights reserved. reservation quantities. and reservation items: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) (…)→ Process Order → Display Process order: 2. issue quantities. Task 4: 1. qty Batch Phase 0010 T-RF7## 900 ------- 0110 0020 T-RF9## 30 ------- 0110 0030 T-RF8## ------- ------- 0210 0040 T-RF8## 70 B1001 0210 Display the General Data for material components T-RF7##. T-RF9##. Write down the requirements quantities.

no. All rights reserved. Write down the first two lines for each material component: T-RF7## Date MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity T-RF9## Date Continued on next page 390 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . Display the stock/requirements list for the material components. Itm B1001 4.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Reqmts quantity Committed qty Reservation T-RF7## T-RF9## T-RF8## B1001 a) Double-click the material list item. Itm T-RF8## 70 0 Res. Itm T-RF9## 30 0 Res.no.no. Reqmts quantity Committed qty Reservation T-RF7## 900 0 Res.

a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting T-RF8## Date a) MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-RF7## or T-RF9## or T-RF8## Plant: 1100 Enter T-RF7## MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty STOCK Available quantity 100 000 OrdRes T-FF9## 900 - 99 100 MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity T-RF9## MRP element STOCK 100 000 OrdRes T-FF9## 30 - 99 970 MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity T-RF8## MRP element STOCK OrdRes 100 000 T-FF9## 70 - 99 930 Task 5: 1. 391 . All rights reserved. Post a material withdrawal for material component T-RF7## for the order from exercise 3.

Write down the following: Reqmts quantity a) Committed qty Final issue (…) Process Order → Display Choose Materials.. a) Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Choose To Reservation. Reference: Reservation screen appears. All rights reserved. 3... Double-click the item number for component T-RF7##. SCM340 Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. 5. ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 392 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter the reservation number and reservation item for material T-RF7## (see Task 4 step 3) and choose Enter. Accept the quantity that the system proposes and save the goods issue posting. The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan. Reqmts quantity Committed qty Final issue 900 900 X What does the Final issue indicator mean? Use the field help (F1) to answer this question. The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan. Accept the quantity that the system proposes and save the goods issue posting. a) The Enter Goods Issue: Selection Screen appears. 4. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal 2. 2005/Q2 .. Display the General Data for material component T-RF7## in your process order.

What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements list Material: T-RF7## Plant: 1100 The reservation has been totally cleared. 393 . T-RF7## MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty STOCK 7. you must set the Suggest zero lines indicator on the initial screen. 6. Since the final issue indicator has been set for the reservation item. The available plant stock has been reduced by the quantity withdrawn. All rights reserved. Display the current stock/requirements list for material T-RF7##.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting ______________________________________________________ Why has this indicator been set? ______________________________________________________ a) Use the field F1 help to display information on the meaning of the final issue indicator. Available quantity 99 100 Post an additional material withdrawal of 50 L for component T-RF7##. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. The system automatically sets the final issue indicator when the quantity withdrawn is greater than or equal to the planned quantity. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100.

Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the goods issues.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 On the selection screen for the goods issue. enter a quantity of 50 L to be withdrawn and save your goods issue. the corresponding actual costs have been updated.. 9. Save the goods issue. All rights reserved. Double-click the item number for component T-RF7##. Again. a) Goto → Costs → Analysis Due to the goods issue of material T-RF7## for the order.. Write down the following: Reqmts quantity a) Committed qty Final issue (…) Process Order → Display Choose Materials. 2005/Q2 .. Reqmts quantity Committed qty Final issue 900 950 X Display the costs incurred by the order. Continued on next page 394 © 2006 SAP AG.. 8. display the General Data for your material component T-RF7## in your process order. The Enter Goods Issue: Selection Screen appears. Enter the reservation number and reservation item for material T-RF7## (see exercise 4-3) and choose Enter. a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 X Suggest zero lines Choose To Reservation. Reference: Reservation screen appears. Select the line for material component T-RF7## and enter a quantity of 50 L.

Reference: Reservation screen appears. 3. Post a partial issue of material component T-RF9## for your current order. Change the proposed quantity. Change the proposed quantity.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Task 6: 1. Save your goods issue posting. a) Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Choose To Reservation. Display the General Data for material component T-RF9## in your process order. a) 2.. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter the reservation number and reservation item for material T-RF9## (see exercise 4-3) and choose Enter. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. a) The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan (30 kg). Only withdraw half of the planned requirements quantity (15 kg). Only withdraw half of the planned requirements quantity.. 4. 395 .. All rights reserved.. Save your goods issue posting. (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. The system proposes the quantity to be withdrawn according to the plan.

Reqmts quantity Committed qty 30 15 Final issue Display the stock/requirements list for material T-RF9##. 5. Double-click the item number for component T-RF9##.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Reqmts quantity a) Committed qty Final issue (…) Process Order → Display Choose Materials. T-RF9## MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty STOCK OrdRes Available quantity 99 985 T-FF9## 15- 99 970 Continued on next page 396 © 2006 SAP AG. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ Write down the first two lines: T-RF9## MRP element a) MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-RF9## Plant: 1100 The reservation has been reduced by the quantity withdrawn. All rights reserved. The available plant stock has been reduced by the quantity withdrawn. 2005/Q2 .

Only withdraw half of the quantity yet to be withdrawn. Enter the reservation number and reservation item for material T-RF9## (see exercise 4-3) and choose Enter. Change the proposed quantity. you want to deviate from the plan and do not want to withdraw further quantities. 397 . (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. Set the final issue indicator. X FIs Save your goods issue posting. The system proposes the quantity still to be withdrawn according to the plan. set the final issue indicator FIs when you enter the goods issue. a) Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Choose To Reservation.. Reference: Reservation screen appears. Display the General Data for material component T-RF9## in your process order. Post another partial issue of material component T-RF9## for the order. All rights reserved. a) 2..SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Task 7: 1. Furthermore..5 kg). 3. Change the proposed quantity. a) The system proposes the quantity still to be withdrawn according to the plan (15 kg). Withdraw only half of the quantity still to be withdrawn according to plan (7. For this reason.. 4. Enter the goods issue with reference to the reservation. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Save your goods issue posting.

The available plant stock has been reduced by the quantity withdrawn. T-RF9## MRP element MRP element data STOCK Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity 99 977. Reqmts quantity Committed qty Final issue 30 22. Double-click the item number for component T-RF9##. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-RF9##. Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the goods issues. Due to the goods issue of material T-RF9## for the order. a) 6.5 Task 8: 1.5 X Display the costs incurred by the order. further actual costs have been updated. 2005/Q2 .Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal Reqmts quantity a) SCM340 Committed qty Final issue (…) Process Order → Display Choose Materials. a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Withdraw Material Continued on next page 398 © 2006 SAP AG. 5. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-RF9## Plant: 1100 The reservation has been totally cleared. Post an unplanned withdrawal with regard to batch 1-RI5## of material T-RI5##. All rights reserved.

Display the goods movement list in the process order. The Enter Goods Issue: New Items screen appears.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting 2. Order: Order number Material: T-RI5## Quantity: 50 Batch: 1-RI5## Save the goods issue. There are no planned costs for material T-RI5##. a) 3. Save the goods issue. a) (…) Process Order → Display Goto → Costs → Analysis Due to the goods issue of material T-RF15## for the order. 399 . 5. All rights reserved. Post a goods issue quantity of 50 L. Movement type: 261 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Enter the number of your process order when you enter the goods issue. Choose layout /SCM340 in the order information system. Select movement type 261. Display the order costs in the process order. Withdraw the material from storage location 0002 in plant 1100. further actual costs have been updated. a) Choose Enter. 4. Note that there is an actual costs update with regard to the unplanned goods issue. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

. Layout /SCM340 Material GMov Mat. GMov 2 means unplanned goods issue. 261 0002 T-RI5## 2 Doc.. Continued on next page 400 © 2006 SAP AG. doc. All rights reserved.no.no. 261 0002 Batch 1-RI5## GMov 1 means planned goods issue. 261 0002 T-RF7## 1 Doc. choose layout settings.no. Recipe 10. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FI. Task 9: Goods issue posting using process messages 1. 2005/Q2 .. MvT SLoc Batch You can use input help (F4) to obtain information on the goods movement indicator GMov.no. 261 0002 T-RF9## 1 Doc.no. select layout. 261 0002 T-RF9## 1 Doc.. doc. choose Goto → Lists → Documented Goods Movements In the order information system. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating goods issue posting using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the master recipe T-RC9#. a) On the order header.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal Material SCM340 GMov Mat. MvT SLoc T-RF7## 1 Doc.

Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FI. Enter Today +1 week as the basic start date. Recipe 10 See description Delete the process instruction FE_PROD in phase 220 Save your recipe. a) Logistics → Production . a) 3. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Enter 1000 L as the quantity to be produced.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 1. All rights reserved.000 l Start: Today + 1 week Enter 2. 401 .Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: 2. a) See description Task 10: 1. Save the order and write down the order number: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. T-RC9##. The order status CRCR must have been set after order creation.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Therefore. a) 3. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. make the following changes in your master recipe: a) Logistics → Production .

2005/Q2 . a) Logistics → Production .Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 __________________________________________________ a) See description Task 11: 1. Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. You can overwrite these values. Find and maintain the PI sheet. In this scenario. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_CONS that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. Continued on next page 402 © 2006 SAP AG. the PI sheet’s only purpose is to record and report quantities consumed. The planned values from the order are set as default values. By executing your signature (with ECC user and ECC password) at the end of the PI sheet. you transfer the process messages containing the material consumption recorded to the message monitor.Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Process order: Order number Task 12: 1. a) Logistics → Production . All rights reserved.Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Task 13: 1.

By double-clicking a message you can display the message characteristics. a) Choose Materials. a) 2005/Q2 Goto → Costs → Analysis © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Production . Send the messages. 403 . Compare the updated issue quantities with your entries in the PI sheet. a) 2. Display the costs incurred by your order. (…) → Process Order → Display Display the General Data for the material components.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Issue Posting Send the messages. Double-click on the item number 3.Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Process order: Order number Choose Enter. Task 14: 1. Display the process order. The Process Message Monitor: Messages screen appears. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved.Unit 6: Material Staging and Withdrawal SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions • Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using process messages from the PI sheet 404 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

405 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the possible material staging procedures • Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions • Perform goods issue postings for process orders manually using process messages from the PI sheet 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

2005/Q2 .Unit Summary 406 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

407 . All rights reserved. Which of the following activities are connected to a goods issue posting for an order? © 2006 SAP AG. What components can be used to control a material staging process with SAP? 2.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1.

Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. 2005/Q2 . Warehouse management using the component MM-IM (Inventory Management) Replenishment control using the component Kanban Storage location management and replenishment control using the component MM-WM (Warehouse Management System) Which of the following activities are connected to a goods issue posting for an order? Answer: • • • • 408 Update of the stock quantity Update of the stock values Reservation reduction Actual costs calculation and update for order © 2006 SAP AG. What components can be used to control a material staging process with SAP? Answer: • • • 2. All rights reserved.

............425 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements ............................................457 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG............................................................................451 Exercise 34: Order Confirmation with Backflushing and Automatic Goods Receipt .............417 Exercise 32: Defining Confirmation Parameters in Customizing ... All rights reserved....................................410 Exercise 31: Function of Confirmations and Confirmation Procedures ............Unit 7 Confirmations Unit Overview Topics: • • Confirmation procedure Confirmations and material movements Unit Objectives After completing this unit..... you will be able to: • • • Carry out confirmations for process orders using different procedures Set up confirmation parameters in Customizing Describe the different goods movements options during confirmation Unit Contents Lesson: Confirmation Procedures ............................421 Exercise 33: Confirmation Procedures ........ 409 .....

phases. All rights reserved. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 2005/Q2 . and secondary resources. Confirmations Figure 79: Confirmations Confirmations record the tasks that have been performed for the order. you will be able to: • • Carry out confirmations for process orders using different procedures Set up confirmation parameters in Customizing Business Example You will test the different procedures for confirming process orders. Confirmations document the state of processing for process orders. You will set up the relevant parameters in Customizing. 410 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the possible confirmation procedures. operations.

you enter a time event confirmation. When you confirm time events. The graphic illustrates which data you can confirm and which business transactions are carried out as a result. Confirmations can be used to trigger backflushing and automatic goods receipts. Time-independent standard values can be confirmed as variable activities. To confirm order data. To confirm a specific point in time (for example. Confirmation Procedures Figure 80: Confirmation Procedures You can enter confirmations for phases and secondary resources. Since costing. Parameters of time-dependent standard values must be assigned the record type group 2. you enter a time ticket confirmation. and capacity requirements planning are only based on the phase data and secondary resource data. you can use either of the following options: • • 2005/Q2 To confirm durations and activities. If you enter a confirmation for a phase or a secondary resource.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Confirmations are recorded for the phases and secondary resources. All rights reserved. you can use both the R/3 confirmation transactions and process messages from within the PI sheet or a process control system. processing start or processing finish). scheduling. 411 . © 2006 SAP AG. the system calculates the confirmed duration. operations are not confirmed.

The standard values of the phases / secondary resources are confirmed in accordance with the formulas assigned. the confirmed values are identical to the planned values.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 You can confirm data as follows: • • Manually during order processing By sending messages in process management Simplified Confirmation Procedures Figure 81: Simplified Confirmation Procedures If you enter a confirmation for the order. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. • • Quantity-dependent standard values of phases / secondary resources are confirmed in proportion to the confirmed order quantity. the confirmed values are identical to the planned values. If the standard values are quantity-independent. If the standard values are quantity-independent. the phases/secondary resources are confirmed in accordance with the formulas defined for the standard values. • • 412 Quantity-dependent standard values of phases / secondary resources are confirmed in proportion to the confirmed operation quantity. 2005/Q2 . You can use the collective confirmation function to confirm data of several phases and secondary resources belonging to different orders.

you specify the following. for example: • • • 2005/Q2 Which entry screen is offered by default Which data the system proposes during data entry How strictly you want checks to be carried out © 2006 SAP AG. When you enter a confirmation. you can change some of these settings in the dialog (variable parameters). you define confirmation parameters for each order type and plant (fixed parameters).SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Customizing: Confirmation Parameters Figure 82: Customizing: Confirmation Parameters In Customizing. All rights reserved. 413 . Using the confirmation parameters.

In the detail areas you specify which information can be entered for the phase to be confirmed or the secondary resources. The standard profile is used when the user in the user parameter CORUPROF is not assigned a profile. or whether the order. To do this. you can define which data should identify the phase to be confirmed or the secondary resources. you can differentiate between whether only the confirmation number can be entered for the defined profile. These definitions are grouped into profiles. phase. You use the Standard profile indicator to specify that the profile is to be used as a standard profile.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Customizing: Single-Screen Entry Figure 83: Customizing: Single-Screen Entry In this step you define the confirmation profiles for the single-screen entry of time ticket confirmations and for the postprocessing of incorrect time ticket confirmations. you specify which input and output fields are displayed in what order. a profile is assigned to the individual end user. You can define the layout of the entry screen. and secondary resources can also be entered. and in which order the related fields are presented. In the user parameter CORUPROF. Here. or if the profile assigned does not exist. for example. 2005/Q2 . Under a profile name. 414 © 2006 SAP AG. In the header area. there can be one definition for each application case. Only one profile can be defined as a standard profile for each of the single-screen entry and the postprocessing of incorrect time ticket confirmations. The postprocessing indicator specifies whether the profile is used for the single-screen entry or for the postprocessing of incorrect time ticket confirmations. All rights reserved.

The following process message categories that you can use for confirmations have been predefined by SAP: Time event confirmations: • • • • PI_PHACT Message on activities (phase) PI_PHST Message on phase status PI_SRACT Message on activities (secondary resource) PI_SRST Message on secondary resource status Time ticket confirmations: • • 2005/Q2 PI_PHCON Time ticket confirmation for phase PI_SRCON Time ticket confirmation for secondary resource © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Confirmation Using a Process Message: Example Figure 84: Confirmation Using a Process Message: Example You can use process messages to confirm data from a process control system or a PI sheet. The message destination for message category PI_PHST is the Confirmation for phase function module. 415 . All rights reserved. The message is sent to the corresponding message destination. The graphic illustrates how you enter a time event confirmation from within a PI sheet. In our example. This message confirms the start of phase 110. a process message of category PI_PHST is created when a signature is entered. This function module posts the confirmation.

Unit 7: Confirmations 416 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

Task 1: 1. In addition. You will get an overview of the confirmation function for process orders. you will be introduced to different confirmation procedures. 417 .SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Exercise 31: Function of Confirmations and Confirmation Procedures Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Which data can you confirm? Which business transactions are carried out as a result of confirmations? Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Describe the function of confirmations. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • Explain the function of confirmations • Name the possible confirmation procedures Business Example Disciplined confirmations as close to real time as possible are one of the main requirements for meaningful process control and useful process evaluations.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. Outline the different confirmation procedures.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Task 2: 1. Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ 418 © 2006 SAP AG.

see the page “„Confirmations” in your participant handbook. Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 2: 1. All rights reserved. 419 .SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Solution 31: Function of Confirmations and Confirmation Procedures Task 1: 1. Outline the different confirmation procedures. Describe the function of confirmations. Which data can you confirm? Which business transactions are carried out as a result of confirmations? Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) For information on confirmations.

2005/Q2 . see the pages “„Confirmation Procedures” and “„Simplified Confirmation Procedures” in your participant handbook. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) 420 For information on confirmation procedures.

you will be able to: • Define confirmation parameters for the order type • Set up profiles for the single-screen entry of time ticket confirmations Business Example You will make the necessary Customizing settings to make confirmations for process orders. Define the confirmation parameters in Customizing for plant 1100 and order type PO## as described in the following paragraphs: 2. 4. If required. Choose the Operation indiv. Specify that you want the system to display the total activities to be confirmed. Specify that you want the system to propose the quantities that according to planning have yet to be confirmed. Specify that you want the system to display the total quantities to be confirmed. Specify that you want the system to always propose a final confirmation. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed activities. Specify that you want the system to create a log of the actual costs when you confirm activities. Task 1: 1. 3. Specify that you want the system to propose the activities that according to planning have yet to be confirmed.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Exercise 32: Defining Confirmation Parameters in Customizing Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. All rights reserved. use F1 and F4 help to get information about the fields and settings that can be made. 421 . Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 6. entry using initial scrn tab. Choose the General individual entry tab. 5. Do not make any entries on the Generally valid settings tab. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed quantities.

Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 7. call the profile SCM340_001 for the single-screen entry of time ticket confirmations. Note the the Standard profile indicator is set in the profile. In Customizing. Analyze the settings for the profile. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed dates. Do not make any further entries or changes. 8. All rights reserved. Save your confirmation parameters. 422 © 2006 SAP AG. use field help (F1) for information on the other confirmation parameters. If required. 2005/Q2 . Task 2: 1.

Specify that you want the system to propose the quantities that according to planning have yet to be confirmed. Do not make any changes on this tab. a) Choose the Generally valid settings tab. Do not make any entries on the Generally valid settings tab. type: Final confirmation 4. 3. a) Error handling/logs: X Actual costs 5. entry using initial scrn tab. use F1 and F4 help to get information about the fields and settings that can be made. All rights reserved. Specify that you want the system to create a log of the actual costs when you confirm activities. a) Choose the General individual entry tab. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Solution 32: Defining Confirmation Parameters in Customizing Task 1: 1. If required. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed quantities. Choose the Operation indiv. Confirmation function: Confirm. 423 . Define the confirmation parameters in Customizing for plant 1100 and order type PO## as described in the following paragraphs: a) Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Order → Operations → Confirmation → Define Confirmation Parameters Choose New Entries. Specify that you want the system to always propose a final confirmation. Plant: 1100 Order type: PO## 2. Choose the General individual entry tab.

In Customizing. call the profile SCM340_001 for the single-screen entry of time ticket confirmations. use field help (F1) for information on the other confirmation parameters. a) Choose the Operation indiv. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed activities. a) 424 Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Order → Operations → Confirmation → Single-Screen Entry → Define Single Screen Entry © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Specify that you want the system to propose the activities that according to planning have yet to be confirmed. Specify that you want the system to display the total activities to be confirmed. entry using initial scrn tab. 2005/Q2 . Note the the Standard profile indicator is set in the profile. a) See description Task 2: 1.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Specify that you want the system to display the total quantities to be confirmed. Do not make any further entries or changes. If required. a) Dates: X Display confirmed dates 8. a) Services: X Propose X Display confirmed activities X Display defaults 7. Quantities: X Propose X Display confirmed quantities X Display defaults 6. Analyze the settings for the profile. Specify that you want the system to display confirmed dates. Save your confirmation parameters.

time event confirmations. Task 2: 1. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. the following data will be displayed: T-FF9## Date MRP element MRP element Recpt/Reqd data qty Available quantity Today STOCK Today PR-ORD Order no. Go to the operation overview. 425 . Display the process order that is chronologically first from the stock/requirements list. only the process order that is chronologically first will be taken into account. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. / PO## 1000 2000 0 Hint: In the following exercises. If you have done the exercises in the previous unit as described. / PO## 1000 1000 Today + 1 week PR-ORD Order no.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Exercise 33: Confirmation Procedures Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Write down the order number: ______________________________ 2. you will be able to: • Use process messages to perform time ticket confirmations. All rights reserved. and confirmations Business Example You will test different confirmation procedures. Task 1: Manual time ticket confirmations (tasks 1 to 5) 1.

2005/Q2 . 2. Display the general data for each phase and write down the assigned confirmation number for each of them: Phase Confirmation number 0110 0210 0220 4. Display the costs incurred by your order.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Write down the operation and phase statuses: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 3. Continued on next page 426 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 3: 1. Write down the quantities and activities for each phase: Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 0210 0220 5. Compare the default values and information displayed for the confirmation with your Customizing settings. All rights reserved. Note that there are no actual costs yet with regard to the confirmations. Save the confirmation. Enter a confirmation with reference to the corresponding confirmation number. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 110.

Compare the default values and information displayed for the confirmation with your Customizing settings. Save the confirmation. Write down the quantities and activities for phase 110. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 210. Which new order status has been set? ______________________________________________________ Task 4: 1. Display the operation overview of your order. All rights reserved. Display the costs incurred by your order. 6. Task 5: 1. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 5. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 220. Enter the confirmation with reference to the process order number and to phase 210. Enter the confirmation with reference to the process order number and to phase 220. Write down the following: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 4. 2.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures 3. Note the actual costs with regard to your confirmation. 427 . Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Note the actual costs with regard to your confirmations. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating time ticket confirmation using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the above master recipe T-RC9#. Therefore. All rights reserved. Recipe 10. SCM340 Then display the operation overview of your order. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FA. we only want you to make confirmations in the PI sheet. make the following changes in your master recipe: 2. Write down the following: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 3. 5.Unit 7: Confirmations 2. Continued on next page 428 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the quantities and activities for phases 210 and 220. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0210 0220 4. In this scenario. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FA. 2005/Q2 . Display the costs incurred by your order. Which new order status has been set? ______________________________________________________ Task 6: Time ticket confirmations using process messages (tasks 6 to 11) 1. Save your recipe.

Task 9: 1. 2. Find and maintain the PI sheet. Enter 1. In this scenario. 3.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Task 7: 1. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ Task 8: 1. Task 10: 1. you transfer the process messages containing the activities recorded to the message monitor. Send the messages. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. Display the process order.000 L as the quantity to be produced. The planned values from the order are set as default values. Enter Today +2 weeks as the basic start date. You can overwrite these values. Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. Task 11: 1. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PHCON that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. By executing your signature (with ECC user and ECC password) at the end of the PI sheet. All rights reserved. the PI sheet’s only purpose is to record and report activities (= duration) performed. 429 .

2. 5. Enter Today +3 weeks as the basic start date. Display the quantities and activities for the phases. 3. 5. Which order status has been set with regard to the confirmations? ______________________________________________________ Task 12: Manual time event confirmations (tasks 12 and 13) 1. Save your confirmation.000 L as the quantity to be produced. Carry out a time event confirmation for phase 110. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ Task 13: 1. Display the costs incurred by your order. Enter the confirmation with reference to the order number. Confirm the start of phase processing. 2.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 2. Choose the present date and time as the processing start. All rights reserved. Choose the present date and time as the processing end. Enter 1. 3. 2005/Q2 . Save your confirmation. 3. 4. Display the operation overview of your order. you report the end of the processing of phase 110 in the same way. Write down the following: Continued on next page 430 © 2006 SAP AG. Note the operation and phase statuses. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Display the operation overview of your order. In another time event confirmation. 4. Make sure that the order was automatically released after order creation.

Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating time event confirmation using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the above master recipe T-RC9#. Save your recipe. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FT. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 How did the system calculate the confirmed duration? ______________________________________________________ 8. In this scenario. Display the dates confirmed for phase 110. we only want you to make time event confirmations in the PI sheet. 7. Display the cost analysis for your order. Task 14: Time event confirmations using process messages (tasks 14 to 19) 1. 431 . make the following changes in your master recipe: 2.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 6. Therefore. All rights reserved. Write down the quantities and activities for phase 110. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FT. Recipe 10.

Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. Send the messages. Task 18: 1.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Task 15: 1. Find and maintain the PI sheet. 3. Write down the following: Continued on next page 432 © 2006 SAP AG.000 L as the quantity to be produced. Enter Today +4 weeks as the basic start date. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Display the operation overview of your order. Task 17: 1. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ Task 16: 1. Enter 1. Every signature triggers a time event confirmation. Task 19: 1. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PHST that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. 2. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. You report the start and finish of each phase by executing your signature in the PI sheet. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. Display the process order. 2.

© 2006 SAP AG. 433 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 2005/Q2 3. Display the dates confirmed for the phases. Display the cost analysis for your order. Display the quantities and activities for the phases. 5. 4.

/ PO## 1000 1000 Today + 1 week PR-ORD Order no. / PO## 1000 2000 0 Hint: In the following exercises. only the process order that is chronologically first will be taken into account. 2005/Q2 . Write down the order number: ______________________________ a) Position the cursor on the process order that is chronologically first and choose the Display element icon. The order header appears. If you have done the exercises in the previous unit as described. Continued on next page 434 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. the following data will be displayed: T-FF9## Date MRP element MRP element Recpt/Reqd data qty Available quantity Today STOCK Today PR-ORD Order no.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Solution 33: Confirmation Procedures Task 1: Manual time ticket confirmations (tasks 1 to 5) 1. a) Logistics → Production .Process → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FF9## Plant: 1100 Enter Task 2: 1. Write down the order number. Display the process order that is chronologically first from the stock/requirements list. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100.

Go to the operation overview. Write down the quantities and activities for each phase: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures 2. Double-click the relevant phase number and choose the General data tab. 435 . All rights reserved. Write down the operation and phase statuses: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 a) Choose Operations. CRCR REL 0210 CRCR REL 0220 CRCR REL Display the general data for each phase and write down the assigned confirmation number for each of them: Phase Confirmation number 0110 0210 0220 a) 4. Operation Phase Status 0100 CRCR REL 0110 CRCR REL 0200 3.

Save the confirmation. Note that there are no actual costs yet with regard to the confirmations. All rights reserved. a) (…) → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Phase → Time Ticket Confirmation: Confirmation number for phase 110 (see exercise 2-3) 2. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 0 1000 L 0 15 MIN 0210 0 1000 L 0 20 MIN 0220 0 1000 L 0 10 MIN Display the costs incurred by your order.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 0210 0220 a) 5. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 110. Compare the default values and information displayed for the confirmation with your Customizing settings. 2005/Q2 . a) 3. Task 3: 1. Write down the following: Continued on next page 436 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Goto → Costs → Analysis No actual costs have been recorded yet with regard to the confirmations. See exercise Display the operation overview of your order. Choose the Qty/activities tab for the phase. Enter a confirmation with reference to the corresponding confirmation number.

Due to the confirmation made for phase 110.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 a) Operation Phase Status 0100 CRCR CNF REL 0110 CRCR CNF REL 0200 4. Note the actual costs with regard to your confirmation. a) 6. CRCR REL 0210 CRCR REL 0220 CRCR REL Write down the quantities and activities for phase 110. PCNF Partially confirmed Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Which new order status has been set? ______________________________________________________ a) Go to the order header. the relevant actual costs were updated. 437 . Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 1000 L 1000 L 15 MIN 15 MIN Display the costs incurred by your order. All rights reserved. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 a) 5.

Enter the confirmation with reference to the process order number and to phase 210. All rights reserved. a) (…) → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Phase → Time Ticket Order: Order number Phase: 210 2. Save the confirmation. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 210. Then display the operation overview of your order. a) (…) → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Phase → Time Ticket Order: Order number Phase: 220 2. 2005/Q2 . Enter the confirmation with reference to the process order number and to phase 220. a) See exercise Task 5: 1. Carry out a time ticket confirmation for phase 220. Compare the default values and information displayed for the confirmation with your Customizing settings.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Task 4: 1. Write down the following: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 Continued on next page 438 © 2006 SAP AG.

439 . a) 5. CNF Finally confirmed Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. CRCR CNF REL 0210 CRCR CNF REL 0220 CRCR CNF REL Write down the quantities and activities for phases 210 and 220. Which new order status has been set? ______________________________________________________ a) Go to the order header. All rights reserved. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0210 1000 L 1000 L 20 MIN 20 MIN 0220 1000 L 1000 L 10 MIN 10 MIN Display the costs incurred by your order. Note the actual costs with regard to your confirmations. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0210 0220 a) 4. the relevant actual costs were updated.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Operation Phase Status 0200 0210 0220 a) Operation Phase Status 0100 CRCR CNF REL 0110 CRCR CNF REL 0200 3. Due to the confirmations.

Recipe: 10 2. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Enter 1. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FA. we only want you to make confirmations in the PI sheet. All rights reserved. Recipe 10. make the following changes in your master recipe: a) Logistics → Production .000 L as the quantity to be produced. Save your recipe.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 1. Therefore.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Task 6: Time ticket confirmations using process messages (tasks 6 to 11) 1.000 L Start: Today + 2 weeks Enter Continued on next page 440 © 2006 SAP AG. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FA. Enter Today +2 weeks as the basic start date. a) Logistics → Production . a) See description Task 7: 1. In this scenario. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating time ticket confirmation using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the above master recipe T-RC9#. 2005/Q2 .Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: T-RC9##.

Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ a) See description Task 8: 1. a) Logistics → Production . the PI sheet’s only purpose is to record and report activities (= duration) performed. 441 . The planned values from the order are set as default values. you transfer the process messages containing the activities recorded to the message monitor. Find and maintain the PI sheet.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures 2. By executing your signature (with ECC user and ECC password) at the end of the PI sheet. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Process order: Order number Task 9: 1.Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Task 10: 1. a) 3. All rights reserved. The order status SREZ must have been set after order creation. Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. In this scenario. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PHCON that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. You can overwrite these values. a) Logistics → Production .

Display the operation overview of your order. By double-clicking a message you can display the message characteristics. Continued on next page 442 © 2006 SAP AG. a) 2.Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Process order: Order number Choose Enter. Enter 1. Task 11: 1. Send the messages.000 L as the quantity to be produced.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Send the messages. CNF Finally confirmed Task 12: Manual time event confirmations (tasks 12 and 13) 1. (…) → Process Order → Display Usual procedure Which order status has been set with regard to the confirmations? ______________________________________________________ a) Go to the order header. Display the quantities and activities for the phases. Usual procedure Display the costs incurred by your order. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. a) 5. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Choose Operations. The Process Message Monitor: Messages screen appears. a) Logistics → Production . a) 4. a) 3. Display the process order. Note the operation and phase statuses.

a) Logistics → Production .Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 1. The system proposes the phases still to be confirmed. Make sure that the order was automatically released after order creation. The order status REL must have been set after order creation. a) 2.000 L Start: Today +3 weeks Enter 2. Choose the present date and time as the processing start. Carry out a time event confirmation for phase 110. 443 . Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ a) See description Task 13: 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Select phase 110 and choose the Details icon. Enter the confirmation with reference to the order number. All rights reserved. a) 3. 3. (…) → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Phase → Time Event Confirm the start of phase processing. a) X Start processing Process order: Order number Choose Enter.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Enter Today +3 weeks as the basic start date.

5.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Save your confirmation. Write down the following: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 Continued on next page 444 © 2006 SAP AG. you report the end of the processing of phase 110 in the same way. All rights reserved. a) The Create Confirmation of Time Event: Actual Data screen appears. a) (…) → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Phase → Time Event X Finish processing Process order: Order number Enter Select phase 110 Details icon Finish processing: Current date Current time Save. Start processing: Current date Current time Use possible entries help (F4) to enter the date and time. Save your confirmation. 2005/Q2 . Save your confirmation. 4. In another time event confirmation. Choose the present date and time as the processing end. Display the operation overview of your order.

Operation Phase Status 0100 CRCR CNF REL 0110 CRCR CNF PRFN REL 0200 6.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Operation Phase Status 0200 0210 0220 a) (…) Process Order → Display Choose Operations. 445 . Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 How did the system calculate the confirmed duration? ______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Qty/activities tab. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. CRCR REL Double-click phase number 110 and choose the Dates tab. Phase Confirmed yield Operation quantity Confirmed (activity) To confirm (activity) 0110 1000 L 1000 L Calculated duration 15 MIN The system used the difference between the processing finish and the processing start of phase 110 to calculate the duration. Write down the quantities and activities for phase 110. 0210 CRCR REL 0220 CRCR REL Display the dates confirmed for phase 110. a) 7.

a) As a result of the confirmation for phase 110. In this scenario. All rights reserved. a) See description Task 15: 1. Create another process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. The process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FT. Enter 1. Recipe 10. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FT.Unit 7: Confirmations 8. 2005/Q2 . Task 14: Time event confirmations using process messages (tasks 14 to 19) 1.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: T-RC9##. Save your recipe. Therefore. SCM340 Display the cost analysis for your order. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating time event confirmation using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the above master recipe T-RC9#. actual costs were updated.000 L as the quantity to be produced. we only want you to make time event confirmations in the PI sheet. make the following changes in your master recipe: a) Logistics → Production . Continued on next page 446 © 2006 SAP AG. Recipe: 10 2.

Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ a) See description Task 16: 1.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 1. a) Logistics → Production . Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures Enter Today +4 weeks as the basic start date. a) Logistics → Production . Find and maintain the PI sheet. The order status CRCR must have been set after order creation. You report the start and finish of each phase by executing your signature in the PI sheet. Every signature triggers a time event confirmation. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. All rights reserved. a) 3.Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Process order: Order number Task 17: 1. a) Logistics → Production .Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 447 .000 L Start: Today +4 weeks Enter 2.

Send the messages. Choose Operations. All rights reserved. a) 4. Display the dates confirmed for the phases. Continued on next page 448 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the process order. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PHST that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. Write down the following: Operation Phase Status 0100 0110 0200 0210 0220 a) 3. Display the quantities and activities for the phases. a) Logistics → Production . The Process Message Monitor: Messages screen appears. By double-clicking a message you can display the message characteristics. a) 2.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Task 18: 1. Task 19: 1. (…) → Process Order → Display Display the operation overview of your order. a) Choose the Qty/activities tab. Send the messages. Double-click the relevant phase number and choose the Dates tab.Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Process order: Order number Choose Enter. 2005/Q2 .

© 2006 SAP AG. 449 . All rights reserved. Display the cost analysis for your order. a) 2005/Q2 As a result of the confirmation for the phases.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmation Procedures 5. actual costs were updated.

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Carry out confirmations for process orders using different procedures • Set up confirmation parameters in Customizing 450 © 2006 SAP AG.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Lesson Overview This lesson familiarizes you with the functions of backflushing and automatic goods receipt. You will test the following functions in a sample scenario: • Backflushing and • Automatic goods receipt Goods Movements During Confirmation Figure 85: Goods Movements During Confirmation When you enter a confirmation. you will be able to: • Describe the different goods movements options during confirmation Business Example You will get an overview of the options available for performing material movements during confirmations. you can post both planned and unplanned material movements. 451 . All rights reserved.

Unplanned goods movements: You can navigate to a material overview from the confirmation. • Automatic goods receipt If the control key assigned to the phase that you confirm specifies that an automatic goods receipt must be made. All rights reserved. the system automatically posts the delivered material to the stock. If you use this function. do not trigger material postings from the confirmation. the system automatically posts a goods issue for these components. Backflushing (I) Figure 86: Backflushing (I) 452 © 2006 SAP AG. Note that in PP-PI you can use process messages from process control to post material movements.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 You can enter planned goods movements during confirmation as follows: • Backflushing When you confirm an order or phase that has been assigned components for which the Backflushing indicator has been set. You can enter any number of unplanned material movements or change planned material movements on this material overview. 2005/Q2 .

you cannot backflush a material if the material component is assigned to an operation in the process order. The system assumes that the material is staged at the resource. All rights reserved. Goods issue posting can be carried out: • • Directly when the material is withdrawn Automatically when you confirm the phase to which the material component has been assigned (backflushing) You can use backflushing. Backflushing (II) Figure 87: Backflushing (II) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In Customizing. Note that you can only confirm phases in the process order. For this reason. Note that in PP-PI you can use process messages (for example. if you do not want to physically issue a material from the warehouse with reference to an order. You can navigate to a material overview from the confirmation. 453 . If you use this function. PI_CONS) from process control to post material movements. or set the filter for the control recipe destination accordingly for generated process instructions. we recommend that you do not trigger goods issues from the confirmation. you can define whether you want this overview to list all components assigned to the phase or only those that must be backflushed. for example.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements A goods issue has to be posted for every material that is withdrawn during order processing. You can enter any number of unplanned material movements or change planned material movements on this material overview.

Automatic Goods Receipt Figure 88: Automatic Goods Receipt In the control key of a phase. you can still change them. the material is always backflushed regardless of what you entered in the material master record. it depends on the settings in the material master record whether the material is backflushed or not. In the material master record. you can determine whether the material is always to be backflushed or whether it depends on the settings in the resource. 2005/Q2 . the settings made in the master recipe are copied to the order. 454 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 To determine whether a material is to be backflushed. However. The graphic shows where you must set which indicators to control backflushing. you can make settings in: • • • • The material master record (MRP view) The resource (Basic Data screen) The master recipe (General Data screen for component assignment) The process order (General Data screen for the material component) When you create a process order. you can specify that the system should automatically post the finished material to stock when the phase is confirmed. If you set the Backflush indicator in the process order. All rights reserved. If you do not set the indicator in the process order.

If you want to use automatic goods receipt in process manufacturing. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. do not trigger an automatic goods receipt from confirmation.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements An automatic goods receipt can only be posted for one phase per order. All rights reserved. 455 . the operation quantity processed is confirmed. You should therefore make sure that only one phase in the order (normally the last phase) has a control key that specifies automatic goods receipt. make sure that the operation quantity (confirmed quantity) is identical with the quantity produced. Note: As a basis for activity calculation. In process manufacturing. this need not necessarily be identical to the yield produced. PI_PROD) to post goods receipts. If you want to use process messages (for example.

Unit 7: Confirmations 456 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

What must you also be aware of with regard to goods movements at confirmation if you want to use process management? Notes: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • Enter the settings for backflushing • Enter the settings for an automatic goods receipt • Perform the confirmation for a complete order with backflushing and automatic goods receipt Business Example To simplify order processing. You also want backflushing to be triggered when assigned material components are confirmed and an automatic goods receipt to be posted for the product T-FF9##.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Exercise 34: Order Confirmation with Backflushing and Automatic Goods Receipt Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. How can you enter planned goods movements at confirmation? Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. All rights reserved. Task 1: Goods movements during confirmation (exercises 1 and 2) 1. 457 . you decide not to use process management for the process orders that produce your fertilizer T-FF9## and to use the simplified confirmation process for order confirmation instead.

Display the MRP 2 view in the material master record for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##. recipe 10. All rights reserved. Write down the following: Production storage location: ________ Use the F1 help to display information on the meanings of these fields with regard to backflushing. which is managed in batches. and T-RF9## are to be backflushed at confirmation. Task 6: 1. Note: The components T-RF7## and T-RF9## are not managed in batches. Make the required settings in the material list of the master recipe T-RC9##. T-RF8##. Display the MRP2 view in the material master record for the material component T-RF8##. Task 5: Settings for the default issuing storage location (exercises 5 and 6) 1. Where can you specify that a material component is to be backflushed? Task 4: 1. For the production process for fertilizer T-FF9##. the assigned material components T-RF7##.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Task 3: Settings for backflushing 1. 2005/Q2 . Write down the following: Batch entry: ____ Production storage location: ________ How is the default issuing storage location assigned to this material component in the process order? Continued on next page 458 © 2006 SAP AG.

In master recipe T-RC9##. Use order type PO##. recipe 10. Write down the following: Prod. Check whether the setting for an automatic goods receipt at confirmation has been made. Display the detail information for this control key. Enter Today +5 weeks as the basic start date. Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. 2. the goods receipt for the product T-FF9## is to be automatically posted at order confirmation. Make sure that the following activities also take place automatically at order creation: . Task 8: Order confirmation with backflushing and automatic goods receipt (exercises 8 to 10) 1.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Task 7: Settings for an automatic goods receipt For the fertilizer production process. All rights reserved.Batch number assignment for the product T-FF9## . Display the Work scheduling view for product T-FF9## in the material master. 2. Enter 2000 L as the quantity to be produced. storage location: ________ Use the field help (F1) to display information on the meaning of this field. choose the appropriate control key PI05 for the last phase 220.Order release . Check whether the storage location defaults for the automatic goods receipt or backflushing are correctly copied or determined for the product and the material components. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 459 . 1.Batch determination for material component T-RF8## 3.

4. Note that you can still change the data in the list. Confirm a yield of 1000 L and choose the option Final confirmation. Note the quantity data in the list. 3. Save the confirmation and write down the system messages. Display the list of the automatic goods movements. Write down the issue quantities for your material components for the order compared to the planned requirements quantities. Enter an order confirmation for your process order.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Save your order and write down the order number. Display your process order. 4. If required. Display the goods movement list in the order. ______________________ Task 9: 1. 2. Note that unplanned goods movements are possible. 2. 2005/Q2 . It is set automatically when the final confirmation is made. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Task 10: 1. Note the Completed indicator. All rights reserved. compare them to the planned values in the order. Write down the General Data for the order header: Total quantity: ____________ Delivered: ____________ 5. Which order status was set with regard to the confirmation and the goods movements? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 3. Continued on next page 460 © 2006 SAP AG.

© 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Material Reqmts quantity Committed qty T-RF7## T-RF9## Batch for T-RF8## Interpret the result. reset the settings you made for backflushing and automatic goods receipt (see Tasks 4 and 7). 2005/Q2 For the following exercises. Phase Confirmed To be confirmed 110 210 220 Interpret the result. 461 . ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 6. Write down the planned confirmed activities and the actual confirmed activities for the phases. Why were the confirmed activities not adjusted proportionally to the confirmed yield in our scenario? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Task 11: 1. All rights reserved.

Continued on next page 462 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Solution 34: Order Confirmation with Backflushing and Automatic Goods Receipt Task 1: Goods movements during confirmation (exercises 1 and 2) 1. What must you also be aware of with regard to goods movements at confirmation if you want to use process management? Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) For information on goods movements during confirmation. How can you enter planned goods movements at confirmation? Notes: ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ a) For information on goods movements during confirmation. see the page “„Goods Movements During Confirmation” in your participant handbook. Task 2: 1. 2005/Q2 . see the page “„Goods Movements During Confirmation” in your participant handbook.

Write down the following: Production storage location: ________ Use the F1 help to display information on the meanings of these fields with regard to backflushing.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: T-RC9##. a) Logistics → Production . and T-RF9## are to be backflushed at confirmation. T-RF8##. Task 4: 1. All rights reserved. Where can you specify that a material component is to be backflushed? a) For information on backflushing.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Task 3: Settings for backflushing 1. 463 . recipe 10. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Recipe: 10 Materials Select your material components and then choose the Assignment details icon in the lower toolbar. the assigned material components T-RF7##. Set the following indicator for each material component on the General data tab X Backflushing Save your master recipe. For the production process for fertilizer T-FF9##. Task 5: Settings for the default issuing storage location (exercises 5 and 6) 1. Make the required settings in the material list of the master recipe T-RC9##. see the page “„Backflushing (II)” in your participant handbook. Display the MRP 2 view in the material master record for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##.

Write down the following: Batch entry: ____ Production storage location: ________ How is the default issuing storage location assigned to this material component in the process order? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 464 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the MRP2 view in the material master record for the material component T-RF8##. a) Logistics → Production .Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Note: The components T-RF7## and T-RF9## are not managed in batches.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-RF7## or T-RF9## Enter X MRP2 Enter Plant: 1100 Enter MRP2 view: Production storage location: 0002 Task 6: 1. which is managed in batches. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-RF8## Enter X MRP2 Enter Plant: 1100 Enter MRP2 view: Batch entry: 3 Production storage location: ____ When an order is released. The issuing storage location is determined via batch determination. batch determination is automatically carried out for this material. choose the appropriate control key PI05 for the last phase 220. the goods receipt for the product T-FF9## is to be automatically posted at order confirmation.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements ____________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production . Task 7: Settings for an automatic goods receipt For the fertilizer production process. recipe 10. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In master recipe T-RC9##. 465 . All rights reserved. Display the detail information for this control key. 1.

a) Logistics → Production . a) Logistics → Production . goods receipt Save your master recipe. X Autom. 2. Write down the following: Prod. Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group: T-RC9## Operations Replace the existing control key PI01 in phase 220 with the new control key PI05. storage location: ________ Use the field help (F1) to display information on the meaning of this field. The Control key screen appears. storage location: 0001 Task 8: Order confirmation with backflushing and automatic goods receipt (exercises 8 to 10) 1. Display the Work scheduling view for product T-FF9## in the material master. Continued on next page 466 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . Position the cursor on the new control key and choose the F4 help. Position the cursor on control key PI05 and choose Detail info.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Check whether the setting for an automatic goods receipt at confirmation has been made.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-FF9## Enter X Work scheduling Enter Plant: 1100 Enter Work scheduling view: Prod. All rights reserved.

Batch number assignment for the product T-FF9## . Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.) → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 2000 L Start: Today + 5 weeks Enter 2. Make sure that the following activities also take place automatically at order creation: .SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Use order type PO##. Enter Today +5 weeks as the basic start date. No further details required Check whether the storage location defaults for the automatic goods receipt or backflushing are correctly copied or determined for the product and the material components. a) (..Batch determination for material component T-RF8## a) 3.. Enter 2000 L as the quantity to be produced.Order release . All rights reserved. 467 . Save your order and write down the order number.

Material Storage location T-RF7## 0002 T-RF9## 0002 T-RF8## 0002 For the material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##. Enter an order confirmation for your process order. the storage location was determined at batch determination. Storage location: 0001 Batch: Batch number The storage location for the automatic goods receipt was copied from the material master record of product T-FF9##. Confirm a yield of 1000 L and choose the option Final confirmation. Task 9: 1. a) X Final conf. Confirmed yield: 1000 L Enter The following message appears: Total confirmation quantity not equal to planned confirmation quantity Choose Enter to confirm. All rights reserved. Save your order.Process → Process Order → Confirmation → Enter for Order Process order: Order number Enter 2. a) Logistics → Production .Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 ______________________ a) On the order header. Continued on next page 468 © 2006 SAP AG. For the material components T-RF8##. Choose Materials. 2005/Q2 . choose the Goods receipt tab. the storage location was copied from the material master record.

a) 4. compare them to the planned values in the order. 469 . Display the list of the automatic goods movements. It is set automatically when the final confirmation is made. All rights reserved. Note that you can still change the data in the list. you get the message: Confirmation saved. (…) → Process Order → Display Which order status was set with regard to the confirmation and the goods movements? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Status icon for the status line in the order header. Choose Goods movements. a) 2. Note the quantity data in the list.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements 3. Note the Completed indicator. Goto → Lists → Documented Goods Movements Write down the General Data for the order header: Total quantity: ____________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Note that unplanned goods movements are possible. CNF Finally confirmed DLV Delivered GMPS Goods movement posted 3. Display your process order. If required. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Save your confirmation. Display the goods movement list in the order. a) 4. Save the confirmation and write down the system messages. Goods movements: 4. errors: 0 Task 10: 1. After you save.

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . choose the General data tab. Write down the planned confirmed activities and the actual confirmed activities for the phases. Material Reqmts quantity Committed qty T-RF7## 1800 L 900 L T-RF9## 60 KG 30 KG Batch for T-RF8## 140 L 70 L Only half of the planned requirements quantities were posted for backflushing because only half (1000 L) of the planned production quantity (2000 L) was confirmed. Select the material components T-RF7## and T-RF9## and the batch for material component T-RF8##. 6. Continued on next page 470 © 2006 SAP AG. Total quantity: 2000 L Delivered: 1000 L Only half of the planned quantity was produced. Material Reqmts quantity Committed qty T-RF7## T-RF9## Batch for T-RF8## Interpret the result. Due to the final confirmation (status CNF) the Final issue indicator was set.Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Delivered: ____________ a) On the order header. Write down the issue quantities for your material components for the order compared to the planned requirements quantities. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Choose Materials. 5. Choose Mat. detail in the lower toolbar.

Why were the confirmed activities not adjusted proportionally to the confirmed yield in our scenario? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Choose Operations. This means that the processing duration of the phases is not dependent on the production quantity.SCM340 Lesson: Confirmations and Material Movements Phase Confirmed To be confirmed 110 210 220 Interpret the result. For the following exercises. 471 . Recipe: 10 Reset the Backflushing indicator in the general data for the material components. You can use quantity-dependent standard values to adjust confirmed quantities to the actual quantity of goods manufactured. Double-click the relevant phase number and choose the Qty/activities tab. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Replace control key PI05 in phase 220 with control key PI01. the standard value Duration is defined as a quantity-independent standard value. In our scenario. Phase Confirmed To be confirmed 110 15 MIN 15 MIN 210 20 MIN 20 MIN 220 10 MIN 10 MIN The planned values were copied for the activities at order confirmation. a) Changes in Recipe Group: T-RC9##. Save your recipe. Task 11: 1. All rights reserved. reset the settings you made for backflushing and automatic goods receipt (see Tasks 4 and 7).

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 7: Confirmations SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the different goods movements options during confirmation 472 © 2006 SAP AG.

SCM340 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Carry out confirmations for process orders using different procedures • Set up confirmation parameters in Customizing • Describe the different goods movements options during confirmation 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 473 .

2005/Q2 .Unit Summary 474 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

What planned goods movements can be triggered by a confirmation? © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 475 . Name the confirmation procedures available for process orders.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. 2.

Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. Name the confirmation procedures available for process orders. Time event confirmations for phases and secondary resources Time ticket confirmations for phases and secondary resources Confirmation for the whole process order Collective confirmation for phases and secondary resources What planned goods movements can be triggered by a confirmation? Answer: • • 476 Backflushing (automatic goods issue for material component) Automatic goods receipt (for the material produced) © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . Answer: • • • • 2. All rights reserved.

.........................527 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG................................................... 477 .......... All rights reserved.......... and Order Archiving Unit Overview Topics: • • • • Goods receipt Order settlement Order reorganization: procedure Archiving and deleting: prerequisites Unit Objectives After completing this unit....................510 Exercise 36: Order Settlement......... Order Settlement.......515 Lesson: Archiving and Deleting .........................................................478 Exercise 35: Goods Receipt ................485 Lesson: Order Settlement ............... you will be able to: • • • • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions Perform goods receipt postings for process orders using process messages from within the PI sheet Settle a process order and describe the general principle of order settlement Describe the process of process order reorganization Unit Contents Lesson: Goods Receipt ...................Unit 8 Goods Receipt.............

and Order Archiving SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about goods receipt postings with reference to process orders. Since not all areas in your company use the functions of process management. you must become familiar with both inventory postings using process messages and manual postings using the corresponding ECC transactions. you will be able to: • • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions Perform goods receipt postings for process orders using process messages from within the PI sheet Business Example You will test goods receipt posting for process orders. 478 © 2006 SAP AG. The goods receipt is the last processing step. Order Settlement. All rights reserved. Order Execution and Goods Receipt Figure 89: Order Execution and Goods Receipt The graphic shows the main steps carried out during process order execution. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 2005/Q2 .Unit 8: Goods Receipt.

The system updates the stock values in the material master as well as the material stock and consumption accounts. Both goods movements trigger the following activities in the system: • • • • 2005/Q2 The system creates a material document that describes the goods movement from the materials management point of view. The system updates the material's stock quantities. © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 479 .SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Figure 90: Goods Receipt The material components required for production are withdrawn from the warehouse as goods issues. The system creates an accounting document describing the material movement from the accounting view. The delivery of the material produced to the warehouse is recorded in the form of goods receipts.

Order Settlement. however. You can still post goods receipts for remaining quantities. If you have already entered a delivery for which the Delivery completed indicator has been set and still expect another delivery. You can also post a goods receipt automatically during confirmation.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. The open quantity is zero. do not use this function since goods receipts are posted using process messages. The Delivery completed indicator specifies whether an order is regarded as closed from the point of view of goods receipt. This means that no further goods receipts are expected for the order. and Order Archiving SCM340 Goods Receipt Figure 91: Goods Receipt You can post material receipts manually by using the corresponding ECC transactions or by sending process messages from the PI sheet or a process control system. they do not change the open purchase order quantity. If you use process management. All rights reserved. you must reset the indicator. 480 © 2006 SAP AG. The graphic shows the business transactions triggered by goods receipt postings. 2005/Q2 . However.

The message destination of message category PI_PROD is the Goods receipt posting function module. The graphic shows a goods receipt posting from a PI sheet.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Using a Process Message: Example Figure 92: Goods Receipt Using a Process Message: Example You can use process messages to trigger goods receipt postings from a process control system or the PI sheet. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a process message of category PI_PROD to post a goods receipt is created when the fertilizer quantity produced is entered. The message is sent to the corresponding message destination. All rights reserved. 481 . In our example.

If you want to allow overdeliveries. the system issues a message to inform the user about the underdelivery.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. and Order Archiving SCM340 Underdelivery and Overdelivery Figure 93: Underdelivery and Overdelivery Underdeliveries are permitted in the standard system. If you manually post the goods receipt. Overdeliveries are not allowed in the standard system. A goods receipt quantity that is less than the order quantity minus the underdelivery tolerance is regarded as a partial delivery and is accepted by the system. you can deactivate the overdelivery tolerance check and thus enable unrestricted overdeliveries. All rights reserved. In this message. In addition. it also takes the underdelivery tolerance into account. Order Settlement. 2005/Q2 . you can define an overdelivery tolerance in percentage. You can even define an underdelivery tolerance in percentage. 482 © 2006 SAP AG.

this indicator is copied from the material master to the order. At the time of the goods receipt. You want to inspect the product manufactured in a particular process order. When you create an order. you set the indicator for the quality inspection in the material master. The production controller sets the indicator for quality inspection in the goods receipt data of the order. you decide that the material quality must be checked. 483 . You set the indicator for the quality check in the goods receipt item. © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Goods Receipt Posting to Inspection Stock Figure 94: Goods Receipt Posting to Inspection Stock You can post goods receipts from production to the inspection stock for one of the following reasons: • • • 2005/Q2 The material is always subject to quality inspection before it can be used. In this case. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Order Settlement. .Unit 8: Goods Receipt. and Order Archiving SCM340 484 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Task 1: 1. Display the stock overview for your product T-FF9##.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Exercise 35: Goods Receipt Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 485 . Which options do you have to post goods receipts for process orders? Which business transactions are triggered by a goods receipt posting? Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: Manual goods receipt postings (tasks 2 to 7) 1. What stock quantities are available? ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You will test goods receipt posting for process orders. All rights reserved. the quantity produced must be posted to the warehouse stock to credit the production area and to ensure the availability of the materials for follow-up activities. you will be able to: • Make manual goods receipt postings and goods receipt postings using process messages Business Example After a material was produced by means of a process order.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. 2. / PO## 1000 5000 Tomorrow + 4 weeks PR-ORD Order no. / PO## 1000 3000 Tomorrow + 2 weeks PR-ORD Order no. Task 4: 1. / PO## 1000 2000 Tomorrow + 1 week PR-ORD Order no. 2005/Q2 . / PO## 1000 6000 1000 Hint: In the following exercises. Order Settlement. Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. Which settings have been made with regard to the delivery tolerances of a goods receipt for the order? Continued on next page 486 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. only the process order that is chronologically first will be taken into account. the following data should be displayed: T-FF9## Date MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity Today STOCK Tomorrow PR-ORD Order no. This is the order for which you have made goods issue postings and confirmations in the previous units. If you have done the exercises in the previous units as described. The available quantity of 1000 L comes from the automatic goods receipt of the previous unit. / PO## 1000 4000 Tomorrow + 3 weeks PR-ORD Order no.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. The process order is not displayed in the stock/requirements list anymore due to the final delivery. Display the process order that is chronologically first from the stock/requirements list. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 3: 1.

Compare the tolerance data defined on this view with the data in your process order. 487 . 3. you can assign a value to the characteristics for the batch produced.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Underdelivery Overdelivery Unlimited overdelivery 3. Describe what these settings control in a tolerance check. After saving the goods receipt. Choose movement type 101. Which warning message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ 5. you will assign batch characteristic values in an in-process quality inspection. Deliver only half of the planned quantity. 4. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 4. 2. Task 5: 1. Display the header data of your order. The system proposes the quantity to be delivered according to the plan. Hint: In one of the following exercises. Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. Save your goods receipt posting. Enter a value within the valid value range defined for the material. Display the Work Scheduling view for your product T-FF9## in the material master record for plant 1100. Where do you make the settings for the tolerance check of an order? ______________________________________________________ 5. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Enter the number of your process order. Change the proposed quantity. Post a partial delivery of your product T-FF9## for the order.

Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Select movement type 101. 2005/Q2 . The system proposes the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. 3. 2. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the first two lines: MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity Task 6: 1. Post another partial delivery for your product T-FF9##. Order Settlement.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Enter the number of your process order. Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. Which new order status has been set with regard to the partial delivery? ______________________________________________________ 7. and Order Archiving SCM340 Write down the following: Total qty Delivered 6. Has the Delivery complete indicator been set? What does this indicator mean? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 8. All rights reserved. Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. Continued on next page 488 © 2006 SAP AG.

For this reason. After saving. Deliver only half of the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. Check whether the system has set the Delivery completed indicator. you set the Delivery completed indicator (D) when you enter the goods receipt. you do not expect any further deliveries. Save your goods receipt posting. 489 . In deviation from the plan. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Which warning message does the system issue? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ 4. the system again displays the values you have assigned to the batch characteristics in Task 5 step 4. Which new order status has been set with regard to the second delivery? ______________________________________________________ 6. Write down the following: Total qty Delivered 5. Display the header data of your order.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Change the proposed quantity. ______________________________________________________ 7. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen.

Display the costs incurred by the order.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. The total of the remaining quantity and the quantity still to be delivered is 20 L greater than the planned quantity to be produced. Write down the following: Material GMov Mat. 4. 2. MvT SLoc Batch Continued on next page 490 © 2006 SAP AG. Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. 3. Which setting determines that an overdelivery is allowed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 5. Post another delivery for your product T-FF9##. Enter the number of your process order. Order Settlement. doc. The system proposes the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ 7. Save your goods receipt posting. Choose layout /SCM340 in the order information system. Increase the proposed quantity by 20 L. Display the header data of your order. An enormous remaining quantity is available in your production line. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Write down the following: Total qty Delivered 6. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 7: 1. Display the goods movement list in the process order. Select movement type 101.

Enter Today +2 months as the basic start date. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating goods receipt posting using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the master recipe T-RC9#. GMov Mat. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Some of the process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FX. Task 9: 1. 2. You must maintain the process instruction for the goods receipt directly in the recipe. On the process instruction overview. 491 . 3. doc. Therefore. Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FX. Task 8: Goods receipt posting using process messages (tasks 8 to 13) 1. Enter 1000 L as the quantity to be produced.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Material 8. recipe 10. Save your recipe. we want you to post the goods receipt and at the same time make activity confirmations in the PI sheet. 3. MvT SLoc Batch Display the stock overview for material T-FF9##. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. make the following changes in your master recipe: 2. add process instruction category FE_PROD as item 20 of phase 220. In this scenario. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Display the stock overview for material T-FF9##. Task 11: 1. 5. goods issues (PI_CONS). Send the messages. you can report the quantity of the fertilizer produced. Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor. In the last phase. Task 13: 1. the messages on the activities (PI_PHCON). Display the goods movement list in the process order. 2. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 10: 1. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PROD that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. Display the header data of your order. Check whether the system has set the Delivery completed indicator. Write down the following: Total qty Delivered 3. Order Settlement.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 6. © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . and good receipt (PI_PROD) are transferred to the message monitor. Display the costs incurred by the order. Display the process order. Task 12: 1. 7. Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. Find and maintain the PI sheet. ______________________________________________________ 492 4. By executing your signature at the end of the PI sheet.

Display the stock overview for your product T-FF9##. 493 . Task 2: Manual goods receipt postings (tasks 2 to 7) 1. Which options do you have to post goods receipts for process orders? Which business transactions are triggered by a goods receipt posting? Notes: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on goods receipt.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Solution 35: Goods Receipt Task 1: 1. The process order is not displayed in the stock/requirements list anymore due to the final delivery. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. see the page “Goods Receipt” in your participant handbook. The available quantity of 1000 L comes from the automatic goods receipt of the previous unit. All rights reserved. What stock quantities are available? ___________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-FF9## Program → Execute or choose Execute There should be a stock of 1000 L available for material T-FF9##.

/ PO## 1000 6000 1000 Hint: In the following exercises. / PO## 1000 3000 Tomorrow + 2 weeks PR-ORD Order no. Order Settlement.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. If you have done the exercises in the previous units as described. a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FF9## Plant: 1100 Enter Continued on next page 494 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. / PO## 1000 5000 Tomorrow + 4 weeks PR-ORD Order no. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 3: 1. / PO## 1000 4000 Tomorrow + 3 weeks PR-ORD Order no. The available quantity of 1000 L comes from the automatic goods receipt of the previous unit. All rights reserved. The process order is not displayed in the stock/requirements list anymore due to the final delivery. the following data should be displayed: T-FF9## Date MRP element MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity Today STOCK Tomorrow PR-ORD Order no. / PO## 1000 2000 Tomorrow + 1 week PR-ORD Order no. only the process order that is chronologically first will be taken into account. 2005/Q2 . This is the order for which you have made goods issue postings and confirmations in the previous units.

Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. On the order header. Which settings have been made with regard to the delivery tolerances of a goods receipt for the order? Underdelivery Overdelivery Unlimited overdelivery a) 3. Display the process order that is chronologically first from the stock/requirements list. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) 2. Underdelivery 0 Overdelivery 0 Unlimited overdelivery X Describe what these settings control in a tolerance check. Where do you make the settings for the tolerance check of an order? ______________________________________________________ a) 5. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) For information on these settings. In addition. The settings for the tolerance check are defined on the Work Scheduling view of the material master record. Position the cursor on the process order that is chronologically first and choose the Display element icon. All rights reserved. 495 . see the page “„Underdelivery and Overdelivery” in your participant handbook. choose the Goods receipt tab. use the field help (F1) for information on the relevant fields.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Task 4: 1. 4. Display the Work Scheduling view for your product T-FF9## in the material master record for plant 1100.

Choose movement type 101. Enter Underdely tol. Deliver only half of the planned quantity. a) Movement type: 101 Order number (of the order that is chronologically first): Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0001 3. and Order Archiving SCM340 Compare the tolerance data defined on this view with the data in your process order. Enter the number of your process order. Enter Go to plant 1100. Change the proposed quantity. Continued on next page 496 © 2006 SAP AG. 0 Overdely. Order Settlement. a) Logistics → Production . 0 Unltd overdel. The system proposes the quantity to be delivered according to the plan. (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Post Material to Stock Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. Post a partial delivery of your product T-FF9## for the order.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-FF9## Enter Choose Work Scheduling. All rights reserved. a) 2. tol. 2005/Q2 . X Task 5: 1.Unit 8: Goods Receipt.

Choose Enter to confirm the warning. After saving the goods receipt. Enter a value within the valid value range defined for the material. you can assign a value to the characteristics for the batch produced.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Save your goods receipt posting. 5. The Goods Receipt for Order: Selection Screen appears. You can assign a value to the characteristics for the batch produced. The system posts the goods receipt. 497 . a) Choose Enter. Change the proposed quantity. Which warning message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ a) The Goods Receipt for Order: Classification screen appears.. The system proposes the quantity to be delivered according to the plan (1000 L). you will assign batch characteristic values in an in-process quality inspection. Enter a value within the valid value range defined for the material and choose Back. Display the header data of your order. All rights reserved. 4. Deliver only half of the planned quantity (500 L). Write down the following: Total qty Delivered a) (…) Process Order → Display Total qty 1000 Delivered 500 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Hint: In one of the following exercises. The system issues the following warning message: Deficit of order quantity 500 L. Save your goods receipt posting.

For information on the Delivery completed indicator. PDLV Partially delivered Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. see the page “„Goods Receipt” in your participant handbook. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Write down the first two lines: Continued on next page 498 © 2006 SAP AG. Order Settlement. 8.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. SCM340 Which new order status has been set with regard to the partial delivery? ______________________________________________________ a) 7. and Order Archiving 6. Has the Delivery complete indicator been set? What does this indicator mean? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) Goods receipt tab page The Delivery completed indicator has not been set.

Movement Type: 101 Order: Order number Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0001 The system proposes the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 499 . MRP element MRP element data Rec.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt MRP element a) MRP element data Recpt/Reqd qty Available quantity (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FF9## Plant: 1100 The planned quantity of goods received has been reduced by the quantity delivered to stock. (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Post Material to Stock Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. a) 3. a) 2. / PO## 500 2 000 Task 6: 1. Post another partial delivery for your product T-FF9##. The plant stock has been increased by the quantity delivered to stock. Select movement type 101. Change the proposed quantity. Enter the number of your process order. qty Available quantity STOCK PR-ORD 1 500 Order no./reqd. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. Order Settlement. The system issues the following warning messages: Batch was already posted in stock Quantity is 250 L less than the order quantity The item is marked as Delivery completed Choose Enter to confirm the warnings.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. For this reason. you set the Delivery completed indicator (D) when you enter the goods receipt. and Order Archiving SCM340 Deliver only half of the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. Deliver only half of the quantity yet to be delivered according to the plan (250 L). The system posts the goods receipt. you do not expect any further deliveries. Choose Back. The system again displays the values you have assigned to the batch characteristics in Task 5 step 4. Which warning message does the system issue? ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________ a) The system proposes the quantity yet to be delivered according to the plan (500 L). In deviation from the plan. Display the header data of your order. the system again displays the values you have assigned to the batch characteristics in Task 5 step 4. Set the Delivery completed indicator: XE Save your goods receipt posting. 4. Change the proposed quantity. Save your goods receipt posting. After saving. Write down the following: Continued on next page 500 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) (…) → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FF9## Plant: 1100 Due to the Delivery completed indicator. The plant stock has been increased by the quantity delivered to stock. MRP element MRP element data Rec. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. ______________________________________________________ a) Goods receipt tab page The Delivery completed indicator has been set. Check whether the system has set the Delivery completed indicator. 7. qty STOCK Available qty 1 750 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Total qty Delivered a) 5. the process order has disappeared from the list. (…) Process Order → Display Total qty 1000 Delivered 750 Which new order status has been set with regard to the second delivery? ______________________________________________________ a) 6. 501 . DLV Delivered Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen./reqd.

Select the goods receipt item and save the goods receipt posting. Write down the following: Continued on next page 502 © 2006 SAP AG. The total of the remaining quantity and the quantity still to be delivered is 20 L greater than the planned quantity to be produced. a) 3. a) The system proposes the quantity yet to be delivered according to the plan (250 L). Increase the proposed quantity by 20 L. An enormous remaining quantity is available in your production line. The total of the remaining quantity and the quantity still to be delivered is 20 L greater than the planned quantity to be produced. 4. All rights reserved. The Unlimited indicator on the Goods Receipt header data screen determines that an overdelivery is allowed. 2005/Q2 . Select movement type 101. Increase the proposed quantity by 20 L (total = 270 L).Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Display the header data of your order. (…) → Process Order → Environment → Material Movement → Post Material to Stock Deliver the material to storage location 0001 of plant 1100. Movement type: 101 Order: Order number Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0001 The system proposes the quantity still to be delivered according to the plan. Post another delivery for your product T-FF9##. a) 2. Save your goods receipt posting. Enter the number of your process order. Order Settlement. Which setting determines that an overdelivery is allowed? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) 5. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 7: 1.

Write down the following: Material GMov Mat. All rights reserved. Display the goods movement list in the process order. 7. 503 . (…) Process Order → Display Total qty 1000 Delivered 1020 Display the costs incurred by the order. MvT SLoc Batch Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. doc.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Total qty Delivered a) 6. Choose layout /SCM340 in the order information system. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ a) Goto → Costs → Analysis Due to the material delivery of product T-FF9## the process order has been credited.

no.no. recipe 10. 261 0002 T-RF9## 1 Doc. 261 0002 T-RI5## 2 Doc. 261 0002 T-RF7## 1 Doc. we want you to post the goods receipt and at the same time make activity confirmations in the PI sheet. Order Settlement. doc. 8. 101 0001 Batch T-FF9## 4 Doc.no. Note: The following exercise aims at illustrating goods receipt posting using process messages by having you maintain a PI sheet with reference to the master recipe T-RC9#.no. 101 0001 Batch T-FF9## 4 Doc.no. choose Goto → Lists → Documented Goods Movements Choose layout /SCM340 in the order information system.no. 261 0002 Batch T-FF9## 4 Doc. MvT SLoc Batch T-RF7## 1 Doc. All rights reserved. doc. Continued on next page 504 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-FF9## Program → Execute Task 8: Goods receipt posting using process messages (tasks 8 to 13) 1. Material GMov Mat. and Order Archiving Material a) GMov SCM340 Mat. 2005/Q2 . In this scenario.no. MvT SLoc Batch On the order header. 101 0001 Batch Display the stock overview for material T-FF9##.no. 261 0002 T-RF9## 1 Doc.Unit 8: Goods Receipt.

add process instruction category FE_PROD as item 20 of phase 220. Save your recipe. Enter 1000 L as the quantity to be produced. Therefore.000 L Start: Today +2 months Enter Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter Today +2 months as the basic start date. Choose the Process instructions tab. Enter process instruction FE_PROD as item 20. a) 3. See description On the process instruction overview. All rights reserved. a) Logistics → Production Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total qty: 1. Save your recipe. Recipe: 10 2.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Some of the process instructions have been created for control recipe destination FX. 505 . make the following changes in your master recipe: a) Logistics → Production . Replace the control recipe destination assigned to all phases with the new destination FX. a) Double-click control phase number 220 on the operation overview.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe Group: T-RC9##. Task 9: 1. You must maintain the process instruction for the goods receipt directly in the recipe. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-FF9## in plant 1100.

Continued on next page 506 © 2006 SAP AG. By executing your signature at the end of the PI sheet. Make sure that the control recipe was automatically created after order creation. and good receipt (PI_PROD) are transferred to the message monitor.Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Task 12: 1. a) Logistics → Production . Find and maintain the PI sheet.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Go to the message monitor and analyze the messages of message category PI_PROD that were created while you maintained the PI sheet. Save the order and write down the order number: ______________________________________________________ a) See description Task 10: 1. Order Settlement. SCM340 The order status CRCR must have been set after order creation. goods issues (PI_CONS). a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Process order: Order number Task 11: 1. a) 3. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. and Order Archiving 2. In the last phase. you can report the quantity of the fertilizer produced. the messages on the activities (PI_PHCON). Send your control recipe in the control recipe monitor.

507 . ______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Goods receipt tab in the order header. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the following: Total qty Delivered a) 3. Send the messages. No instruction required Go to the Goods Receipt header data screen. The Process Message Monitor: Messages screen appears.Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Process Order: Order number Choose Enter. a) Logistics → Production . By double-clicking a message you can display the message characteristics. Goto → Costs → Analysis Display the goods movement list in the process order. a) 2. Task 13: 1. choose Goto → Lists → Documented goods movements. 4. a) On the order header. Check whether the system has set the Delivery completed indicator. Display the costs incurred by the order. Display the process order. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Send the messages. a) 5. The Delivery completed indicator is set. (…) → Process Order → Display Display the header data of your order.

and Order Archiving 6.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Display the stock/requirements list for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Order Settlement. All rights reserved. a) Logistics → Production .Process → Process Order → Environment → Stock/Requirements List Material: T-FF9## Plant: 1100 Enter 508 © 2006 SAP AG. a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Environment → Stock → Stock Overview Material: T-FF9## Program → Execute 7. SCM340 Display the stock overview for material T-FF9##. 2005/Q2 .

509 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Goods Receipt Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders using process messages from within the PI sheet 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

This credit to the order is an internal activity of Controlling. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. © 2006 SAP AG. it must have the status Delivered. the order must be exempted of actual costs (debits) so that the order can later be deleted. Order settlement is a prerequisite for order archiving and deletion.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. This function is usually executed monthly with a background job. It is executed using the Settlement function. Order Closing: Order Settlement Figure 95: Order Closing: Order Settlement Order-related cost object controlling • • 510 To be able to settle a process order. Order Settlement. and Order Archiving SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the principle of order settlement. you will be able to: • Settle a process order and describe the general principle of order settlement Business Example After you post a goods receipt.

The settlement type is used to determine whether all costs incurred by the order are settled (total settlement) or whether periodic settlement is to be carried out for the order. you determine which object is used for settling the actual costs of the process order. All rights reserved. The settlement rule covers one or several distribution rules for the process order. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a settlement share. and a settlement type. The distribution rule consists of a settlement receiver. the sales order is automatically defined as the settlement receiver. 511 .SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Settlement Rules Figure 96: Settlement Rules The system automatically assigns a settlement rule to the process order during creation. you determine the percentage/equivalence number used to distribute the costs to individual settlement receivers. This assignment is carried out by a default rule defined in Customizing (order type-dependent parameters). Through the settlement receiver. By means of the settlement share. For make-to-order production.

it is generally best to use standard price control. 512 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Order Settlement. 2005/Q2 . Order settlement credits the order. and Order Archiving SCM340 Cost Debit / Credit (Order-Related COC) Figure 97: Cost Debit / Credit (Order-Related COC) The manner in which a process order is credited and debited depends on the variant of cost object controlling (COC) selected in Controlling. It is controlled via a settlement profile. Both order-related and product-related cost object controlling is possible. Settlement is usually periodic. All rights reserved. It makes sense to use order-related COC for the following: • • • • • • Flexible production environment Flexible product range Cost management of individual production lots If cost controlling is required for each order High setup costs Manufacture of co-products For in-house production of materials.

The process order also does not have any costs or any settlement rule in this case. In this case. All rights reserved. It makes sense to use product-related COC for the following: Make-to-stock production Repetitive manufacturing and mass manufacturing Sales order controlling only in profitability analysis 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. there is no order settlement for the individual process order. 513 .SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Cost Debit / Credit (Product-Related COC) Figure 98: Cost Debit / Credit (Product-Related COC) Settlement is period-oriented based on the costs of the product cost collector.

.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. All rights reserved. and Order Archiving SCM340 514 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Order Settlement.

As a result of which business transactions did the system debit the order with actual costs? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ As a result of which business transaction did the system credit the order? ______________________________________________________ 4. It is executed using the “Settlement” function. Task 1: 1. the relevant process order must be exempted of actual costs (debits) so that the order can later be deleted. You should be aware. 515 . Display the settlement rule for the process order. 2. that this function is to be executed before the orders are deleted. the process order for material T-FF9## that you last processed in the previous topic on goods receipts. you will be able to: • Settle a process order and analyze the settlement result Business Example After a goods receipt was posted for a material. This function is usually executed monthly in a background program. 3.SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Exercise 36: Order Settlement Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. you do not have to execute any activities here. Display the costs incurred by the order. however. As the production scheduler or foreman. To which settlement receiver are the process order costs assigned during the settlement procedure? ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Hint: You have written down the order number from the relevant exercise. for example. Display. This credit to the process order is an internal activity of Controlling. All rights reserved.

Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Order Settlement. Sender: __________________________________________________ Receiver: __________________________________________________ 4. Write down the following: Price control Moving price Standard price Total stock Total value Task 3: 1. 2. 2. Display the Accounting 1 view of the material master record for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Display the detail list for settlement and write down the settlement sender and settlement receiver. 3. Display the detail data about the sender and receiver. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 2: 1. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. Your plant 1100 is assigned to controlling area 1000. Enter the number of the present month (for example. Settle your process order in individual processing. 8 for August) as the settlement period and the present year as the fiscal year. Write down the following: Sender: Cost element Value/CAC Continued on next page 516 © 2006 SAP AG.

Display the list of the accounting documents generated. The amount settled is posted to a price difference account. 517 . Display the Accounting 1 view of the material master record for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. 5. Only select your documents for the current creation date. Write down the following: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Describe how order settlement affected the order costs: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 5: 1. and settlement (SA). goods receipts (WE). 6. 2. All rights reserved. Display the accounting document in financial accounting. Exit the order settlement. Display the accounting document. Task 4: 1. Display the costs incurred by your process order. You find documents for goods issues (document type WA).SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement * Receiver Value/CAC Cost element Display the detail data for individual debits (cost elements).

and Order Archiving SCM340 Price control Moving average price Standard price Total stock Total value 3.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. All rights reserved. Why did order settlement not affect the total value of the material stock? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ 518 © 2006 SAP AG. Order Settlement. 2005/Q2 .

Goto → Costs → Analysis As a result of which business transactions did the system debit the order with actual costs? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ As a result of which business transaction did the system credit the order? ______________________________________________________ a) As a result of the material withdrawals and confirmations the order was debited with the corresponding material costs and production costs. Display the settlement rule for the process order. To which settlement receiver are the process order costs assigned during the settlement procedure? ______________________________________________________ a) On the order header. a) 3. a) Logistics → Production . for example. All rights reserved. Hint: You have written down the order number from the relevant exercise. In our example (make-to-stock production). 519 . Display. the order was credited. the order costs have been fully settled to material T-FF9##. the process order for material T-FF9## that you last processed in the previous topic on goods receipts. choose Header → Settlement rule.SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Solution 36: Order Settlement Task 1: 1. 4. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the costs incurred by the order.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number 2. When the batch you produced was delivered to stock.

Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-FF9## Enter Go to the Accounting 1 view. a) Logistics → Production . 2005/Q2 . Settle your process order in individual processing. Continued on next page 520 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the following: Price control Moving price Standard price Total stock Total value a) Price control S Moving price Moving price Standard price Standard price Total stock Stock Total value Stock quantity * standard price Task 3: 1. Order Settlement.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. (…) → Process Order → Period-End Closing → Settlement → Individual Processing Your plant 1100 is assigned to controlling area 1000. a) 2. Enter 2. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 2: 1. All rights reserved. Display the Accounting 1 view of the material master record for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Enter Choose plant 1100.

8 for August) as the settlement period and the present year as the fiscal year. Sender: __________________________________________________ Receiver: __________________________________________________ a) The Actual Settlement Order Basic List screen appears. Choose the Detail lists icon. a) Controlling area: 1000 Order: Order number Settlement period: Current month number Fiscal year: Current year Processing type: Automatic Process control: No test run Settlement → Execute or choose Execute 3. liquid. Display the detail data about the sender and receiver. 521 . The Actual Settlement Order Detail List screen appears. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement Enter the number of the present month (for example. Sender: ORD Order number Fertilizer. Display the detail list for settlement and write down the settlement sender and settlement receiver. form SX Receiver: MAT 1100/T-FF9## 4. Write down the following: Sender: Cost element Value/CAC * Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

The Actual Settlement Order Debit Receiver screen appears. 6.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. All rights reserved. Display the accounting document in financial accounting. The Actual Settlement Order Debit Sender screen appears. 2005/Q2 . a) To display the detail data about the sender. The amount settled is posted to a price difference account. a) On the Actual Settlement Order Detail List screen. choose Accounting documents. You can display details for individual debits (= cost elements) by positioning the cursor on a table line and choosing the Choose detail icon. position the cursor on the corresponding line in the list and choose Sender. Only select your documents for the current creation date. To display the detail data about the receiver. Order Settlement. choose Accounting documents. Display the accounting document. 5. Exit the order settlement. and Order Archiving Receiver Value/CAC SCM340 Cost element Display the detail data for individual debits (cost elements). On the List of Documents in Accounting screen. Continued on next page 522 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the list of the accounting documents generated. position the cursor on the corresponding line in the list and choose Receiver.

Describe how order settlement affected the order costs: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) (…) Process Order → Display Goto → Costs → Analysis After order settlement. Choose Document List. a) Accounting → Financial Accounting → General Ledger → Document → Display The Display Document: Initial Screen appears. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. the process order is completely credited. Display the costs incurred by your process order. 523 . Company code: 1000 Entry date: Today X Own documents only Execute icon. goods receipts (WE). Task 4: 1. Its balance is 0. and settlement (SA).SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement You find documents for goods issues (document type WA). The Document List screen appears.

Price control S Moving average price New price after settlement Standard price Standard price Total stock Stock Total value Stock quantity * standard price Why did order settlement not affect the total value of the material stock? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ Continued on next page 524 © 2006 SAP AG. Order Settlement. Enter Go to plant 1100. Enter 2.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. Display the Accounting 1 view of the material master record for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. and Order Archiving SCM340 Task 5: 1. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Write down the following: Price control Moving average price Standard price Total stock Total value a) 3. a) Logistics → Production .Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-FF9## Enter Go to the Accounting 1 view.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 525 . All rights reserved. the inventory valuation is carried out according to the standard price.SCM340 Lesson: Order Settlement ______________________________________________________ a) Due to price control S. The standard price is not changed by a settlement. The settlement results are taken into account in the moving average price.

Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. Order Settlement. and Order Archiving SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Settle a process order and describe the general principle of order settlement 526 © 2006 SAP AG.

you will get an overview of the process and requirements for order reorganization.SCM340 Lesson: Archiving and Deleting Lesson: Archiving and Deleting Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the general process of order reorganization. 527 . He or she usually starts several background jobs per month for this purpose. you will be able to: • Describe the process of process order reorganization Business Example Process orders whose processing was completed in your area (goods receipt posted) must be archived and deleted after a period defined in Customizing. to ensure that the database volume is limited and does not go on increasing over time. In this unit. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. When setting up the system for production in compliance with GMP. you can also define that as a prerequisite for order archiving and deletion a batch record must be created and approved. All rights reserved. Order Closing: Archiving and Deleting Figure 99: Order Closing: Archiving and Deleting The process order must be settled before it can be archived and deleted. The system administrator in your company archives and deletes process orders. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.

528 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 2005/Q2 . This enables you to use various different archiving systems. and Order Archiving SCM340 Reorganization: Procedure Figure 100: Reorganization: Procedure The reorganization of orders in the ECC System comprises the following stages: • • • • Activating the deletion flag in the order Activating the deletion indicator in the order Execution of an archiving run Execution of a deletion run The physical deletion/archiving takes place after some requirements have been checked. Order Settlement. You can delete orders individually or in mass deletion. The deletion and archiving functions for the process order use the central ECC System archiving tools. You can use the retrieval function to display archived and deleted orders in the ECC System. In archive administration. you can create and display an index list of archived process orders.

using a background report). • • Prerequisite: The order is delivered or technically completed. it must have the status Delivered (DLV) or Technically completed (TABG). • • Prerequisite: The deletion flag must be set. Once the deletion indicator has been set. cost balance = 0. All rights reserved. To be able to settle a process order. 529 . there are no payables or Future change records from confirmations. © 2006 SAP AG. you can no longer change the order. the data is deleted in the ECC System. When the files have been transferred successfully. the batch record for the order must also be archived (status BRAR Batch record archived). • • If production is in compliance with GMP.SCM340 Lesson: Archiving and Deleting Archiving and Deleting: Prerequisites Figure 101: Archiving and Deleting: Prerequisites You can only archive an order if you have activated the deletion flag manually or automatically (that is. The deletion flag can be removed. Once a first residence time is over. After a second residence time has passed. the orders are taken from the corresponding files in the ECC System and are transferred to the respective operating system. the deletion indicator is activated for orders marked for deletion in a background job. • 2005/Q2 Prerequisite: The deletion indicator must be set.

and Order Archiving SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the process of process order reorganization 530 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 8: Goods Receipt. 2005/Q2 . Order Settlement. All rights reserved.

531 .SCM340 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders manually using the corresponding ECC transactions • Perform goods receipt postings for process orders using process messages from within the PI sheet • Settle a process order and describe the general principle of order settlement • Describe the process of process order reorganization 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2 .Unit Summary 532 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Name the two variants of cost object controlling for order-related production. All rights reserved.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. © 2006 SAP AG. How can you make goods receipt postings for process orders? 2. 3. 533 . Name the prerequisites for being able to archive an order.

How can you make goods receipt postings for process orders? Answer: You can post goods receipts manually by using Inventory Management transactions or by sending process messages from the PI sheet or a process control system. All rights reserved.Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. 2. You can also post a goods receipt automatically during confirmation. 2005/Q2 . Answer: • • 3. Order-related cost object controlling Product-related cost object controlling Name the prerequisites for being able to archive an order. Name the two variants of cost object controlling for order-related production. Answer: • • • 534 Status DLV (delivered) or TECO (technically complete) Cost balance = 0 (order settlement) Production in compliance with GMP: status BRAR (batch record archived) © 2006 SAP AG.

Unit 9 Principle of Process Management (II) Unit Overview Topics: • • • • • Process instructions. you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Name the functions of process management Name the alternative maintenance options for process instructions Describe the relationship between process instructions. 535 . control recipes. and process messages Describe how a control recipe is created from process instructions Describe how the information of process instructions is displayed in a PI sheet Describe how process messages are created Name the message destination types that are available Name the most important predefined message categories in the standard system Describe the principle of how control recipes can be transferred to a process control system Name the process instruction types available for communicating with process control systems and explain their functions Describe typical scenarios for the data exchange between the ECC System and a process control system Name the important elements and functions of the PI sheet Explain the principle of the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface Name the predefined services in the environment of PP-PI © 2006 SAP AG. control recipes. All rights reserved. and process messages Link to process control systems Elements of PI sheets Manufacturing data access SAP OPC data access (SAP ODA) Unit Objectives After completing this unit.

.............. Control Recipes...................... 611 Lesson: SAP OPC Data Access .........540 Exercise 37: Process Instructions............ and Process Messages ...... Unit Contents Lesson: Process Management ............... 2005/Q2 ................595 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets.........................600 Lesson: Manufacturing Data Access ...............................................537 Lesson: Process Instructions.................................................................................. Control Recipes.............. All rights reserved.... and Process Messages...Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) • SCM340 Explain the basic concepts of OPC and SAP ODA..Overview .......................................614 536 © 2006 SAP AG................553 Lesson: Link to Process Control Systems ..........................

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.SCM340 Lesson: Process Management . 537 .Overview Lesson Overview This lesson gives you an overview of the process management functions. All rights reserved. Process Management Figure 102: Process Management 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You will first get an overview of the functions of process management.Overview Lesson: Process Management . you will be able to: • Name the functions of process management Business Example You want to use process management to represent certain processes of process manufacturing.

All rights reserved. and sending process messages with actual process data from the PI sheet or the process control system. it can be linked to fully automated. . The process instructions define. and manually operated lines. for example. Reading and writing data points and events with the function SAP OPC Data Access (SAP ODA) using the OPC server of the ECC System. 2005/Q2 . Due to its flexible structure. Process management includes the following functions: • Communication with the process control level using the PI-PCS interface or using PI sheets: – • Receiving control recipes with process instructions from released process orders. partially automated. © 2006 SAP AG. Reading using the function automatic creation of process messages. checking. – Automatic processing: Transferring control recipes to process control systems. – Manual processing: Displaying control recipes in natural language in the form of PI sheets that can be displayed and maintained on the screen by the process operator. Data is exchanged from the external System using the PI-PCS interface. – Receiving. – – 538 Reading and writing with a PI Sheet. the process steps to be executed and the process data to be confirmed (using process messages) in detail.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Process management is the interface between PP-PI and the systems involved in process control. Data is exchanged using the PI-PCS interface.

All rights reserved.Overview Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the functions of process management 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Management . 539 .

2005/Q2 . Control Recipes. All rights reserved. Alternatives for Process Instruction Maintenance Alternative 1 (all releases) • • • • 540 Presetting process instruction types in Customizing Maintaining process instructions on the basis of copied process instruction types for the phases of the recipe / process order Assigning the control recipe destinations to the phases Defining process instructions to be generated for the control recipe destinations in Customizing © 2006 SAP AG. you will be able to: • • • • • • • Name the alternative maintenance options for process instructions Describe the relationship between process instructions.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. you must familiarize yourself with the alternative maintenance options for process instructions and the connectivity of process instructions. control recipes and process messages. and process messages Describe how a control recipe is created from process instructions Describe how the information of process instructions is displayed in a PI sheet Describe how process messages are created Name the message destination types that are available Name the most important predefined message categories in the standard system Business Example To be able to use the process management for controlling process manufacturing. control recipes. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. and Process Messages Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the connectivity of process instructions. control recipes and process messages.

The process management groups the process instructions to control recipes and transfers these to the control recipe destinations that are stored in the process order. All rights reserved.00) • • • Maintaining all process instructions in XSteps (execution steps) in the XStep Editor of the recipe / process order Option to copy or reference standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository Option to copy or reference standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 1 Figure 103: Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 1 Process instructions are structures used to transfer data or instructions from ECC process manufacturing to process control. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Control recipes contain all the information that process control needs to execute a process order.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. and Process Messages Alternative 2 (from SAP ECC ERP and SCM Extension 2. The system creates one control recipe for each control recipe destination of a process order. 541 . Control Recipes. Users define process instructions according to the target system requirements. and to the control recipe destinations (in Customizing). They are assigned to the phases of the master recipe or process order.

00).00 (EA_APPL_2. All rights reserved. the control recipe is displayed in natural language in the form of a PI sheet that can be maintained by the process operator. A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available. 2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 You can create control recipes for the following destination types: • • • Process control systems in automated production lines Process operators in manually operated production lines In the second case. Example Scenario for Alternative 1 • • • 542 Maintaining process instructions Generating process instructions PI sheet © 2006 SAP AG. Using XSteps enables you to maintain process instructions in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. the data for the process management can alternatively be maintained in the form of XSteps (execution steps). Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 2 Figure 104: Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 2 Alternative 2: Maintaining process instructions for XSteps • From SAP R/3 ERP and SCM Extension 2.

form SX. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Control Recipes. regardless of a particular production process or master recipe. the process instructions are generated in the specified positions of the control recipe. Process instructions that are specific to the control recipe destination and are always required in certain positions of a control recipe or PI sheet. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. When you create the control recipe. It contains a process-specific instruction text for the PI sheet. The control recipe destination FE is assigned to the phases of the recipe. liquid. and Process Messages Maintaining Process Instructions: Example Scenario 1: Figure 105: Maintaining Process Instructions: Example Scenario 1: This example shows the process instructions for the master recipe Fertilizer. are maintained for the control recipe destination (in Customizing). 543 . Process instruction INSTR has been defined for the first phase 110. Process instructions that are specific to the production process of the fertilizer are maintained for the phases of the recipe.

Note: • • 544 In this example. the system generated the process instructions defined for the control recipe destination at the specified positions. Take a look at the first phase 110 of the order. the system did not generate the process instruction SEQDEF because the phase did not have a preceding phase. In addition to the process instruction INSTR from the recipe. form SX.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Generating Process Instructions: Example Scenario 1 Figure 106: Generating Process Instructions: Example Scenario 1 This example shows a process order that was created based on the master recipe Fertilizer. liquid. © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . The system generated the process instruction FE_CONS twice because two material components are assigned to phase 110. All rights reserved. The order was released and the control recipe was created.

and Process Messages PI Sheet: Example Scenario 1 Figure 107: PI Sheet: Example Scenario 1 The graphic shows the PI sheet for the process instructions in phase 110 of the process order. The process instructions FE_PHSTS and FE_PHSTE each create an input field for executing a signature. Example Scenario for Alternative 2 (XSteps) • • • 2005/Q2 Maintaining XSteps Generating XSteps PI sheet © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Control Recipes. The process instructions FE_CONS create input fields to confirm the charged material component quantities. The process instruction INSTR creates the control instruction with a safety note.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. 545 . The process instruction PHTEXT creates the short text in phase 110.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Maintaining XSteps: Example Scenario 2 Figure 108: Maintaining XSteps: Example Scenario 2 Generating XSteps: Example Scenario 2 Figure 109: Generating XSteps: Example Scenario 2 546 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. the system creates a process message that reports the start of phase 110 to the process order. 547 . All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Control Recipes. and Process Messages PI Sheet: Example Scenario 2 Figure 110: PI Sheet: Example Scenario 2 Generating Process Messages: Scenarios 1 & 2 Figure 111: Generating Process Messages: Scenarios 1 & 2 When you enter a signature at the phase start.

2005/Q2 . Generating Process Messages: Scenarios 1 & 2 Figure 112: Generating Process Messages: Scenarios 1 & 2 The graphic shows process message creation using the actual quantity recording of material T-RF700 as an example. When you enter the charged actual quantity. When creating the PI sheet. the system creates a process message that reports the end of phase 110 to the process order. This would be the Goods issue posting function module in our example. The message contains the order number. the material number. material number. charged material quantity. and the unit of measure. When you enter a signature at the phase end.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 When you enter the charged actual quantity. the system automatically records the date and time. the process message data is complete. When you enter the actual quantity. date and time. 548 © 2006 SAP AG. The message can then be sent to the appropriate message destination. the system determines the order number. the system creates a process message that triggers a material consumption posting in inventory management. All rights reserved. and the unit of measure.

549 . You can. for example: • • • • • ECC function module User of the SAPoffice mail system ABAP tables defined by the user External functions (such as a process control system) An alert category of the SAP Alert Management System The standard system contains predefined message destinations of the type ECC function module.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. They can be sent to the following destination types. Control Recipes. use these destinations to: • • • • 2005/Q2 Update the control recipe status Report time events for the phases of an order Post goods movements Report inspection results to QM © 2006 SAP AG. for example. All rights reserved. and Process Messages Types of Message Destinations Figure 113: Types of Message Destinations Process messages can be sent to one or more destinations for further processing.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Message Categories in the Standard System (I) Figure 114: Message Categories in the Standard System (I) The standard system contains a number of predefined message categories enabling you to transfer actual data from process control to the ECC System. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . You can use these message categories for the following functions: • • • • • • 550 Updating the control recipe status and the corresponding order status Confirming time events Confirming activities Posting a goods issue for the order Posting a goods receipt for the order Reporting summarized measurement results to QM as inspection results © 2006 SAP AG.

551 . and Process Messages Message Categories in the Standard System (II) Figure 115: Message Categories in the Standard System (II) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Control Recipes. All rights reserved.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 552 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. .

For each of the maintenance options. you examine one example scenario as follows: You will analyze the assignment and maintenance of process instructions for a master recipe. you will be able to: • Name the two alternative maintenance options for process instructions • Describe for each maintenance option how a control recipe is created in a process order • Describe for each maintenance option how the information of process instructions is displayed in a PI sheet • Describe how process messages are created • Name the message destination types that are available • Name important predefined message categories in the standard system Business Example You will become familiar with the two alternative maintenance options for process instructions. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 1: 1. Control Recipes. You will then analyze the process messages that the system created while you maintained the PI sheet. you will analyze the process instructions that are automatically generated when the control recipe is created. 553 . and Process Messages Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. You will maintain the PI sheet. You will create a process order that is based on this master recipe and have another look at the process instructions. and Process Messages Exercise 37: Process Instructions. In particular. You will name and describe the two alternative maintenance options for process instructions. All rights reserved. You will compare the objects in the PI sheet with the process instructions in the process order. Control Recipes.

To which destination types can you send control recipes? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 554 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. To which objects can you assign process instructions in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 3: 1. Describe the function and maintenance of process instructions with reference to maintenance alternative 1 described in your participant handbook. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Describe the function of control recipes.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: Alternative 1: Maintaining process instructions in the process instruction overview and for the control recipe destination (exercises 2 to 18) Preparations: Define control recipe destination FE for all phases of your recipe T-RC9##. recipe 10. How do you create control recipes? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 4: 1.

Which control recipe destination has been assigned to the phases? _____________________________________________________ 3. Write down the destination type. 555 . _____________________________________________________ Write down the information displayed about the process instructions in the following table: InstCat Item Description Sequence GenScope Filter Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. PI type Type Description Display the process instructions that have been assigned to control recipe destination FE and are automatically generated by the system. 2. Control Recipes. and Process Messages Task 5: 1. Display the master recipe of recipe group T-RC9##.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. recipe 10. Go to the process instruction overview of phase 110 and write down which process instruction has been assigned to the phase. PI 4.

the system releases the order immediately and creates the control recipe. Display the process instruction overview for phase 110. All rights reserved. Save the order and write down the order number. 2.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) InstCat Item SCM340 Description Sequence GenScope Filter Task 6: 1. of PI ProcInstCat Object type Description Continued on next page 556 © 2006 SAP AG. Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. 2005/Q2 . As a result of the production scheduling profile in the material master record. Display your process order. ___________________________________________________________ Task 7: 1. Write down which process instructions are assigned to the phase in the following table: No. Enter 1000 L as the quantity you want to produce and choose today as the order start date. Use process order type PO##.

Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor and send it. Try to find out how the process instructions of phase 110 in the process order are related to the various elements in the PI sheet. ProcInstCat Object type Description Interpret the result of the previous task. and Process Messages No. 2. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Task 8: 1. 557 . Look at the information and input fields displayed for phase 110 in the PI sheet. ProcInstCat In the PI sheet PHTEXT FE_PHSTS INSTR FE_CONS Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Call up the PI sheet that was created by sending the control recipe in the change mode. To do so. of PI 3. Control Recipes. All rights reserved. compare the process instructions in the process order with the process instructions assigned to the master recipe T-RC9## and those assigned to control recipe destination FE.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Task 9: 1.

Go to the process instruction overview for phase 110. Go to the process instruction assistant for the four process instructions of types FE_PHSTS. 2005/Q2 . You can use the F4 input help to determine the name of the input characteristic. Task 10: 1. The input characteristic is assigned to the process instruction characteristic PPPI_REQUESTED_VALUE. . Process Message Category 3.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) ProcInstCat SCM340 In the PI sheet FE_CONS FE_PHSTE 3. All rights reserved. select the process messages that were created when you maintained the first process steps in the PI sheet. Display your process order. Write down the following information for the process instructions: a) The process message category that each of them requests b) The input field defined for each of them in the process instruction Solution approach: Process instructions with the process instruction characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_CATEGORY are used to request process messages. Maintain phase 110 in your PI sheet. FE_CONS and FE_PHSTE that are allocated to the phase. Exit the PI sheet. In the message monitor. Continued on next page 558 © 2006 SAP AG. The text of the input characteristic is assigned to the process instruction characteristic PPPI_INPUT_REQUEST. select the process messages that were created when you maintained the first process steps in the PI sheet. . Write down the messages that were created. 2. In the message monitor.

Control Recipes. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 12: 1. of PI PI type Message category Input characteristic Description 4. To do so. and Process Messages No. compare the process messages created so far with the input fields that you have maintained for phase 110 in the PI sheet. 0000 FE_PHSTS 9999 FE_CONS 9999 FE_CONS 9999 FE_PHSTE Text Interpret the result of the previous tasks. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Task 11: 1. Which process messages are contained in the standard system and which functions do they have? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 559 . Write down the destination types to which you can send process messages.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. All rights reserved.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 13: 1. display the characteristics for the four process messages that the system created. In the message monitor. Write down the characteristic values. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value Continued on next page 560 © 2006 SAP AG.

Display your process order. Write down the confirmed quantities for phase 110. Write down the statuses of phase 110. _____________________________________________________ 3. All rights reserved. _____________________________________________________ 5. Control Recipes. 2. 561 . and Process Messages Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value Task 14: 1. _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the confirmed dates for phase 110. Write down the quantities withdrawn for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. _____________________________________________________ 4.

Write down the statuses of phase 110. Task 16: 1. Send the first three messages in the message monitor (PI_PHST. Send the fourth message in the message monitor (PI_PHST). _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. Continued on next page 562 © 2006 SAP AG. Compare the quantities with the characteristic values of the corresponding process messages. Display your process order. Write down the confirmed start date for phase 110. All rights reserved.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Task 15: 1. Compare the confirmed date and time with the characteristic values of the corresponding process message. Write down the quantities withdrawn for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##. 2005/Q2 . 2. PI_CONS. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Task 17: 1. PI_CONS). _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 5. Write down the confirmed quantities for phase 110. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 4.

All rights reserved. How did the system calculate this activity? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Task 19: Alternative 2: Maintenance of process instructions in XSteps (exercises 19 to 26) 1. 2.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Control Recipes. Display your process order. Write down the confirmed activity for phase 110. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 4. 563 . _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. and Process Messages Task 18: 1. To which objects are process instructions assigned in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the statuses of phase 110. Describe the principle of the maintenance of process instructions with reference to maintenance alternative 2 described in your participant handbook. Compare the confirmed date and time with the characteristic values of the corresponding process message. Write down the finish date for phase 110.

How do you create control recipes in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 21: 1. 5. and how does the setting selected influence the maintenance option for process instructions? Use the F1 help for the field Process instruction maintenance to answer the question. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 4. Write down the following for the XStep tree: Description: _________________________________________ Continued on next page 564 © 2006 SAP AG. in the change mode. Process instruction maintenance: __________________________________ What does this profile parameter define. Can control recipe destinations be maintained for the phases? _____________________________________________________ Can process instructions be assigned to the phases? _____________________________________________________ 3. Display the profile of the recipe. Go into the master recipe of the recipe group T-RCX9##. 2005/Q2 . recipe 10. Navigate to the XStep Editor of your recipe.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Task 20: 1. Write down the profile setting for the process instruction maintenance. 2. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. and Process Messages Application context: ___________________________________ Receiver: _________________________________________ 6. Write down the following information for the XSteps of the XStep tree: XStep description 7. Control Recipes. and which were assigned as references to standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository? Standard XSteps: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ XSteps created in the recipe: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Application context Generation Which of the above XSteps were created in the recipe.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. 565 .

Use process order type PO##. You will find the standard XSteps used in your master recipe. Save the order and write down the order number. SCM340 The process instructions for the XSteps created in the recipe are maintained in the recipe. Immediately after the order is created. Describe which process instruction is created with which elements for the XStep control instruction with a safety note. All rights reserved. Simulate the PI sheet. expand the folder Fertilizer production DE. 11. ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 566 © 2006 SAP AG. Try to analyze the structures and contents of these standard XSteps.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) 8. In the standard XStep repository. either use the menu path Xsteps -> Simulate or select and use the right-mouse button and select Simulate. the order is released and the control recipe created. The process instructions for the standard XSteps are maintained in the standard XStep repository. 10. Use the simulation if necessary. Manually select the production version XSEN to create the order. Description of the process instruction: _____________________________________________________ Elements of the process instruction _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 9. Task 22: 1. 2005/Q2 . Enter 1000 L as the quantity you want to produce and choose today as the order start date. Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Go into the standard XStep repository for plant 1100. Note: The explosion of the standard XStep references and the complete generation only occur in the process order.

. 1. Display the XSteps of the process order.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions.Analyze in which XSteps and in which process instructions of the process order the requirements of these process messages are defined. Task 26: 1.The standard XSteps were exploded . You can now carry out the following activities corresponding to the above exercises for scenario 1: .Process the PI sheet .Analyze the process messages that the system created while you maintained the PI sheet. All rights reserved. Display your process order. Try to find out how the XSteps of the process order are related to the various elements in the PI sheet. Task 24: 1. Look at the information and input fields displayed in the PI sheet.The generation was performed Try to analyze the structures and contents of some of these exploded and generated standard XSteps. Simulate the PI sheet. Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor and send it. 2. Task 25: Call up the PI sheet that was created by sending the control recipe in the change mode. 567 . Control Recipes. and Process Messages Task 23: 1. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Note that the following activities occurred when the control recipe was created: .

You will name and describe the two alternative maintenance options for process instructions. All rights reserved.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Solution 37: Process Instructions. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the maintenance options for process instructions. refer to the page Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 1 in your participant handbook. and Process Messages Task 1: 1. To which objects can you assign process instructions in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the process instructions. Describe the function and maintenance of process instructions with reference to maintenance alternative 1 described in your participant handbook. 1. Control Recipes. Task 2: Alternative 1: Maintaining process instructions in the process instruction overview and for the control recipe destination (exercises 2 to 18) Preparations: Define control recipe destination FE for all phases of your recipe T-RC9##. recipe 10. see the page Options for process instruction management in your participant handbook. Continued on next page 568 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

Task 5: 1. All rights reserved. a) Logistics → Production . 569 . Task 4: 1. refer to the page Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 1 in your participant handbook. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Describe the function of control recipes.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Control Recipes. Display the master recipe of recipe group T-RC9##. and Process Messages Task 3: 1. Go to the process instruction overview of phase 110 and write down which process instruction has been assigned to the phase. How do you create control recipes? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on control recipes. Which control recipe destination has been assigned to the phases? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Enter. The operation overview appears. Recipe: 10 2. recipe 10. The phases of the recipe are assigned Control recipe destination FE 3. To which destination types can you send control recipes? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on destination types. refer to the page Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 1 in your participant handbook.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Display Recipe Group: T-RC9##.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) PI a) SCM340 PI type Type Description Double-click phase number 110 and choose the Process instructions tab. _____________________________________________________ Write down the information displayed about the process instructions in the following table: InstCat Item Description Sequence GenScope Filter Continued on next page 570 © 2006 SAP AG. The following process instruction has been assigned to the phase: 4. 2005/Q2 . PI PI type Type Description 0010 INSTR 1 Control instruction with note Display the process instructions that have been assigned to control recipe destination FE and are automatically generated by the system. Write down the destination type. All rights reserved.

Type: 4 Transfer to browser-based PI sheet. All rights reserved. and Process Messages InstCat Item Description Sequence GenScope Filter a) Double-click control recipe destination FE on the operation overview. 571 .SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. InstCat Item Description Sequence GenScope Filter SEQDEF 05 At the start of a phase 01 05 For all predecessors No filter PHTEXT 05 At the start of a phase 02 00 Only one process instruction No filter FE_PHSTS 05 At the start of a phase 03 00 Only one process instruction No filter FE_CONS 06 At the start of a phase 01 01 Only one process instruction No filter FE_PHSTE 06 At the start of a phase Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Control Recipes.

2005/Q2 . Save your order and write down the order number.: T-FF9## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Choose Enter. Enter 1000 L as the quantity you want to produce and choose today as the order start date. Enter the following data: Total qty: 1000 L Start: Today Choose Enter. and creates the control recipe. As a result of the production scheduling profile in the material master record. The system copies master recipe T-RC9##. All rights reserved. The Create Process Order: Header – General Data screen appears. Use process order type PO##.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) InstCat SCM340 Item Description Sequence GenScope Filter 02 00 Only one process instruction No filter Task 6: 1. the system releases the order immediately and creates the control recipe. ___________________________________________________________ a) Logistics → Production . Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100. Continued on next page 572 © 2006 SAP AG. schedules and releases the order. Save the order and write down the order number.

3. 573 . of PI a) ProcInstCat Object type Description Choose Operations. Display the process instruction overview for phase 110. and Process Messages Task 7: 1. Write down which process instructions are assigned to the phase in the following table: No. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. No. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.) 9999 FE_PHSTE 2 Phase end with signature Interpret the result of the previous task. Control Recipes. of PI ProcInstCat Object type Description 0000 PHTEXT 1 Short text for phase 0000 FE_PHSTS 2 Phase start with signature 0010 INSTR 1 Control instruction with note 9999 FE_CONS 2 Material consumption (fertilizer prod. compare the process instructions in the process order with the process instructions assigned to the master recipe T-RC9## and those assigned to control recipe destination FE. Select phase 110 and choose Process inst. a) (…) → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number 2. To do so. Display your process order.) 9999 FE_CONS 2 Material consumption (fertilizer prod.

2005/Q2 . ProcInstCat In the PI sheet PHTEXT Continued on next page 574 © 2006 SAP AG. The control recipe must now have status Sent. a) Logistics → Production . choose the Refresh icon. The Control Recipe Monitor: Overview screen appears. All rights reserved. Look at the information and input fields displayed for phase 110 in the PI sheet.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) For information on process instructions. Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor and send it. Task 8: 1. After sending. a) (…) → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Process order: Order number 2. Select the control recipe and choose Send. Call up the PI sheet that was created by sending the control recipe in the change mode. Try to find out how the process instructions of phase 110 in the process order are related to the various elements in the PI sheet.Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Plant: 1100 Process order: Order number Choose Enter. Task 9: 1. see the pages Maintaining process instructions: example scenario 1 and Generating process instructions: example scenario 1 in your participant handbook.

Exit the PI sheet. All rights reserved. 575 . Control Recipes. and Process Messages ProcInstCat In the PI sheet FE_PHSTS INSTR FE_CONS FE_CONS FE_PHSTE a) 3. The process instructions assigned to phase 110 in the process order are displayed as follows in the PI sheet (see also the page PI Sheet: Example in your participant handbook): ProcInstCat In the PI sheet PHTEXT Phase short text is displayed FE_PHSTS Input field for signature to report the phase start INSTR Instruction and safety note is displayed FE_CONS Input field to report the quantity of material T-RF7## (ammonia) charged FE_CONS Input field to report the quantity of material T-RF9## (potassium sulfate) charged FE_PHSTE Input field for signature to report phase end Maintain phase 110 in your PI sheet. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions.

Display your process order. select the process messages that were created when you maintained the first process steps in the PI sheet. Choose Exit to leave the PI sheet. Enter your signature to report the end of phase 110. . 2005/Q2 . select the process messages that were created when you maintained the first process steps in the PI sheet. . Report the actual quantities of the ingredients ammonia and potassium sulfate charged. In the message monitor. Write down the messages that were created. The Process Message Monitor: Messages screen appears.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 In the message monitor. The following messages have been created so far: ProcMessCat PI_PHST PI_CONS PI_CONS PI_PHST 3. The target quantities are set as default values for the actual quantities to be reported. You can change the quantities. a) Enter your signature to report the start of phase 110. a) (…) → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant: 1100 Process order: Order number 2. Process Message Category a) Choose Enter. Task 10: 1. Use your ECC user to sign and the ECC password to confirm your signature. Continued on next page 576 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

of PI PI type Message category Input characteristic Description 0000 FE_PHSTS 9999 FE_CONS 9999 FE_CONS 9999 FE_PHSTE a) Text (…) → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number Choose Operations. Go to the process instruction assistant for the four process instructions of types FE_PHSTS. Proceed as follows for the four process instructions of type FE_PHSTS. Write down the following information for the process instructions: a) The process message category that each of them requests b) The input field defined for each of them in the process instruction Solution approach: Process instructions with the process instruction characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_CATEGORY are used to request process messages. FE_CONS and FE_PHSTE: Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You can use the F4 input help to determine the name of the input characteristic. Control Recipes. The text of the input characteristic is assigned to the process instruction characteristic PPPI_INPUT_REQUEST. FE_CONS and FE_PHSTE that are allocated to the phase. The input characteristic is assigned to the process instruction characteristic PPPI_REQUESTED_VALUE. No. and Process Messages Go to the process instruction overview for phase 110.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. All rights reserved. Select phase 110 and choose Process inst. 577 .

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . qty Material consumption message Material consumed T-RF9## PI_PHST Signature Signature Message on phase status 4. Continued on next page 578 © 2006 SAP AG. compare the process messages created so far with the input fields that you have maintained for phase 110 in the PI sheet. qty Material consumption message Material consumed T-RF7## PI_CONS Quantity Act.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Select the process instruction you want to display and choose the Details Process Instruction icon. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) For information on process messages. of PI 0000 PI type FE_PHSTS Message category PI_PHST Input characteristic Description Text Signature Signature Message on phase status 9999 9999 9999 FE_CONS FE_CONS FE_PHSTE Phase start: PI_CONS Quantity Act. Phase end: Interpret the result of the previous tasks. To do so. The following message categories and input fields are assigned to the process instructions: No. The overview of the process instruction characteristics appears. refer to the pages Creating Process Messages: Scenarios 1&2 in your participant handbook.

In the message monitor. Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Which process messages are contained in the standard system and which functions do they have? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the process message categories in the standard system. and Process Messages Task 11: 1. Write down the destination types to which you can send process messages. see the page Types of Message Destinations in your participant handbook. display the characteristics for the four process messages that the system created. Write down the characteristic values. 579 .SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Task 13: 1. All rights reserved. (II) in your participant handbook. Task 12: 1. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on message destination types. Control Recipes. see the pages Message Categories in the Standard System (I).

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value Continued on next page 580 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER Order number PPPI_EVENT_DATE Date of event PPPI_EVENT_DATE Time of event PPPI_PHASE 0110 PPPI_SIGNATURE Your user PPPI_PHASE_STATUS Start Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER Order number PPPI_EVENT_DATE Date of event PPPI_EVENT_DATE Time of event PPPI_MATERIAL T-RF7## PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED Material quantity withdrawn according to your entry in the PI sheet PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE 1 Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. 581 . Control Recipes. and Process Messages Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics a) Characteristic value (…) → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant: 1100 Process order: Order number Enter Double-click on the message on the message monitor. All rights reserved.

2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value PPPI_STORAGE_LOCATION 0002 PPPI_RESERVATION_ITEM Reservation item PPPI_RESERVATION Reservation number Process message category PI_CONS Message characteristics Characteristic value PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER Order number PPPI_EVENT_DATE Date of event PPPI_EVENT_DATE Time of event PPPI_MATERIAL T-RF9## PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED Material quantity withdrawn according to your entry in the PI sheet PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE kg PPPI_STORAGE_LOCATION 0002 PPPI_RESERVATION_ITEM Reservation item PPPI_RESERVATION Reservation number Process message category PI_PHST Message characteristics Characteristic value PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER Order number PPPI_EVENT_DATE Date of event PPPI_EVENT_DATE Time of event PPPI_PHASE 0110 PPPI_SIGNATURE Your user PPPI_PHASE_STATUS Finish Continued on next page 582 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Double-click the item numbers for the corresponding material components. _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Operations. No dates have been confirmed yet. No activities have been confirmed yet. Write down the quantities withdrawn for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##. _____________________________________________________ a) Double-click control phase number 110 on the operation overview.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Materials. Display your process order. All rights reserved. 583 . 4. and Process Messages Task 14: 1. _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Qty/activities tab. Choose the Dates tab page. 5. Write down the confirmed dates for phase 110. Double-click on the field System Status for phase 110. The quantities withdrawn have not yet been updated for the two material components. a) (…) → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number 2. Write down the confirmed quantities for phase 110. CRCR Control recipe created REL Released 3. Write down the statuses of phase 110. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Control Recipes.

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Task 15: 1. a) (…) → Process order → Display Process order: Order number 2. After you have sent the messages. 2005/Q2 . Refresh icon. Send the first three messages in the message monitor (PI_PHST. Display your process order. Task 16: 1. All rights reserved. The three messages must now have status Sent. PI_CONS. CRCR Control recipe created MCNF Manually confirmed PCNF Partially confirmed REL Release PRST Start processing Continued on next page 584 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the statuses of phase 110. PI_CONS). refresh the display in the message monitor. PI_CONS) and choose Send. a) (…) → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant: 1100 Process order: Order number Enter Select the first three messages (PI_PHST. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Operations. PI_CONS. Double-click on the field System Status for phase 110.

All rights reserved. The quantities withdrawn are identical to the values for characteristic PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED for the messages of message category PI_CONS. Write down the confirmed start date for phase 110. Write down the confirmed quantities for phase 110. The confirmed start date (date and time) was updated for the phase. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Materials. Compare the quantities with the characteristic values of the corresponding process messages. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. No activities have been determined yet since you have only reported the phase start. Compare the confirmed date and time with the characteristic values of the corresponding process message. 5. Write down the quantities withdrawn for material components T-RF7## and T-RF9##. The confirmed dates are identical to the values of the message characteristics PPPI_EVENT_DATE and PPPI_EVENT_TIME for the first message of message category PI_PHST (see exercise 13). The quantities withdrawn for the two materials were updated. and Process Messages 3. Choose the Dates tab page. Control Recipes. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Double-click control phase number 110 on the operation overview. Double-click the item numbers for the corresponding material components.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. 4. 585 . _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Qty/activities tab.

All rights reserved. The message must now have status Sent. refresh the display in the message monitor. a) (…) → Process Order → Display Process order: Order number 2. Send the fourth message in the message monitor (PI_PHST).Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Task 17: 1. Write down the statuses of phase 110. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Operations. Refresh icon. a) (…) → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant: 1100 Process order: Order number Enter Select the fourth message (PI_PHST) and choose Send. CRCR Control recipe created MCNF Manually confirmed CNF Finally confirmed PRFN Finish processing REL Released 3. Task 18: 1. 2005/Q2 . Continued on next page 586 © 2006 SAP AG. Display your process order. After you have sent the message. Double-click on the field System Status for phase 110. Write down the finish date for phase 110.

Describe the principle of the maintenance of process instructions with reference to maintenance alternative 2 described in your participant handbook. Write down the confirmed activity for phase 110. Control Recipes. The system used the difference between the phase finish and start dates to calculate the duration of processing. refer to the page “„Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 2” in your participant handbook. and Process Messages Compare the confirmed date and time with the characteristic values of the corresponding process message. Choose the Dates tab page.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Double-click control phase number 110 on the operation overview. 4. The confirmed finish date (date and time) was updated for the phase. To which objects are process instructions assigned in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on process instructions. All rights reserved. Task 19: Alternative 2: Maintenance of process instructions in XSteps (exercises 19 to 26) 1. How did the system calculate this activity? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Qty/activities tab. 587 . The confirmed dates are identical to the values of the message characteristics PPPI_EVENT_DATE and PPPI_EVENT_TIME for the second message of message category PI_PHST (see exercise 13). Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Control recipe destinations cannot be maintained and process instructions cannot be assigned for the phases of the recipe. 2005/Q2 . Usual procedure Can control recipe destinations be maintained for the phases? _____________________________________________________ Can process instructions be assigned to the phases? _____________________________________________________ a) 3. Go into the master recipe of the recipe group T-RCX9##. Display the profile of the recipe. Process instruction maintenance: __________________________________ What does this profile parameter define. Write down the profile setting for the process instruction maintenance.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Task 20: 1. refer to the page “„Creating Control Recipes: Alternative 2” in your participant handbook. a) 2. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 588 © 2006 SAP AG. recipe 10. and how does the setting selected influence the maintenance option for process instructions? Use the F1 help for the field Process instruction maintenance to answer the question. How do you create control recipes in this alternative? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on control recipes. All rights reserved. Task 21: 1. in the change mode.

589 . XSteps icon Write down the following for the XStep tree: Description: _________________________________________ Application context: ___________________________________ Receiver: _________________________________________ a) Double-click on the XStep tree Description: Fertilizer production Application context: T-RCX9## 01 Receiver: Fertilizer 6. All rights reserved. a) 5. 4. Control Recipes. and Process Messages ___________________________________________________________ a) Extras → Profile Process instruction maintenance: XSteps Use the F1 help for this profile parameter to obtain more detailed information on the possible settings and their effects.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. Navigate to the XStep Editor of your recipe. Write down the following information for the XSteps of the XStep tree: XStep description Application context Generation Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

and which were assigned as references to standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository? Standard XSteps: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ XSteps created in the recipe: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 590 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . XStep description Application context Generation Short text for phase T-RCX9## 01 For all phases Phase start with signature T-RCX9## 01 For all phases Control instruction with safety note Phase 110 Work instruction Phase 210 Work instruction Phase 220 Material consumption T-RCX9## 01 Goods receipt Phase 220 Phase end with signature T-RCX9## 01 For all phases For all phases Which of the above XSteps were created in the recipe. All rights reserved.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) XStep description SCM340 Application context Generation a) 7.

Simulate the PI sheet. Describe which process instruction is created with which elements for the XStep control instruction with a safety note. A process instruction was created with the description control instruction with a safety note. Note: The explosion of the standard XStep references and the complete generation only occur in the process order. Control Recipes. 591 .Output of a note text 9. Expand the structure of the process instruction. a) XSteps → Simulate Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions.Output of a long text . Description of the process instruction: _____________________________________________________ Elements of the process instruction _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Expand the structure of the XStep control instruction with a safety note. The following elements are defined for the process instruction: . The process instructions for the XSteps created in the recipe are maintained in the recipe. All rights reserved. and Process Messages _____________________________________________________ a) Standard XSteps: Short text for phase Phase start with signature Material consumption of goods receipt Phase end with signature XSteps created in the recipe: Control instruction with safety note Work instruction Work instruction 8.

. The process instructions for the standard XSteps are maintained in the standard XStep repository. Manually select the production version XSEN to create the order. Use process order type PO##. Use the simulation if necessary. Display your process order. Usual procedure Display the XSteps of the process order. a) 2. Enter 1000 L as the quantity you want to produce and choose today as the order start date. Create a process order for material T-FF9## in plant 1100..Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1100 Execute (F8) icon 11. ___________________________________________________________ a) Usual procedure Task 23: 1. either use the menu path Xsteps -> Simulate or select and use the right-mouse button and select Simulate. Save the order and write down the order number. Try to analyze the structures and contents of these standard XSteps.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 10. a) (. Note that the following activities occurred when the control recipe was created: Continued on next page 592 © 2006 SAP AG. expand the folder Fertilizer production DE. Immediately after the order is created. Go into the standard XStep repository for plant 1100. In the standard XStep repository.) → Production . You will find the standard XSteps used in your master recipe. All rights reserved. the order is released and the control recipe created. 2005/Q2 . a) See description in the exercise Task 22: 1.

Select your control recipe in the control recipe monitor and send it. a) Usual procedure Task 26: 1. and Process Messages . Simulate the PI sheet. a) 2005/Q2 Flexible procedure. 1. see description in the exercise © 2006 SAP AG.Process the PI sheet . All rights reserved.The standard XSteps were exploded .Analyze in which XSteps and in which process instructions of the process order the requirements of these process messages are defined. Try to find out how the XSteps of the process order are related to the various elements in the PI sheet.SCM340 Lesson: Process Instructions. a) Choose XSteps For the simulation: XSteps → Simulate Task 24: 1.The generation was performed Try to analyze the structures and contents of some of these exploded and generated standard XSteps. Control Recipes. 593 . a) Usual procedure Task 25: Call up the PI sheet that was created by sending the control recipe in the change mode. . Look at the information and input fields displayed in the PI sheet.Analyze the process messages that the system created while you maintained the PI sheet. You can now carry out the following activities corresponding to the above exercises for scenario 1: .

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the alternative maintenance options for process instructions • Describe the relationship between process instructions. and process messages • Describe how a control recipe is created from process instructions • Describe how the information of process instructions is displayed in a PI sheet • Describe how process messages are created • Name the message destination types that are available • Name the most important predefined message categories in the standard system 594 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . control recipes. All rights reserved.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 595 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Link to Process Control Systems Lesson: Link to Process Control Systems Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the principle of data exchange with process control systems using process management. you will be able to: • • • Describe the principle of how control recipes can be transferred to a process control system Name the process instruction types available for communicating with process control systems and explain their functions Describe typical scenarios for the data exchange between the ECC System and a process control system Business Example You want to use the link to your process control systems with the aid of process management. Control Recipe Transfer Figure 116: Control Recipe Transfer 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

The generated program must be compiled and linked in the control computer and can then be used for the actual application as an Application Program Interface (API). On the control computer level. The sequence of the calls is not changed. process management transfers all existing control recipes for this destination. Thanks to the RFC technology. 2005/Q2 . Process management informs a destination about each control recipe created. the RFC is repeated according to a repetition rate or duration that can be set by the user. SAP supports the automatic generation of a C-coded RFC partner program with a code generator. Process Instruction Types for Process Control Systems Figure 117: Process Instruction Types for Process Control Systems 596 © 2006 SAP AG. the application is completely free of communication handling on the ECC level. control recipe transfer can be triggered in the following ways: • • As soon as at least one control recipe has been created for a destination. All rights reserved. If the target system is not active when the call takes place. communication between PP-PI and process control systems is carried out using a tRFC (transactional remote function call).Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Depending on the destination type. From a technical point of view. The function module in the ECC System with which data is to be exchanged is used as the basis for the generation of the partner program. The tRFC ensures that each call is executed only once. individual control recipes or all existing control recipes can be requested. Depending on the destination. The communication partners transfer data using Common Program Interface Communication (CPI-C) based on TCP/IP.

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. The resources and materials are always the same and thus need not be specified. 597 . You specify the following: • • The message category of the message to be sent The information to be conveyed in the message Using process message subscriptions. it can be represented on the control side using relatively fixed algorithms. PP-PI transfers information on the control algorithms to be executed as well as the parameters to be used. for which you can set a few parameters. You can use process data requests to specify that process control is to send process messages with actual process data.SCM340 Lesson: Link to Process Control Systems You can use process parameters to transfer information to process control. you specify: • • The events that must be reported to process management by process control The message category to be used to report an event Example: Simple Scenario Figure 118: Example: Simple Scenario The graphic shows an example of how data can be transferred between PP-PI and process control in a simple process. Since the process in the sample scenario only allows for a small number of variants. In the control recipe.

The process control system used in this example not only contains a number of control sequences but also resource and material data. The control sequences can be configured flexibly. 2005/Q2 . PP-PI transfers information on the phases to be executed as well as on the resources and materials to be used. The process control system creates exactly these requested messages and sends them to PP-PI. It also transfers further phase-related parameters if required. the control recipe contains process message subscriptions and process data requests specifying the messages that are to be sent when the control recipes are executed as well as the message characteristics. Example: Complex Scenario Figure 119: Example: Complex Scenario The graphic shows an example of how data can be transferred between PP-PI and process control in a complex process. In the control recipe. the messages to be created and sent are defined for each control algorithm on the control side.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 The process messages to be transferred from process control to PP-PI are not specified in the control recipe. All rights reserved. In addition to the process parameters. 598 © 2006 SAP AG. Instead. thus enabling the production of a large number of variants.

599 .SCM340 Lesson: Link to Process Control Systems Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the principle of how control recipes can be transferred to a process control system • Name the process instruction types available for communicating with process control systems and explain their functions • Describe typical scenarios for the data exchange between the ECC System and a process control system 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . 600 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about important elements and functions of the PI sheet.6C) This is a further development of the ABAP list-based PI sheet. Among its advantages are those of a new interface in a HTML layout and new functional options. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • Name the important elements and functions of the PI sheet Business Example You want to use PI sheets for process management and for reporting process data. ABAP List-Based and Browser-Based PI Sheet Figure 120: ABAP List-Based and Browser-Based PI Sheet You can create two types of PI sheet: • • The ABAP list-based PI sheet The browser-based PI sheet (as of Release 4.

fields. Process Instructions for PI Sheets Features • • • • • • • • Definition of outputs (texts. All rights reserved. and how its interface elements are presented. via OPC) Definition of the phase sequence .Structure Figure 121: Browser-Based PI Sheet . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 601 ..6C. the Process Manufacturing Cockpit is also available. …) Definitions of input fields and tables with default values and input validations Definition of calculations Definition of message creation Definition of function calls Definition of manufacturing data access (for example.Structure This unit informs you how the browser-based PI sheet is structured in the SAP standard layout .SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets Since Release 4. graphics. They are defined in Customizing using process instructions of the type 0. tables. • • Process Manufacturing Cockpits are PI sheets without reference to an order. Browser-Based PI Sheet ..

Elements (I) Figure 122: Browser-Based PI Sheet . which ends before the next long text. 2005/Q2 . and input fields for long texts that are output on the left side Input and output fields and pushbuttons that appear on the right side Tables the are spread across the entire width of the PI sheet © 2006 SAP AG. There is also a menu bar in the header of the PI sheet that provides the functions relating to the entire PI sheet. The appearance of a long text within a phase marks the beginning of a new section.Elements (I) The phases can contain the following elements: • • • 602 Control information. To display the context menu. Each phase can in turn be divided into a number of sections. You can also call up the context menu with the shift + F10 key combination. The header and all the phases are created immediately after the PI sheet is created and they can be opened and closed. notes.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 The browser-based PI sheet is made up of a header and the individual phases of the process order. All rights reserved. Browser-Based PI Sheet . All the functions can be accessed via the context menu. position the cursor on the relevant object or field and click the right mouse button.

Elements (II) Browser-Based PI Sheet .SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets Browser-Based PI Sheet .Elements (III) Figure 124: Browser-Based PI Sheet .Elements (II) Figure 123: Browser-Based PI Sheet . All rights reserved. 603 .Elements (III) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Functions that can be executed for the entire PI sheet can be triggered as follows: • • Via the menu bar in the header of the PI sheet Via the context menu Functions that relate to individual process steps only appear in the context menu of the respective process step if it is actually relevant to that step.Functions (I) Figure 125: Browser-Based PI Sheet . and he can execute them for the entire PI sheet or for individual process steps. Which functions are available in the context menu also depends on whether you are displaying or changing a PI sheet. All rights reserved. For example.Functions (I) The process operator can use a range of functions to process the browser-based PI sheet. the function Display message only appears in those process steps for which a process message was defined.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Browser-Based PI Sheet . 604 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

All rights reserved.Functions (III) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets Browser-Based PI Sheet .Functions (II) Figure 126: Browser-Based PI Sheet .Functions (II) Browser-Based PI Sheet .Functions (III) Figure 127: Browser-Based PI Sheet . 605 .

The batch determination and batch check are performed the same way in the PI sheet as in the order. you can also avail of the batch determination and the batch check.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Browser-Based PI Sheet . All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Functions (IV) Figure 128: Browser-Based PI Sheet .Functions (IV) When you are entering material consumptions in the PI sheet. 606 © 2006 SAP AG.

Functions (V) Browser-Based PI Sheet .Functions (VI) Figure 130: Browser-Based PI Sheet . All rights reserved.Functions (VI) 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.Functions (V) Figure 129: Browser-Based PI Sheet . 607 .SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets Browser-Based PI Sheet .

Only after all the required signatures in the signature strategy have been entered are the process messages relating to the process step created. However. you can define a signature strategy for each process step. the shift manager can terminate the signature process. With an asynchronous signature. After this. 608 © 2006 SAP AG. the input fields on the PI sheet will be ready for input again. Only the input field that is waiting to be signed is blocked for further entries until the shift manager has signed it. New values can be entered.Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Signature Process for Process Steps Figure 131: Signature Process for Process Steps From SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1. Example: The process operator enters values during production and validates these entries with his signature. the system does not create any process messages yet. the process operator can process another step of the PI sheet. In the meantime. The last asynchronous signature in the PI sheet triggers the function Complete PI sheet. since the entries must be checked and signed by the shift manager at a later date. All rights reserved. to be performed asynchronously. 2005/Q2 . you have the option of only confirming actual data after one or more other people have confirmed the entries with their signature. If the values entered by the process operator are not permitted.10 (EA_APPL 110).

10 (EA_APPL 110).SCM340 Lesson: Elements of PI sheets User Change in the PI Sheet Figure 132: User Change in the PI Sheet From SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1. larger group of users. To change back to the service user again. To change from the service user to a specific user. you choose Log off. you choose Log on. you do not have to log off the SAP ECC System. The service user only has display rights for the PI sheet or cockpit. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. An advantage: When you change between the service user and a specific user. you can change between an anonymous service user and a specific user during the processing of the PI sheet or the cockpit. In the header of the PI sheet or cockpit. A service user is a user that is available to an anonymous. you will always see the name of the user currently logged on to the system. 609 .

Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the important elements and functions of the PI sheet 610 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

you will be able to: • • Explain the principle of the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface Name the predefined services in the environment of PP-PI Business Example You want to use the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface for manual and event-controlled reading and writing of data points. the new Manufacturing Data Access internal interface was implemented. Data Exchange Between Applications in the SAP ECC System Figure 133: Data Exchange Between Applications in the SAP ECC System With SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. It enables you to exchange manufacturing events and data with reference to manufacturing data points between different applications in the SAP ECC System. All rights reserved. 611 . Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.10 (EA_APPL 110).SCM340 Lesson: Manufacturing Data Access Lesson: Manufacturing Data Access Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the principle of the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface.

A client can • • • Read data points from another application Write data points in another application Subscribe events from other applications A server provides • • Data points that can be read or written from other applications Events on which other applications can subscribe themselves As soon as events occur. with a pushbutton) Read or written on an event-controlled basis. which means that when applications are running. they are published by the server In this way. or as a client and server simultaneously. without the user having to explicitly request this Services in the Environment of PP-PI Services in the Environment of PP-PI 612 • MDA: Generic Services Server • PSH: PI Sheet Client & Server • PMC: Manufacturing Cockpit Client & Server • MSG: Process Messages Client • ODA: OPC Data Access Server • OAE: OPC Alarms/Events Server • SYS: System Information Server © 2006 SAP AG. on request (for example. A service can function as a client. values from one or more data points can be • • Read or written synchronously. an event triggers data to be read or written automatically. a server. 2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 You can register any application as a Service to the interface. All rights reserved.

SCM340 Lesson: Manufacturing Data Access Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the principle of the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface • Name the predefined services in the environment of PP-PI 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 613 .

The OPC standard was designed especially for the process control level. with the component SAP ODA. Business Example You want to use SAP OPC Data Access to realize the exchange of data points between SAP ECC and process control systems from different manufacturers. OPC is a standard that uses the COM/DCOM technology to define manufacturer-independent interfaces for industrial areas of application. process control systems. SAP ECC. 614 © 2006 SAP AG. OPC Figure 134: OPC OPC stands for OLE for Process Control and Openness. is an OPC client that can communicate with OPC servers. OPC servers enable you to access different data sources (for example. 2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 Lesson: SAP OPC Data Access Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the concept of SAP OPC Data Access. This considerably simplifies the data exchange between applications. you will be able to: • Explain the basic concepts of OPC and SAP ODA. memory programmable controls. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. All rights reserved. Productivity and Connectivity. temperature sensors) and thus provide process data which can be requested by OPC clients.

org and www. One part of SAP ODA is the SAP ODA Connector. It supports the data exchange between SAP ECC and the process control systems of different manufacturers. OPC Specifications and the Scope of SAP ODA Figure 135: OPC Specifications and the Scope of SAP ODA SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1. which is installed on a PC outside the SAP System. You can use SAP ODA to automatically write data points and events in the SAP ECC System from the process control level.SCM340 Lesson: SAP OPC Data Access OPC clients and OPC servers are currently PC-based systems on which a Microsoft operating system runs. SAP ODA is based on the industry standard OPC (OLE for Process Control).opcfoundation.opceurope. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.10 (EA_APPL 110) provides you with the componentSAP OPC Data Access (SAP ODA). or to receive them on request and write values. OPC servers provide process data that can be requested by OPC clients.org. Therefore the installation and configuration overhead is very small. You can get further information on the OPC Foundation Internet sites http://www. you do not have to make any additional developments or use any middleware. In contrast to the existing PI-PCS interface. All rights reserved. which defines manufacturer-independent interfaces for process control technology. SAP ECC is an OPC client that communicates with OPC servers. for SAP ODA you do not need to have the individual process control systems certified by SAP. 615 . To use SAP ODA.

This interface is currently being used in the Production Planning . which means – Subscribing events from OPC Alarms/Events servers and confirming the events The OPC functions supported by SAP ODA provide a general interface that is available for all SAP applications. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 SAP ODA currently supports the following OPC server functions: • OPC Data Access. Example: Weighing System Figure 136: Example: Weighing System 616 © 2006 SAP AG. which means – • Synchronous reading and writing of values from any and into any OPC Data Access servers – Subscribing value changes from OPC Data Access servers OPC Alarms/Events.Process Industry (PP-PI) area.

From the OPC point of view. 617 . OPC Server. and a subordinate system works as follows: The SAP ECC System uses RFC to send. which acts as an RFC Server from the point of view of the SAP ECC System. and from there via RFC to the SAP ECC System. it is acting as an OPC Client. DCOM mechanisms are currently not supported by SAP ODA. a data request to the SAP ODA Connector. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. it is possible to install any number of SAP ODA Connectors on different computers.SCM340 Lesson: SAP OPC Data Access SAP OPC Data Access Figure 137: SAP OPC Data Access The communication between the SAP ECC System. for example. However. The Connector converts the RFC call into an OPC-compliant call and sends it via COM to the relevant OPC Server. All rights reserved. The data requested is sent back the same way via COM to the Connector. SAP ODA Connector. and so the SAP ODA Connector and the OPC Server must be run on the same computer.

2005/Q2 .Unit 9: Principle of Process Management (II) SCM340 SAP ODA and PI-PCS Figure 138: SAP ODA and PI-PCS The SAP ODA and PI-PCS interfaces provide different communication options and thus complement one another. All rights reserved. 618 © 2006 SAP AG.

619 .SCM340 Lesson: SAP OPC Data Access Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the basic concepts of OPC and SAP ODA. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

control recipes.Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the functions of process management • Name the alternative maintenance options for process instructions • Describe the relationship between process instructions. and process messages • Describe how a control recipe is created from process instructions • Describe how the information of process instructions is displayed in a PI sheet • Describe how process messages are created • Name the message destination types that are available • Name the most important predefined message categories in the standard system • Describe the principle of how control recipes can be transferred to a process control system • Name the process instruction types available for communicating with process control systems and explain their functions • Describe typical scenarios for the data exchange between the ECC System and a process control system • Name the important elements and functions of the PI sheet • Explain the principle of the Manufacturing Data Access internal interface • Name the predefined services in the environment of PP-PI • Explain the basic concepts of OPC and SAP ODA. 620 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

• MDA: Generic Services Server • PSH: PI Sheet Client & Server • PMC: Manufacturing Cockpit Client & Server • MSG: Process Messages Client • ODA: OPC Data Access Server • OAE: OPC Alarms/Events Server • SYS: System Information Server © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. 5. 2. On the basis of which data structures are process messages requested from a PI sheet or a process control system? 3. Name a few examples from the range of functions of process instructions for PI sheets. 4. Name services realized within the Manufacturing Data Access. All rights reserved. Name the two options for triggering the transfer of control recipes. Name the two options in process management for exchanging data with process control systems. 621 .

622 SCM340 What is the scope of OPC Data Access? © 2006 SAP AG.Test Your Knowledge 6. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Answers 1. fields. individual control recipes or all existing control recipes can be requested. via OPC) Definition of the phase sequence © 2006 SAP AG. control recipe transfer can be triggered in the following ways: • • 4. As soon as at least one control recipe has been created for a destination. 3. process management transfers all existing control recipes for this destination. …) Definitions of input fields and tables with default values and input validations Definition of calculations Definition of message creation Definition of function calls Definition of manufacturing data access (for example. Answer: • • 2. Depending on the destination. All rights reserved. Answer: Depending on the destination type. Answer: • • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Definition of outputs (texts. Name the two options for triggering the transfer of control recipes. graphics. Name a few examples from the range of functions of process instructions for PI sheets. 623 . Communication with the process control level using the PI-PCS interface (sending control recipes and receiving process messages) Reading and writing data points and events using the function SAP OPC Data Access On the basis of which data structures are process messages requested from a PI sheet or a process control system? Answer: Process messages are requested on the basis of corresponding process instructions (characteristic-based process instructions or XStep process instructions). Name the two options in process management for exchanging data with process control systems. tables. Process management informs a destination about each control recipe created.

6. SCM340 Name services realized within the Manufacturing Data Access. and values from the ECC System are written to the process control. data points and events from the process control level are received automatically or on request.Test Your Knowledge 5. 2005/Q2 . • MDA: Generic Services Server • PSH: PI Sheet Client & Server • PMC: Manufacturing Cockpit Client & Server • MSG: Process Messages Client • ODA: OPC Data Access Server • OAE: OPC Alarms/Events Server • SYS: System Information Server What is the scope of OPC Data Access? Answer: Scope of SAP OPC Data Access (SAP ODA): In the SAP ECC System. All rights reserved. 624 © 2006 SAP AG.

.... All rights reserved.......... you will be able to: • • • • Use the order information system Use process message evaluation Name important aspects of the Batch Information Cockpit Name further information systems Unit Contents Lesson: Process Data Evaluation ......................633 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG...................626 Exercise 38: Order Information System ..Unit 10 Process Data Evaluation Unit Overview Topics: • • • • • Information systems: overview Order information system Process message evaluation Batch Information Cockpit Batch where-used list Unit Objectives After completing this unit.. 625 ......................

You will get an overview of further information systems. you will be able to: • • • • Use the order information system Use process message evaluation Name important aspects of the Batch Information Cockpit Name further information systems Business Example You will test the functions of the order information system. You will get an overview of the options for evaluating batch data using the Batch Information Cockpit. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. All rights reserved. You will get an overview of the functions of process message evaluation.Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of the different information systems for process data evaluation. 626 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

627 . All rights reserved. Archived orders are not taken into account. The order information system offers various list types in reporting. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Their layout can be tailored to your requirements.SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Information Systems Figure 139: Information Systems Order Information System Figure 140: Order Information System The order information system is a tool that offers the following shop floor control reporting functions for process orders: All orders that exist in the system can be included in the evaluations (including those with deletion flags/indicators).

628 © 2006 SAP AG. You can transfer evaluation results to MS-EXCEL. All rights reserved. or send them to the SAPoffice mail system. 2005/Q2 .Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 Process Message Evaluation Figure 141: Process Message Evaluation You can use process message evaluation to evaluate characteristics of process messages that have been sent to the process message record. download them to your PC in ASCII format. You can display characteristic values in the SAP Business Graphics.

material.6C (downgrade available for 4. All rights reserved. stock. In the Batch Information Cockpit you can start a flexible selection of batch data. You can enter a range of basic data in the selection screen: for example. You can start it with transaction /nBMBC.SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Batch Information Cockpit Figure 142: Batch Information Cockpit The Batch Information Cockpit is a central tool that provides comprehensive evaluation options for batch data. or specification data that is stored in the classification. It was developed within the scope of the Enjoy release as a one-screen transaction. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 629 . Existing batch functions have also been integrated: • • • Batch master and batch where-used list Stock overview and minimum shelf life evaluations Worklist The BIC is a new development for Release 4.6B). or shelf life data.

If you want to use the batch where-used list. stock transfers in the two-step procedure. You can start the batch where-used list from the batch management menu or from the Batch Information Cockpit. for example. for example. All rights reserved. you access the batch where-used list by means of various SD documents. From the pick-up list. and purchase orders (including subcontracting orders). It also considers transfers from charge to charge. to evaluate information from the sales or warehouse management areas. must be recalled for quality reasons. you can either use the pick-up list in the batch management menu or the batch related objects selection expansion in the Batch Information Cockpit. 2005/Q2 . The batch where-used list is structured on the basis of material movement data for materials subject to batch management. Display options: • • 630 Tree structure: hierarchical structure ALV list: Additional fields can be added to the list by means of the SAP enhancement SAPLCHVW. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 Structure of the Batch Where-Used List Figure 143: Structure of the Batch Where-Used List The batch where-used list documents a batch's path through the enterprise. and bottom-up analysis to determine which batches a batch went into. The batch where-used list is used within the scope of product liability. This report enables you to find batches which. You use top-down analysis to determine which batches a batch came from.

SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Process Data Evaluation: Topic Summary • • • • 2005/Q2 The order information system is a tool that offers reporting and mass processing functions for process orders. You can use process message evaluation to evaluate characteristics of process messages. All rights reserved. It is is used within the scope of product liability. The Batch Information Cockpit provides comprehensive evaluation options for batch data. The batch where-used list documents a batch's path through the enterprise. 631 . © 2006 SAP AG.

. All rights reserved.Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 632 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

2. Which list types are available? Task 2: 1. you can double-click on the object or use the Restrict individual lists function. you will be able to: • Use the process order information system Business Example You will become familiar with the process order information system. 633 . To the right of the object list. choose the selection options production plant 1100 and order type PO##. execute the program (Program → Execute (F8)). Go into the process order information system. 2. Get an overview of all the selection options available. the Objects column contains a list of all the process orders read for the current evaluation.SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Exercise 38: Order Information System Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. analyze the generated lists: In the left chart (= object list). In the object selection tab page. Task 1: 1. All rights reserved. After executing the program. you get a special individual object list with field information for every object selected in the object selection. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You can expand the orders hierarchically in a tree structure relating to the objects selected in the object selection. 1. If you want to restrict the information displayed in the individual lists to particular objects in the object list. check the object selection proposed by the profile. for example. Select the list PPIOA000 Object overview and the profile 00000000001X Standard profile layout-based. Finally. In the selection tab page.

Note that you can select a profile or a layout in the initial screen to preset the field selection for detailed lists. © 2006 SAP AG. Analyze the information of detailed lists (for example. You can open and close them using Settings → Individual list selection. PPIOH000 order headers. PPIOR000 confirmations. you switch on the standard list functions using the corresponding function button. Task 4: 1. …) in the process order information system. All rights reserved. you can use the environment function selection to navigate in detailed information. From the individual lists. 634 Display the profiles defined in Customizing for the order information system. 2005/Q2 . Individual lists can be switched to full-screen mode.Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 The field selection in the object list and in the individual lists can be personalized by means of layout definitions. To do this in the individual lists. Task 3: 1.

choose the selection options production plant 1100 and order type PO##. for example. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. analyze the generated lists: In the left chart (= object list). Go into the process order information system. Finally.Process → Process Order → Reporting → Order Information System → Process Order Information System Which list types are available? a) PPIOD000 Documented goods movements PPIOG000 Automatic goods movements PPIOH000 Order headers PPIOI000 Items PPIOK000 Capacities PPIOO000 Operations (…) Task 2: 1. Select the list PPIOA000 Object overview and the profile 00000000001X Standard profile layout-based. In the object selection tab page. You can expand the orders hierarchically in a tree structure relating to the objects selected in the object selection.SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Solution 38: Order Information System Task 1: 1. a) 2. a) 2. 635 . check the object selection proposed by the profile. execute the program (Program → Execute (F8)). All rights reserved. 1. the Objects column contains a list of all the process orders read for the current evaluation. Logistics → Production . In the selection tab page. Get an overview of all the selection options available. No further details required After executing the program.

Analyze the information of detailed lists (for example. Note that you can select a profile or a layout in the initial screen to preset the field selection for detailed lists. …) in the process order information system. 2005/Q2 . you can double-click on the object or use the Restrict individual lists function. You can open and close them using Settings → Individual list selection. From the individual lists. To do this in the individual lists. PPIOH000 order headers. you get a special individual object list with field information for every object selected in the object selection. a) 636 Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Information System → Define Profiles for Order Information System © 2006 SAP AG. If you want to restrict the information displayed in the individual lists to particular objects in the object list. PPIOR000 confirmations. Individual lists can be switched to full-screen mode. All rights reserved. The field selection in the object list and in the individual lists can be personalized by means of layout definitions.Unit 10: Process Data Evaluation SCM340 To the right of the object list. you can use the environment function selection to navigate in detailed information. a) Task 4: 1. Display the profiles defined in Customizing for the order information system. you switch on the standard list functions using the corresponding function button. a) No further details required Task 3: 1.

637 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Process Data Evaluation Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the order information system • Use process message evaluation • Name important aspects of the Batch Information Cockpit • Name further information systems 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit Summary SCM340 Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Use the order information system • Use process message evaluation • Name important aspects of the Batch Information Cockpit • Name further information systems 638 © 2006 SAP AG.

SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 1. 2005/Q2 Name the information systems for process data evaluation © 2006 SAP AG. 639 . All rights reserved.

Name the information systems for process data evaluation Answer: • • • • • • • 640 Order Information System Process Message Evaluation Missing Parts Information System Business Information Warehouse Logistics Information System LIS Batch Information Cockpit. also with Batch Where-Used List Controlling Reports © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1.

641 . All rights reserved.Unit 11 Production in Compliance with GMP Unit Overview Topics: • • • • • • Digital signature Approved process orders Material identification and material reconciliation Integration with quality management Batch record Batch derivation Unit Objectives After completing this unit. you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP Give a definition for digital signatures and describe their functions and processing Name the applications using digital signatures in the ECC System Execute a digital signature Find and display digital signatures Define a signature strategy and describe how it is applied Create approved process orders Change approved process orders Use the picking function to pack material components into handling units Carry out a completeness check to identify the material components staged Perform quantity reconciliation for the materials involved in the process Outline the main steps that must be followed in master data maintenance to carry out an in-process quality inspection Describe the functions of inspection lots and create an inspection lot for in-process quality inspection Describe possible scenarios of an in-process quality inspection Carry out in-process quality inspections with batch value assignment © 2006 SAP AG.

....731 Lesson: Batch Record..685 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation ..............Overview ...........................................................719 Exercise 44: Material Reconciliation .......................................................................... All rights reserved.......646 Exercise 39: Digital Signature: Definition and Application .................................643 Lesson: Digital Signature .................................................................665 Lesson: Approved Process Orders ...................................................................... 2005/Q2 ............736 Exercise 45: Batch Record...743 Lesson: Batch Derivation .........................681 Exercise 41: Approved Process Orders ............ 711 Exercise 43: Integration with Quality Management ...........................................703 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management ........Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP • • • • • SCM340 Describe the structure and process of editing a batch record Explain the status profile and version management for batch records Explain how you can influence batch status management and the usage decision for an inspection lot Describe how you can use batch derivation to transfer values from batch attributes in the batch where-used list for component batches to batches of a finished product Name the settings required in Customizing and in the application Unit Contents Lesson: Production in Compliance with GMP .....752 642 © 2006 SAP AG.......661 Exercise 40: Individual Signatures and Signature Strategies .........696 Exercise 42: Material Identification....................

In particular. In particular. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and other international institutions have become an international standard in many areas of process industries. Production in Compliance with GMP Figure 144: Production in Compliance with GMP The guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) laid down by the U.SCM340 Lesson: Production in Compliance with GMP .S. they must be taken into account in processes of the pharmaceutical industry. 643 . you will be able to: • Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP Business Example The guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) laid down by the U. they must be taken into account in processes of the pharmaceutical industry. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. All rights reserved.Overview Lesson: Production in Compliance with GMP .Overview Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and other international institutions have become an international standard in many areas of process industries.S.

You use the material reconciliation function to analyze and verify required quantities and yield at the end of the production process. The order data is therefore locked and cannot be changed. 644 © 2006 SAP AG. You can activate the digital signature function to execute certain business operations in the ECC System. You can exchange information about the product quality and analysis values between the production plant and the laboratory or the quality assurance system. You use the material identification function to check whether the material that was picked for the process order is completely available at the production line and will be used in the correct sequence. You use ECC Quality Management to do this.You can use the inspection results for batch specification by automatically copying them to the characteristics of the batch produced. With regard to product liability. All rights reserved. the batch record contains all planned and actual data for the production process of a batch.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 You can specify that a process order can only be created if an approved recipe exists. 2005/Q2 . The approval procedure is implemented in the ECC Engineering Change Management.

Overview Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Production in Compliance with GMP . 645 .

2005/Q2 . these transactions must be documented. You will therefore get an overview of the functions and applications of the Digital Signature in the ECC System. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. All rights reserved. 646 © 2006 SAP AG. You must ensure that certain business transactions in process manufacturing may only be carried out if special approvals and identification procedures are followed. You will test this function when maintaining a PI sheet. you will be able to: • • • • • Give a definition for digital signatures and describe their functions and processing Name the applications using digital signatures in the ECC System Execute a digital signature Find and display digital signatures Define a signature strategy and describe how it is applied Business Example You are a member of the project team implementing the SAP System in a pharmaceutical company. In addition.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about realizing the digital signature.

SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Digital Signature: Definition (I) Figure 145: Digital Signature: Definition (I) The digital signature has the same function for processing digital data as the hand-written signature has for paper documents. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 647 . Digital Signature: Definition (II) Figure 146: Digital Signature: Definition (II) You can specify that a user must execute a digital signature to be able to carry out particular business transactions in the ECC System. All rights reserved.

and cannot be manipulated afterwards Depending on the application. the ECC user name and ECC password can be used to sign. you can combine individual signatures of different user groups into application-specific signature strategies Signature Methods Figure 147: Signature Methods 648 © 2006 SAP AG. The digital signature ensures that: • • • A transaction can only be carried out by users with a special authorization The user identification is unique and forgery-proof. the user can or must also enter a comment on the digital signature If a transaction must be signed by several users. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . or an external security software for signature identification (for example. Depending on the signature method. using a card reader) can be connected via an interface The name of the user is documented together with the signed transaction and the date and time.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 The digital signature enables you to meet the security requirements laid down in the guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) with regard to the execution of these transactions.

for example. By doing this. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. After the users identify themselves. All rights reserved. SSF allows you to link several external security products with different identification procedures. 649 . The system supports. the identification and signature execution using chip cards and files. digital signatures can be used as independent units for the protection of data and documents if they are saved to data mediums or are transferred via communication links. The user-specific data (such as the password and private key) is stored on the smart card or encoded on the file.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Linking External Security Products Figure 148: Linking External Security Products The Secure Store and Forwards (SSF) interface is used to realize digital signatures for the signature method User Signature with External Security Product in the ECC System. The digital signature is created on the basis of this data and is returned to the ECC System. document data is transferred to the security product.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Processing of Digital Signatures (I) Figure 149: Processing of Digital Signatures (I) Applying Digital Signatures Figure 150: Applying Digital Signatures 650 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .

• Production Planning for Process Industries (PP-PI) area • – Completing a process step in the PI sheet – Accepting invalid values during input validations in the PI sheet – Approving a batch record Document Management area – Set document status Activating the “Digital Signature” Function Figure 151: Activating the “Digital Signature” Function 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. for example. All rights reserved. the digital signature is implemented for the following transactions: • Quality Management (QM) area: • – Saving inspection results for an inspection lot – Recording and changing the usage decision for an inspection lot – Releasing a physical sample drawing Engineering Change Management (ECH) area – – Changing the status of an engineering change request/order Changing the status of a change object of an engineering change request/order The approval procedures for recipes and inspection plans are. based on the execution of engineering change requests/orders. 651 .SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature At present.

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. a signature consists of just one signature 652 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Digital Signature: Example Figure 152: Digital Signature: Example Signature Strategies Figure 153: Signature Strategies Depending on the application and the setting.

Digital signatures and their application: • • • • PI Sheet: digital signatures with and without signature strategies Batch record: digital signatures with and without signature strategies Engineering change request/order: digital signatures only with signature strategies Quality management: signature strategies for digital signatures are not supported Signature Strategy: Authorization Groups Figure 154: Signature Strategy: Authorization Groups 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. this means. All rights reserved. 653 . which user groups must sign the operation In which sequence the individual signatures must be executed Which signature or signatures can complete the signature process A user may execute a maximum of one signature within a signature strategy.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Dual control. A signature strategy specifies: • • • Which individual signatures are required. or a number of individual signatures stored in a signature strategy.

The authorization groups are not taken into account if a transaction is signed by an individual signature without a signature strategy. In the user master record. All rights reserved. 654 © 2006 SAP AG. Signature Strategy: Individual Signatures Figure 155: Signature Strategy: Individual Signatures An individual signature is a digital signature that must be executed by a certain user group. An individual signature is a partial step in a signature process. you define different authorization groups. you assign each user the authorization for the authorization group corresponding to his or her area of responsibility (authorization object C_SIGN_BGR). you do not need to define individual signatures. 2005/Q2 . You define individual signatures that must be entered by users of a certain authorization group and use them in the signature strategies for a business transaction.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 You can use authorization groups to restrict the authorization to execute digital signatures as follows: • • • For users with different areas of responsibility. If you only want to use one signature without a signature strategy to sign a transaction. Individual signatures of different user groups are combined in signature strategies that are carried out when a transaction is signed.

655 . which specify which signature or signatures can complete the signature process. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. proceed as follows: • • • • 2005/Q2 Enter a key and a description for the signature strategy. Define the release statuses. Assign the individual signatures to be used.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Defining Signature Strategies Figure 156: Defining Signature Strategies To create a new signature strategy. Specify the sequence of the individual signatures.

2005/Q2 . When executing the signature strategy. 656 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Signature Strategy: Assign Individual Signatures Figure 157: Signature Strategy: Assign Individual Signatures You assign the individual signatures that must or can be executed when carrying out a signature strategy. You can assign the same individual signature several times or assign several different individual signatures with the same authorization group. each user of the authorization group may only execute one signature. All rights reserved.

You specify the signature sequence by selecting the predecessors for each individual signature in a sequence matrix. 657 .SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Signature Strategy: Define Signature Sequence Figure 158: Signature Strategy: Define Signature Sequence You determine the sequence in which the individual signatures of a signature strategy must be executed. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

658 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . You define a release status by selecting the required signature combination in the overview of the possible signature combinations. For each release status. If you do not define a release status for a signature strategy.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Signature Strategy: Define Release Statuses Figure 159: Signature Strategy: Define Release Statuses You define one or more alternative release statuses for a signature strategy. you also specify a combination of individual signatures with which the signature process can be completed. All rights reserved. A signature process is not complete until all signatures for a release status have been executed. all individual signatures of the signature strategy must be executed in every signature process.

659 . engineering change order. or a batch record from the object itself.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Signature Strategy: Example Figure 160: Signature Strategy: Example Displaying and Finding Digital Signatures Figure 161: Displaying and Finding Digital Signatures You can display a signature executed for an inspection lot. All rights reserved. PI sheet. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

and time. Digital Signature: Topic Summary • • • • • 660 You can specify that a user must execute a digital signature to be able to carry out particular business transactions in the ECC System. such as: • • • Signatory Creation date and time Object type for which the signature was executed (for example. date. The SSF interface enables the linking of various external security products supporting different identification procedures. and cannot be forged. engineering change order or inspection lot) You obtain a list of the objects for which digital signatures have been executed.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 For reporting purposes. you can search for digital signatures based on a number of different criteria. The digital signature ensures that a user is uniquely identified and that the user name is documented together with the signed transaction. You can choose between the signature methods System signature with authorization by ECC user ID and ECC password and User signature with external security product. You can define signature strategies containing individual signatures of different user groups. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG. You can navigate to the objects from the list and display all of the signatures for them.

661 . Describe how the digital signature is linked to external security products and how it is processed. All rights reserved. Task 1: 1. you will be able to: • Describe the definition and function of digital signatures • Describe the linking of external security products • Describe the processing of digital signatures • Name the applications using digital signatures in the ECC System Business Example You will get an overview of the topic “Digital Signatures”.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Exercise 39: Digital Signature: Definition and Application Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Give a definition and describe the function of digital signatures. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

2005/Q2 . In which applications can the digital signature be used at the moment? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 662 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 3: 1. All rights reserved.

SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Solution 39: Digital Signature: Definition and Application Task 1: 1. refer to the pages Linking External Security Products and Processing Digital Signatures in your training manual. Task 2: 1. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For more information about the process of digital signature execution. All rights reserved. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) To answer this question. 663 . Give a definition and describe the function of digital signatures. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. (II) in your participant handbook. Describe how the digital signature is linked to external security products and how it is processed. see the pages Digital Signature: (I).

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. see the pages Applications Using Digital Signatures and Activating the Digital Signature Function in your participant handbook. In which applications can the digital signature be used at the moment? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) 664 To answer this question. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 3: 1.

You will maintain a PI sheet for this control recipe destination and execute a digital signature. All rights reserved. 665 . you will be able to: • Activate the Digital Signature function for a control recipe destination • Execute and display a digital signature in the PI sheet • Define a signature strategy in Customizing • Process a signature strategy in the PI sheet • Search for digital signatures Business Example You will activate the Digital Signature function for a control recipe destination. You will work with the signature strategy in the PI sheet and display the signatures you execute. You will define a signature strategy for the control recipe destination.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Exercise 40: Individual Signatures and Signature Strategies Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You will become familiar with signature strategy details. You will display the signature in the PI sheet.

Release the order. Task 2: 1. generate the control recipes. ##/A CERM 1. Check whether the Digital Signature indicator has been set. and. display the detail data of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A (destination address GRP. 2005/Q2 . the control recipe destinations are assigned to the participant groups as follows: Control recipe destination For groups C0 to C9 00 to 09 D0 to D9 10 to 19 E0 to E9 20 to 29 F0 30 Description of the control recipe destination: Operator Group ##/A Destination address: GRP. Choose 1000 kg as an order quantity and today’s date as the start date. Task 3: 1. send the control recipe to control recipe destination address GRP. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. In Customizing. All rights reserved. Display the signature methods set up in Customizing.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 1: Note: For the following exercises. ##/A CERM) for plant 1100. Continued on next page 666 © 2006 SAP AG. ##/A CERM. Make sure that the signature method System signature with authorization by SAP R/3 user ID/password is defined for the signing of process steps in the PI sheet and the accepting of invalid values in the PI sheet. in the control recipe monitor.

___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. Describe the function of signature strategies. Confirm the start of phase 11 by entering your Digital Signature. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Task 4: Find and maintain your PI sheet for the control recipe destination above. Sign with your user name and confirm with your SAP ECC password. 2. Finish processing phase 11. Do not process phase 12 yet. Display the digital signature in the PI sheet. Hint: You maintain an ABAP list-based PI sheet in this scenario. Save and exit the PI sheet. 667 . Task 5: 1. Task 6: 1. make the following changes in the detail data of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A of plant 1100: Enter the following: Signature strategy for deviations: PI_VALID Do not define a signature strategy for process steps. 3. In Customizing.

2005/Q2 . 2. Indiv.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 7: Familiarize yourself with the Customizing settings for the selected signature strategy before further maintaining the PI sheet. All rights reserved. 1. Call up the Customizing activity Define Signature Strategy. signature description AGrpDigSig Display the signature sequences defined for strategy PI_VALID. Write down the following: Indiv. Display individual signatures defined for strategy PI_VALID. Continued on next page 668 © 2006 SAP AG. Write down the following: Signatures to be executed Predecessor signatures SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P Try to draw a graphic of the signature sequence.sig.

Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Did you have to follow a signature strategy to confirm the start of the phase? ______________________________________________________ Why not? ______________________________________________________ 2. Display the release statuses defined for strategy PI_VALID.7. Sign with your user name and confirm with your SAP ECC password. All rights reserved. Write down the following: Release statuses Indiv. 669 . In the next step. Confirm the start of phase 12 by entering your Digital Signature.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature 3. enter a pH value of 4. 1. Task 8: Continue maintaining your PI sheet for control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A. signatures required for release SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P Try to draw a graphic of the release statuses.

All rights reserved. signature Signatory SIGN_A MILLER_A SIGN_S SMITH_S SIGN_Q JONES_Q SIGN_P KING_P Enter a comment for each individual signature. several different people of different authorization groups must execute individual signatures according to a signature strategy. To actually accept this value. In the production process. 4. Confirm the individual signatures with the password SONNE. Search for the digital signatures you have executed so far in your PI sheet via the corresponding evaluation function in process management. Which signature strategy is to be followed? Why? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Use the following user names to execute the individual signatures defined in the strategy: Indiv.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Pay attention to the result of the input validation. 2005/Q2 . Choose reasonable selection criteria. Display the comment for a signature. The value you entered is outside of the tolerance defined in planning. Task 9: 1. 670 © 2006 SAP AG. You must therefore accept it. such as the number of your PI sheet. display the digital signatures you executed above with regard to the strategy type PI_VALID. Save and exit the PI sheet. it was not possible to change this value. Display all the signatures executed for the PI sheet. 3. Execute the individual signatures until a release status has been reached. In the PI sheet.

##/A CERM) for plant 1100. Display the signature methods set up in Customizing. a) Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Control Recipes/PI Sheets → Control Recipe Destinations → Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations Plant: 1100 Double-click on the line of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A. In Customizing. 671 . Task 2: 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. display the detail data of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A (destination address GRP. The Digital Signature indicator is set. the control recipe destinations are assigned to the participant groups as follows: Control recipe destination For groups C0 to C9 00 to 09 D0 to D9 10 to 19 E0 to E9 20 to 29 F0 30 Description of the control recipe destination: Operator Group ##/A Destination address: GRP. ##/A CERM 1. Check whether the Digital Signature indicator has been set.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Solution 40: Individual Signatures and Signature Strategies Task 1: Note: For the following exercises.

Finish processing phase 11. Save and exit the PI sheet. Hint: You maintain an ABAP list-based PI sheet in this scenario. send the control recipe to control recipe destination address GRP. Task 3: 1. a) (See description in exercise. a) Customizing: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Control Recipes / PI Sheets → Digital Signatures → Specify Signature Method for Approval Using Simple Signature The signature method System signature with authorization by R/3 user ID/password is defined for the signing of process steps in the PI sheet and the accepting of invalid values in the PI sheet. no further details required) Task 4: Find and maintain your PI sheet for the control recipe destination above. 1. a) 3. and. in the control recipe monitor. ##/A CERM. Display the digital signature in the PI sheet. a) No further details required Continued on next page 672 © 2006 SAP AG. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-CERM-## in plant 1100. All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Make sure that the signature method System signature with authorization by SAP R/3 user ID/password is defined for the signing of process steps in the PI sheet and the accepting of invalid values in the PI sheet. Do not process phase 12 yet. Sign with your user name and confirm with your SAP ECC password. generate the control recipes. Choose 1000 kg as an order quantity and today’s date as the start date. No further details required Position your cursor on your signature in the PI sheet and choose Signature. Release the order. Confirm the start of phase 11 by entering your Digital Signature. 2005/Q2 . a) 2.

make the following changes in the detail data of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A of plant 1100: Enter the following: Signature strategy for deviations: PI_VALID Do not define a signature strategy for process steps. see the page Signature Strategies in your participant handbook. 1. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) For information on the function of signature strategies.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Task 5: 1. Task 7: Familiarize yourself with the Customizing settings for the selected signature strategy before further maintaining the PI sheet. All rights reserved. Task 6: 1. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Call up the Customizing activity Define Signature Strategy. In Customizing. Display individual signatures defined for strategy PI_VALID. Signature strategy for deviations: PI_VALID Save the changes for your control recipe destination. Describe the function of signature strategies. 673 . a) Customizing: (…) → Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destination Plant: 1100 Double-click on the line of your control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A.

All rights reserved. Write down the following: Signatures to be executed Predecessor signatures SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P Continued on next page 674 © 2006 SAP AG.sig.. Indiv. a) Indiv. signature description AGrpDigSig Customizing: (.. 2. choose → Assign individual signatures.) → Process Management → Control Recipes/PI Sheets → Digital Signatures → Signature Strategy → Define Signature Strategies On the overview screen for signature strategies.sig.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Write down the following: Indiv. 2005/Q2 . choose the line for strategy PI_VALID and in the dialog structure. Indiv. signature description AGrpDigSig SIGN_A Process operator approval PIA SIGN_S Shift manager approval PIS SIGN_Q Quality manager approval PIQ SIGN_P Production director approval PIP Display the signature sequences defined for strategy PI_VALID.

a) On the overview screen for signature strategies. Signatures to be executed Predecessor signatures SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P SIGN_A SIGN_S X SIGN_Q X SIGN_P X X A display of this signature sequence in graphical form can be found on the Signature Strategy: Define Signature Sequence page in your participant handbook. 675 . Write down the following: Release statuses Indiv. choose the line for strategy PI_VALID and choose Signatures. signatures required for release SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Display the release statuses defined for strategy PI_VALID.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Try to draw a graphic of the signature sequence. 3. All rights reserved.

a) On the overview screen for signature strategies.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Try to draw a graphic of the release statuses. Confirm the start of phase 12 by entering your Digital Signature. Sign with your user name and confirm with your SAP ECC password. All rights reserved. Task 8: Continue maintaining your PI sheet for control recipe destination Operator Group ##/A. signatures required for release SIGN_A SIGN_S SIGN_Q SIGN_P X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X A display of these release statuses in graphical form can be found on the Signature Strategy: Define Release Statuses page in your participant handbook. Did you have to follow a signature strategy to confirm the start of the phase? ______________________________________________________ Why not? Continued on next page 676 © 2006 SAP AG. 1. 2005/Q2 . Release statuses Indiv. choose the line for strategy PI_VALID and choose Release.

Which signature strategy is to be followed? Why? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Use the following user names to execute the individual signatures defined in the strategy: Indiv. All rights reserved. it was not possible to change this value. In the detail data for your control recipe destination. In the production process. Pay attention to the result of the input validation.SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature ______________________________________________________ a) In this case. 2. To actually accept this value. no strategy is defined in the field Signature strategy for process steps (compare exercise 5). enter a pH value of 4. You must therefore accept it. In the next step. no signature strategy must be followed. The value you entered is outside of the tolerance defined in planning. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. several different people of different authorization groups must execute individual signatures according to a signature strategy. signature Signatory SIGN_A MILLER_A SIGN_S SMITH_S SIGN_Q JONES_Q SIGN_P KING_P Enter a comment for each individual signature. Confirm the individual signatures with the password SONNE. 677 .7.

a) Position your cursor on the pH value containing errors in the PI sheet and choose Signature.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Execute the individual signatures until a release status has been reached. Choose Copy.7 The PI Sheet: Maintain dialog box appears. Here the result of the input validation containing errors is displayed. The Digital Signature: Executing A Signature Strategy dialog box appears. To display the comment for a signature. Execute the individual signatures as described in the exercise. position the cursor on the relevant line and choose Display comment. 4. you defined the strategy PI_VALID in the field Signature strategy for deviations (compare exercise 5). Signature strategy PI_VALID must be followed. 3. a) No instruction required Task 9: 1. Search for the digital signatures you have executed so far in your PI sheet via the corresponding evaluation function in process management. display the digital signatures you executed above with regard to the strategy type PI_VALID. Display the comment for a signature. such as the number of your PI sheet. Continued on next page 678 © 2006 SAP AG. You exit the Digital Signature: Executing A Signature Strategy dialog box when a release status is reached. All rights reserved. In the detail data for your control recipe destination. 2005/Q2 . Save and exit the PI sheet. a) pH value: 4. Choose reasonable selection criteria. In the PI sheet.

SCM340 Lesson: Digital Signature Display all the signatures executed for the PI sheet. the number of your PI sheet as the selection criteria (or choose other reasonable selection criteria). All rights reserved. enter. a) Logistics → Production . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Choose Execute (F8). for example. 679 .Process → Process Management → Evaluations → Find Digital Signatures The Find Digital Signatures screen appears. In the PI sheet group box. Position your cursor on the number of the PI sheet and choose All signatures.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Give a definition for digital signatures and describe their functions and processing • Name the applications using digital signatures in the ECC System • Execute a digital signature • Find and display digital signatures • Define a signature strategy and describe how it is applied 680 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.

company-specific approval procedure must be followed when creating and changing master recipes. You will create approved process orders and test a user-defined approval procedure to change these orders. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You must make sure that certain production procedures are only carried out based on approved recipes and approved process orders. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders Lesson: Approved Process Orders Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about approved process orders. 681 . you will be able to: • • Create approved process orders Change approved process orders Business Example You are a member of the project team implementing the SAP System in a pharmaceutical company. Recipe Approval (I) Figure 162: Recipe Approval (I) You can specify that a detailed.

All rights reserved. The approval procedure was also implemented for inspection plans. The change process using an engineering change request comprises three main steps: Creating an engineering change request Checking an engineering change request and converting it into an engineering change order Changing objects and completing the change For a master recipe marked with change type "With engineering change order". 682 © 2006 SAP AG. Recipes that have already been approved but are changed using another change order are considered as unapproved during the period between the conversion and release for the change period defined by the valid-from date.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Once the procedure has been released. this process represents an approval procedure. 2005/Q2 . the maintained recipe is marked as Approved recipe for the change period defined by the valid-from date of the change request. the edited recipe is marked as Approved recipe. Once the procedure has been released. Recipe Approval (II) Figure 163: Recipe Approval (II) The engineering change orders of ECC Engineering Management are the basis for the approval procedure.

683 . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Process orders can be approved in either of the following ways: By selecting an approved recipe when creating the process order. All rights reserved. You can specify that specific authorizations are required to change other order data. or By approving the process order individually after it has been created Only MRP data can be changed for an approved process order. The above functions are implemented in ECC process order management and ECC status management. Approved Process Orders Figure 164: Approved Process Orders You can specify that the process orders of a specific order type must have been approved before they can be released. such as to convert a change request into a change order and release a change order.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders You can define that a digital signature is required for particular process steps.

All rights reserved. You can specify that a special authorization is required to carry out the Withdraw approval and Individual approval functions. The order is then reassigned the APG status and the status APGS Single approval granted. © 2006 SAP AG. This means that all process order data may now be changed again.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Changing Approved Process Orders: Example Figure 165: Changing Approved Process Orders: Example You can use the Withdraw approval function in the process order to reset the system statuses APG and APRC. Approved Process Orders: Topic Summary • • • • 684 You can specify that process orders of a specific order type have to be approved. A process order can be approved by selecting an approved recipe when creating the process order or by approving the order individually after it has been created. To reset the APNG status. The system status APNG Approval not granted is set again. 2005/Q2 . You can do so by prohibiting or permitting these transactions for certain user statuses. Only MRP data can be changed for an approved process order. you must carry out the Individual approval function in the process order. The order data is now again locked against changes. You can use a user status profile to define the change procedure for approved process orders.

All rights reserved. set the Approval required and Batch record required indicators. Task 1: 1. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Save your settings. You will use a user status profile to represent an approval procedure in the order. you will be able to: • Make Customizing settings for order approval • Describe an approved recipe • Create an approved order on the basis of an approved recipe • Withdraw order approval • Perform individual order approval Business Example In Customizing. Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. Which functions do these indicators have? If required use the field help (F1) to answer this question. You will test the functions of withdrawing order approval and individual approval. On the Master data tab. You create a process order based on an approved recipe whereby the order itself is approved.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders Exercise 41: Approved Process Orders Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. 685 . you will define that process orders must be approved for your order type-dependent parameters.

The recipe describes the production of which material? ______________________________________________________ Task 4: 1. Which recipe did the system select for order creation? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 686 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . With reference to which change order has the recipe been approved? Display the administrative data of the recipe to answer this question. Assign user status profile PI_APPR. changes to a phase). Approved process orders to your order type PO## in Customizing. Note that you can define a specific authorization that is required to set a user status. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 3. Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB2## in plant 1100. Task 3: 1. All rights reserved. Try to make changes in master recipe T-TAB##.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 2: 1. Note: The user status profile determines that you can only withdraw and grant process order approval by setting the corresponding user status. Enter 100 000 PC as the order quantity. recipe 10 (for example. Change number: ___________________________________________ 5. 2. 2. What do you need to do to make changes to the recipe? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 4.

SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders 3. Try to withdraw the order approval. Withdraw the order approval. Try to change data other than MRP data (for example. Try to release the order. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ Display the status information for the message. Try to manually approve the order in individual processing. Why can you not release the order at the moment? ______________________________________________________ 9. 7. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ Display the status information for the message. Why can you not withdraw the approval at present? ______________________________________________________ 6.approv. Set the user status WDAL Withdr. make changes to the data of a phase). allowed/no indiv. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ 5. Which new system status is set? ____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Can you now change data other than MRP data? ______________________________________________________ 8. Which system and user statuses were set with regard to order approval when you created the order? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 4. 687 . All rights reserved.

2005/Q2 . Why can you not approve the order individually at the moment? _____________________________________________________ 10. Which new system and user statuses were set after the individual approval? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Can you still change data other than MRP data? ______________________________________________________ Finally. save your order and write down the order number.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Display the status information for the message. 11. Set the user status IAAL Individual approval allowed. Individually approve the order. Display all change documents for the status changes. ______________________________________________________ 12. All rights reserved. 688 © 2006 SAP AG. Display your order once again.

a) Master data tab page: X Approval required X Batch record required Save your settings. 689 . 2. Approved process orders to your order type PO## in Customizing. Display the order type-dependent parameters for plant 1100 and order type PO## in Customizing.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders Solution 41: Approved Process Orders Task 1: 1. On the Master data tab. a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Type-Dependent Parameters Double-click on the line for plant 1100 and order type PO##. set the Approval required and Batch record required indicators. Which functions do these indicators have? If required use the field help (F1) to answer this question. Assign user status profile PI_APPR. All rights reserved. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Task 2: 1. _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Save your settings.

With reference to which change order has the recipe been approved? Display the administrative data of the recipe to answer this question. Status profile: PI_APPR Save the new entry for the order type.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Change Recipe group:T-TAB##. 4. a) Logistics → Production . All rights reserved. The operation overview appears. Continued on next page 690 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Note: The user status profile determines that you can only withdraw and grant process order approval by setting the corresponding user status. Recipe: 10 2. changes to a phase). a) Customizing: (…) → Process Order → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types Double-click on your order type PO##. recipe 10 (for example. “Basic Data for Process Manufacturing”. The system issues the following message: You cannot change task list/recipe 1 because of change rule 3. Note that you can define a specific authorization that is required to set a user status. Try to make changes in master recipe T-TAB##. 2005/Q2 . . Choose Enter. Task 3: 1. Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) 3. What do you need to do to make changes to the recipe? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) You must create an engineering change order to make changes to the recipe. Making recipe changes using an engineering change order represents an approval procedure for the master recipe. We have dealt with the topic Recipe Approval Using Engineering Change Orders in the training course PLM115.

The recipe describes the production of which material? ______________________________________________________ a) Recipe header tab page Choose Material assignments Material: T-HTB2## Cetepharm-N tablet Task 4: 1.000 PC Start: Any start date in the future Enter 2. a) Logistics → Production . Create a process order of order type PO## for material T-HTB2## in plant 1100. Which system and user statuses were set with regard to order approval when you created the order? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Which recipe did the system select for order creation? _____________________________________________________ a) Master data tab in the order header. Enter 100 000 PC as the order quantity.Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material no. 691 . All rights reserved. The system selected recipe 10 of recipe group T-TAB##.: T-HTB2## Production plant: 1100 Process order type: PO## Enter Total quantity: 100.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders Change number: ___________________________________________ a) Administrative data tab page Change number: CR## 5. 3.

a) Choose the Status icon on the status line in the order header. What do you notice? ______________________________________________________ a) 5. The following message is displayed: User status APWD is active. Choose Status information. allowed/no indiv. Set the user status WDAL Withdr. make changes to the data of a phase). All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose the Status icon in the status line. Set the user status WDAL Withdr. 2005/Q2 . Changes are not allowed if the order has status APG. The system issues the following message: The business transaction cannot be carried out.approv. The system sets user status WDAL. Try to change data other than MRP data (for example.approv. Withdraw the order approval. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ Display the status information for the message. user status APWD is withdrawn. Why can you not withdraw the approval at present? ______________________________________________________ a) Process order → Functions → Approval → Withdraw approval. Try to withdraw the order approval. 6. allowed/no indiv. System status: APG Approval granted APRC Based on approved recipe User status: APWD Approval withdrawal locked 4. Which new system status is set? Continued on next page 692 © 2006 SAP AG. 7. At the same time.

Choose Status information. Try to release the order. Try to manually approve the order in individual processing. All rights reserved. Why can you not release the order at the moment? ______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Release icon The system issues the following message: The business transaction cannot be carried out. 693 . Which message does the system issue? _____________________________________________________ Display the status information for the message.SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders ____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Can you now change data other than MRP data? ______________________________________________________ a) Process order → Functions → Approval → Withdraw approval APNG Approval not granted APRS Approval withdrawn You can now change order data other than MRP data. 9. The following message is displayed: System status APNG is active. Why can you not approve the order individually at the moment? _____________________________________________________ a) Process order → Functions → Approval → Individual approval The system issues the following message: The business transaction cannot be carried out. Which message does the system issue? ______________________________________________________ Display the status information for the message. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 8. Choose Status information. The following message is displayed: User status WDAL is active.

Individually approve the order. 12. 11. choose: Extras → Change Documents → All. a) (…) Process Order → Display Choose the Status icon on the status line. Save your order and write down the order number. 2005/Q2 . Which new system and user statuses were set after the individual approval? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Can you still change data other than MRP data? ______________________________________________________ Finally. 694 © 2006 SAP AG. ______________________________________________________ a) Process order → Functions → Approval → Individual approval System status: APG Approval granted APGS Single approval granted User status: APWD Approval withdrawal locked You cannot change data other than MRP data any more.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 10. a) Choose the Status icon on the status line in the order header. All rights reserved. save your order and write down the order number. user status APWD is withdrawn. Display all change documents for the status changes. Set the user status IAAL Individual approval allowed. The system sets user status IAAL. Set the user status IAAL Individual approval allowed. On the Display Status screen. Display your order once again. At the same time.

SCM340 Lesson: Approved Process Orders Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create approved process orders • Change approved process orders 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 695 .

you will be able to: • • • Use the picking function to pack material components into handling units Carry out a completeness check to identify the material components staged Perform quantity reconciliation for the materials involved in the process Business Example You are a member of the project team implementing the SAP System in a pharmaceutical company.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the functions of material identification and material reconciliation. All rights reserved. you want to be able to carry out reconciliation of the material quantities used and produced after production. In addition. You must make sure that the materials used for production can be uniquely identified at the production line. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. 2005/Q2 . 696 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. Packaging materials are materials that close or hold together the packed goods. all goods movements are performed based on input from the corresponding HUs. Handling Unit Management • • Control of logistical processes using handling units Instead of visualizing the movements of individual materials. containers. wire baskets. and pallets. and inventory management takes place via the handling units. the movement of the handling units that contain these materials is visualized You can use handling units in all processes in the supply chain. 697 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation Handling Unit Figure 166: Handling Unit A handling unit is always a combination of materials and packaging materials. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. In an HU-managed storage location. Packaged and unpackaged materials cannot be managed at the same storage location. In HU-managed storage locations. Furthermore. If you do not work with HU-managed storage locations. If you unpack a material from an HU. the stock of the material is posted at a storage location that is not HU-managed. The packaging material can be a load carrier. materials can only be managed in HUs. you can work with handling units (without inventory information) in delivery and in transportation. Some of the most important packaging materials are boxes. Handling units contain all inventory management information for the materials packed in them and managed in inventory management. the packed goods can be packed in or on the packaging material.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 The movability of the handling unit can be restricted in an active quality check. This allows you to more easily direct raw materials in production. Production Supply Figure 167: Production Supply This function visualizes the typical physical material flow from the central storage location to the production lines. resources. 698 © 2006 SAP AG. Although a handling unit always represents the same unit. Changes to the stock category due to a successful quality check take place via a posting change of the handling unit. 2005/Q2 . A handling unit has a history that describes each business transaction affecting it. you can change it by repacking it. All rights reserved. The production supply can be organized using handling units (HUs). and so on. Reporting is available.

You can do the following: • • • Pack each batch of a material in one or more HUs. batches. The system uses the selection criteria defined for batch determination for the check. Pack several batches of a material or several materials in an HU Pack HUs in other HUs The following activities are performed: • • • You enter the materials. a second PI sheet should be generated. The system checks the batches you have entered to see if they meet the required selection criteria. The components that are assigned to the process order but are not yet picked (open reservations) are listed so you can check them. All rights reserved. For the actual production. and quantities that will be picked for the process order. 699 . You pack the materials in HUs and can also pack the HUs in higher-level HUs. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation Manual Picking with Process Orders Figure 168: Manual Picking with Process Orders You use this function to manually enter packed HUs. It is a good idea to have picking for a process order take place via a separate PI sheet.

The materials required for the process order are weighed. or measured and packed in handling units. The ingredients must be staged as pick-HUs.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Automatic Picking with Process Orders Figure 169: Automatic Picking with Process Orders You use this function when materials are picked for a process order using an external weighing system. filled. 2005/Q2 . Material Identification (I) Figure 170: Material Identification (I) You can use this function to identify and verify ingredients at the production line. The messages from the external weighing system are transferred to the SAP ECC System via the PI-PCS interface. All rights reserved. 700 © 2006 SAP AG.

You can perform a completeness check or sequence check at the start of: • • Production for the whole process order An operation or phase The goods issue posting for the components is carried out at HU level. 701 . You use the sequence check to ensure that the sequence of the components to be used is correct. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation Material Identification (II) Figure 171: Material Identification (II) Material identification is performed in the PI sheet using dynamic function calls. All rights reserved. It comprises the following functions: • • • • • Completeness check Sequence check Automatic goods issue posting (GI-posting) after successful completeness or sequence check Automatic transfer of data from material identification to the batch record Check that picking is complete You use the completeness check to ensure that the HUs that were picked for the process order are staged at the production line.

you can ensure that there are no invalid inconsistencies between the ingredients and the yield. 2005/Q2 .Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Material Reconciliation Figure 172: Material Reconciliation You use this function to analyze and verify the ingredients and yield at the end of the production process. as well as all goods withdrawals with all returns and all reversals. all goods receipts with all returns and all reversals. © 2006 SAP AG. By checking the yield and reconciliating the quantities of the ingredients. for example. You can use the material identification functions to check the completeness and sequence of the material components staged. Using material reconciliation. The goods movements for the process order form the basis for material reconciliation. Material Identification and Material Reconciliation: Topic Summary • • • 702 A picking function for packing material components in handling units is available. you can ensure that there are no invalid quantity inconsistencies with regard to the materials involved in the process. All rights reserved.

you will be able to: • Perform picking in handling units • Perform a material identification / completeness check Business Example You can use the Material Identification function to check whether the material that was picked for the process order is completely available at the production line and will be used in the correct sequence. In the first PI sheet. you will then use the completeness check to identify the handling units staged at the production line. All rights reserved. Enter the value 134°C for the batch characteristic melting point. 703 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation Exercise 42: Material Identification Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.000 g in storage location 0002 of plant 1100. you will pick the material components of your process order in handling units. Post 1. In the second PI sheet. Post a goods issue for material T-HTB1##. Use movement type 501. Task 1: Preparation: 1.000.

Maintain phase 130. Send the four control recipes. If you want. Continued on next page 704 © 2006 SAP AG. The system created four control recipes for the different areas in the plant. the system will issue an error message. Important: Carefully select the PI sheet by entering your order number to avoid interferences with the other course participants. Task 3: Select the control recipes for the order in the control recipe monitor. 2. which would then be displayed in the next PI sheet. Execute your signature to confirm the successful picking. 4. First. In phase 120.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 2: Release the process order for material T-HTB2## that you created for the previous topic for production and create the control recipes for the order. Maintain phase 210. 1. 1. 2005/Q2 . Task 5: Select the messages that have been created for the order so far and send them. Task 6: Now maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Granulating for your order. Task 4: Find and maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Scales for your order. Then pick the required material components in handling units. you can enter a long text. All rights reserved. maintain phase 110 by executing the required digital signatures. you can call up document SOP 123-01 for more information about the weighing instructions. If you try to execute the signatures in a sequence different to the one defined. Note that the long text you entered in the previous PI sheet is now displayed. 3. You cannot process phase 120 until phase 110 has been processed completely. Note the details described in the solutions for this exercise. Exit the PI sheet when you have maintained it completely.

3. Note the details described in the solutions for this exercise.Input validations . The next process steps comprise different other PI sheet functions. in the material reconciliation carry out a completeness check for the materials staged. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.Processing input tables . such as: . Task 7: Select the messages that have been created by maintaining the two PI sheets in the message monitor and send them.Time calculations . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation 2. Execute your signature to confirm the successful material identification. In phase 220.Process data calculations Exit the PI sheet. You do not necessarily need to maintain the PI sheet further. 705 .

1. Use movement type 501. Important: Carefully select the PI sheet by entering your order number to avoid interferences with the other course participants. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. maintain phase 110 by executing the required digital signatures. The system created four control recipes for the different areas in the plant. Task 3: Select the control recipes for the order in the control recipe monitor. Send the four control recipes.000.000.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Solution 42: Material Identification Task 1: Preparation: 1. a) Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → Other Movement type 501 Plant: 1100 Storage location: 0002 Material: T-HTB1## Quantity: 1. Task 4: Find and maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Scales for your order. First. Post 1. Post a goods issue for material T-HTB1##. Continued on next page 706 © 2006 SAP AG.000 g Melting point: 134°C Task 2: Release the process order for material T-HTB2## that you created for the previous topic for production and create the control recipes for the order. Enter the value 134°C for the batch characteristic melting point.000 g in storage location 0002 of plant 1100.

SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation If you try to execute the signatures in a sequence different to the one defined. All rights reserved. a) 4. The stainless steel container T-VERP199 is proposed as the packaging material. 3. You cannot process phase 120 until phase 110 has been processed completely. the system will issue an error message. The system assigns an HU number to every reservation number. Select the line with a reservation and choose the Selection of valid packing mat. Select all reservation items with a requirement quantity not equal to zero. No further details required In phase 120. The reservations you selected were copied. you can enter a long text. The Picking for Manufacturing Order screen appears. The Materials tab appears. No further details required Exit the PI sheet when you have maintained it completely. you can call up document SOP 123-01 for more information about the weighing instructions. Maintain phase 130. Now choose Pack for all four reservations one after the other. 707 . Execute your signature to confirm the successful picking. Use the proposed packaging material. a) Picking: Choose Picking. Choose the Open reservations tab. which would then be displayed in the next PI sheet. If you want. icon. Then pick the required material components in handling units. a) No further details required Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Save your picking. Choose Copy. Note the details described in the solutions for this exercise. a) 2.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 5: Select the messages that have been created for the order so far and send them. Now enter the HU number assigned by the system for every material in the Handling unit field. A green checkmark in the Status field for the material component shows the successful identification. You do not necessarily need to maintain the PI sheet further. 3. in the material reconciliation carry out a completeness check for the materials staged. such as: Continued on next page 708 © 2006 SAP AG. a) 2. All rights reserved. Execute your signature to confirm the successful material identification. Choose Enter to confirm each entry. check picking by choosing Check picking. Maintain phase 210. Task 6: Now maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Granulating for your order. Note that the long text you entered in the previous PI sheet is now displayed. Then enter any number in the Handling unit field and choose Enter to confirm. Save your completeness check. No further details required In phase 220. The next process steps comprise different other PI sheet functions. 1. 2005/Q2 . First. The following message appears: Handling unit not relevant for order/operation. Note the details described in the solutions for this exercise. a) Material identification / completeness check: Choose Completeness check. The Material Identification: Completeness screen appears.

Process data calculations Exit the PI sheet. a) No further details required Task 7: Select the messages that have been created by maintaining the two PI sheets in the message monitor and send them.Input validations . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.Processing input tables .Time calculations . All rights reserved. 709 .SCM340 Lesson: Material Identification and Material Reconciliation .

All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 .Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the picking function to pack material components into handling units • Carry out a completeness check to identify the material components staged • Perform quantity reconciliation for the materials involved in the process 710 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. you will test the simultaneous value assignment to batches you have produced. You will create an inspection lot with reference to a process order and carry out in-process quality inspections. you will test the functions for quality inspection in production. you will be able to: • • • • Outline the main steps that must be followed in master data maintenance to carry out an in-process quality inspection Describe the functions of inspection lots and create an inspection lot for in-process quality inspection Describe possible scenarios of an in-process quality inspection Carry out in-process quality inspections with batch value assignment Business Example As a member of the SAP project team. Quality Inspections in Production Figure 173: Quality Inspections in Production 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 711 . Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the in-process quality inspection. In this context.

They are then transferred to the inspection lot. up to the usage decision. you can check the product quality at the following points in time: • • During the production process When the product is delivered to the warehouse Inspection Lot Figure 174: Inspection Lot The functions of quality inspection of the ECC System are fully integrated into the entire logistics process. The inspection requests are maintained for the operations or phases of the master recipe the process order is based on. Inspection results are recorded for the inspection characteristics of the inspection lot when the process order is carried out. A quality inspection can only be carried out if an inspection lot is created. sales). Inspection plans are master data of ECC QM. During in-process inspection taking place in parallel to the production process. They can be created automatically or manually for the corresponding application. the inspection lot is created on the basis of an inspection plan maintained in ECC QM. the inspection lot is either created manually or automatically from within the process order when you release the order. 712 © 2006 SAP AG. procurement. All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 In production. from inspection specifications over inspection results recording. In other tasks. production. Inspection lots document the entire inspection process. 2005/Q2 . such as a goods receipt (post-process inspection). They affect all business activities (such as product planning.

for production orders in the material master of the material to be produced. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. For the system to be able to do so. the inspection lot is created on the basis of the master recipe on which the the process order is based. The inspection characteristics for the operations or phases of the master recipe are then transferred to the corresponding inspection operations of the inspection lot. You can either create the inspection lot manually or the system creates it automatically when you release the process order. you can also add unplanned inspection characteristics from within the process order. 713 . In the master recipe. you maintain inspection specifications in the form of inspection characteristics for the corresponding operations or phases. Later.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management In-Process Inspection: Inspection Lot Figure 175: In-Process Inspection: Inspection Lot In an in-process quality inspection. you must activate an inspection type In-process insp.

you must activate an inspection type Goods Receipt Inspection for Order in the material master record.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Inspection at Goods Receipt: Inspection Lot Figure 176: Inspection at Goods Receipt: Inspection Lot You can also check the product quality for a goods receipt from production. Inspection plans are master data of ECC QM. All rights reserved. an inspection lot is created based on an inspection plan maintained in ECC QM. For goods receipt quality inspections. In this case. Inspection Processing Figure 177: Inspection Processing 714 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

you can directly navigate to QM Inspection Results Recording. From within the PI sheet. Valuation can be carried out automatically or manually. ECC QM uses this interface to transfer process instructions to the LIMS. Different kinds of valuation procedures are available for this. 2005/Q2 Inspection results can be recorded by sending process messages from a process control system or a PI sheet. In-Process Inspection: Scenarios Figure 178: In-Process Inspection: Scenarios There are several ways to record inspection results in an in-process quality inspection: 1. An interface is available to link external laboratory information systems (LIMS) to ECC Quality Management. 3. the inspection characteristics must be valuated. Depending on the valuation. All rights reserved. 715 . After the results of an inspection are recorded. 4. sends inspection results back to ECC QM. You can also use the corresponding transactions of ECC QM to record inspection results during the production process. Quality inspection is completed when you have made a usage decision for the entire inspection lot. the characteristics are accepted or rejected. 2.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management The recording of inspection results is carried out by recording the inspection results for the inspection values assigned to the inspection lot. in return. which. © 2006 SAP AG.

716 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. The system calls the inspection characteristics for the phase contained in the inspection results request.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Recording Inspection Results in the PI Sheet Figure 179: Recording Inspection Results in the PI Sheet If the control recipe contains an inspection results request. 2005/Q2 . By double-clicking this pushbutton. the Record inspection results pushbutton is displayed in the PI sheet. you can navigate to inspection results recording of QM.

You can use the inspection results for batch specification by automatically copying them to the characteristics of the batch produced. you can carry out quality inspections as in-process inspections or as goods receipt inspections. The inspection results are recorded in the inspection lot for the assigned inspection characteristics.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Specification of Batches Produced Figure 180: Specification of Batches Produced In this example. If the product is to be handled in batches. All rights reserved. 717 . Integration with Quality Management: Topic Summary In production. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. inspection results can be used for a usage decision or inspection point completion by automatically copying them to the class characteristics of the batch produced. a quality inspection is planned for operation "Mixing".

All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 718 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. .

you will carry out inspection results recording from ECC Quality Management and then you will record inspection results from within the PI sheet. You will make sure that the quality inspection results in the batches produced are being valuated. Which inspection type has been assigned to the material? _____________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. Display the inspection data. you will be able to: • Explain the following master data: inspection type. material specification • Create an inspection lot • Describe scenarios of in-process quality inspection • Perform inspection results recording by using the corresponding transaction of ECC Quality Management • Perform an inspection results recording from the PI sheet • Check the specification of batches produced Business Example You will get an overview of the master data that needs to be maintained for in-process quality inspection. 719 . Task 1: 1. All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Exercise 43: Integration with Quality Management Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. You will learn about the function of an inspection lot. You will get an overview of possible scenarios of in-process quality inspections in PP-PI. You will test the function of an in-process quality inspection in two different scenarios: First. inspection characteristics. Display the Quality Management view for material T-HTB2## in plant 1100.

Which function does this inspection type have? 4. Go to the Classification view. Display the material specification for material T-HTB2##. recipe 10. Continued on next page 720 © 2006 SAP AG. 2. Inspection characteristics for an in-process quality inspection have been maintained for phase 320. 2005/Q2 . Write down the inspection characteristics: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Task 3: 1. SCM340 Which class of class type 023 Batch has been assigned to the material? ______________________________________________________ Which characteristics have been allocated to the class? ______________________________________________________ Task 2: 1.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP 3. Display the operation overview of your master recipe T-TAB##. All rights reserved.

Write down the inspection lot number: ______________________________________________________ Task 5: 1. Which function does this assignment have? Task 4: 1. Which system status has been set with regard to an in-process quality inspection when you released the order? 3. Display the number of the assigned inspection lot on the Assignment order header screen. Access your current process order for material T-HTB2## in the display mode. Describe the various scenarios of in-process quality inspection in PP-PI. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2. 721 .SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management 2. Which QM master inspection characteristic has been assigned to the batch characteristic of the material? 3.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Task 6: Scenario: Inspection results recording by using the corresponding transaction of ECC Quality Management 1. 2. Enter results for an inspection point. Task 7: 1. Display the batch classification data. All rights reserved. point as the inspection point identification. Enter the following inspection results in the characteristic overview: Water content: 1. 4. 3. Access results recording via the worklist for quality inspection. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Write down the active ingredient content: ________________________________ Continued on next page 722 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter the material number to select your inspection lot. Take a look at the inspection operation and inspection characteristic structure of your inspection lot. 2005/Q2 .1 % Active ingredient content: 98 % Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save your inspection results. Enter 1st insp. 2. Display your batch for material T-HTB2##.

Maintain phase 310.1 % Active ingredient content: 97 % Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save your inspection results.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Task 8: Scenario: Jumping to inspection results recording from the PI sheet. Note: You can use a hyperlink or function call to display the instructions for inspection preparation. Maintain phase 320. Task 9: Select the process messages that have been created by maintaining the PI sheet in the message monitor and send them. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Write down the active ingredient content: ________________________________ 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Display your batch for material T-HTB2## again. 723 . Exit the PI sheet. 2. 3. 2. Perform results recording. Display the batch classification data. All rights reserved. Task 10: 1. Enter the following inspection results in the characteristic overview: Water content: 1. 1. Maintain the other steps in the PI sheet. the instruction is displayed in a separate frame within the PI sheet. On the initial screen of inspection point recording. Now maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Laboratory for your order. In the first case. choose inspection point identification 2nd inspection point.

a) Logistics → Production .Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Solution 43: Integration with Quality Management Task 1: 1. Display the inspection data. Enter Choose plant 1100. for Production Order 3. see the page “„In-Process Inspection: Inspection Lot” in your participant handbook. For more information. Enter 2. Which class of class type 023 Batch has been assigned to the material? ______________________________________________________ Which characteristics have been allocated to the class? Continued on next page 724 © 2006 SAP AG. Which function does this inspection type have? Answer: The inspection type enables you to create an inspection lot for in-process quality inspection.Process → Master Data → Material Master → Material → Display → Display Current Material: T-HTB2## Enter Choose Quality Management. Which inspection type has been assigned to the material? _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Insp. All rights reserved. setup. 4. Display the Quality Management view for material T-HTB2## in plant 1100. 2005/Q2 . Go to the Classification view. InspType: 03 In-Process Insp.

The operation overview appears. Display the material specification for material T-HTB2##. a) Logistics → Production . Write down the inspection characteristics: _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) Choose Enter. a) (…) → Material Master → Environment → QM Maintenance Functions → Display Material Specification Material: T-HTB2## Enter Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Display the operation overview of your master recipe T-TAB##.Process → Master Data → Master Recipes → Recipe and Material List → Display Recipe group: T-TAB##. 725 . recipe 10. Class: N-005 Tablet characteristics Characteristic: Active ingredient content Task 2: 1. Recipe: 10 2. Master inspection characteristics: N-200 Water content N-300 Active ingredient content Task 3: 1.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management ______________________________________________________ a) Classification view Choose class type 023 Batch. Inspection characteristics for an in-process quality inspection have been maintained for phase 320. Select the line for phase 320 and choose the Inspection characteristic icon in the toolbar at the bottom of the screen.

Display the number of the assigned inspection lot on the Assignment order header screen. Describe the various scenarios of in-process quality inspection in PP-PI. 2005/Q2 . Write down the inspection lot number. 3. SCM340 Which QM master inspection characteristic has been assigned to the batch characteristic of the material? Answer: The QM master inspection characteristic N-300 Active ingredient content has been assigned to batch characteristic N-006 Active ingredient content. Which function does this assignment have? Answer: The inspection results for the QM characteristic are automatically used to assign a value to the class characteristics of the batch produced. a) 2. Task 4: 1. Access your current process order for material T-HTB2## in the display mode. Task 5: 1. (…) Process Order → Display Which system status has been set with regard to an in-process quality inspection when you released the order? Answer: ILAS Inspection lot assigned 3. All rights reserved. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 726 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP 2. Write down the inspection lot number: ______________________________________________________ a) Choose the Assignments tab in the order header.

All rights reserved. a) The Inspection Point screen appears. 3. The system selects your inspection lot for material T-HTB2## and displays the relevant elements in a tree hierarchy. Enter 1st insp.1 % Active ingredient content: 98 % Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Enter the following inspection results in the characteristic overview: Water content: 1.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management ____________________________________________________________ a) For information on the scenarios of in-process quality inspection. see the page “„In-Process Inspection: Scenarios” in your participant handbook. a) Logistics → Quality Management → Quality Inspection → Worklist → Results Recording Material: T-HTB2## Execute (F8) icon 2. Take a look at the inspection operation and inspection characteristic structure of your inspection lot. Enter results for an inspection point. Enter the material number to select your inspection lot. 727 . point as the inspection point identification. Task 6: Scenario: Inspection results recording by using the corresponding transaction of ECC Quality Management 1. a) Inspection point: Identification: 1st inspection point 4. Access results recording via the worklist for quality inspection.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save your inspection results. Maintain phase 310. a) (…) → Material Master → Batch → Display Material: T-HTB2## Batch: Batch number (if required. Task 7: 1. 2005/Q2 . 1. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Write down the active ingredient content: ________________________________ a) Choose the Classification tab. a) Choose Enter. The inspection result you have recorded for the active ingredient content is used as the value for the batch characteristic. All rights reserved.1 % Active ingredient content: 98 % Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save your inspection results. Now maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Laboratory for your order. Active ingredient content: 98 % Task 8: Scenario: Jumping to inspection results recording from the PI sheet. Enter the following inspection results: Water content: 1. Continued on next page 728 © 2006 SAP AG. The characteristics overview appears. use F4 to select) Enter 2. Display your batch for material T-HTB2##. Display the batch classification data.

3.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Note: You can use a hyperlink or function call to display the instructions for inspection preparation. Perform results recording. All rights reserved. Enter the following inspection results in the characteristic overview: Water content: 1.1 % Active ingredient content: 97 % Choose Enter to confirm your entries and save your inspection results. Exit the PI sheet. the instruction is displayed in a separate frame within the PI sheet. a) 2. In the first case. a) Choose Inspection Results Recording.1 % Active ingredient content: 97 % Choose Enter to confirm your entries. No further details required Maintain phase 320. 729 . Save your inspection results. Maintain the other steps in the PI sheet. Enter the following inspection results: Water content: 1. The characteristics overview appears. On the initial screen of inspection point recording. Identification: 2nd inspection point Choose Enter. choose inspection point identification 2nd inspection point. The inspection characteristics must have status 5 Processing completed. a) No further details required Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Display the batch classification data. What do you notice? _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Write down the active ingredient content: ________________________________ a) Choose the Classification tab. Task 10: 1. The inspection result you have recorded for the active ingredient content is used as the value for the batch characteristic. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 . a) (…) → Material Master → Batch → Display Material: T-HTB2## Batch: Batch number (if required. use F4 to select) Enter 2. Display your batch for material T-HTB2## again. Active ingredient content: 97 % 730 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Task 9: Select the process messages that have been created by maintaining the PI sheet in the message monitor and send them.

maintain phases 410 and 420. Task 2: In a second session. Task 3: Maintain your PI sheet further. the goods movements for the process order. Carry out material reconciliation for your order by choosing the relevant function key. Maintain phase 430. 731 .SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Exercise 44: Material Reconciliation Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. Report a produced quantity of 100 000 PC and execute your signature to confirm the entry. First. Task 1: Maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Tablet press for your order. Note: Message category PROD results in a goods receipt posting for the batch of material T-HTB2## produced. select the process messages that the system created while you maintained the current PI sheet and send them. 1. you can ensure that there are no invalid quantity inconsistencies with regard to the materials involved in the process. The basis for material reconciliation is. you will be able to: • Perform a material reconciliation Business Example Using the Material reconciliation function. All rights reserved. 2. for example. You will get an overview of the information that material reconciliation provides. After all goods movements have been made for your process order you will call up the material reconciliation function for your order in your last PI sheet. Caution: Do not maintain the PI sheet any further for the time being. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. The general data about the process order is displayed in the material reconciliation header. 1.

. All rights reserved. .).. Below the legend. Your material components should have status Material OK. the goods receipt quantities for your product T-HTB2## (100 000 PC) and the results of reconciliation for your four material components. 2005/Q2 . 732 © 2006 SAP AG. material movements. movements (F6) icon. To display detail information on the components (inspection formula. 4 materials OK / 0 materials not OK A legend below the header explains the different icons. For information on the goods movements of the product.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 It contains. double-click the corresponding line in the list. 2. choose the Header mat. for example. Hint: You do not necessarily need to maintain the PI sheet any further. a list with the material components is displayed.

for example. Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Report a produced quantity of 100 000 PC and execute your signature to confirm the entry. select the process messages that the system created while you maintained the current PI sheet and send them. First. Carry out material reconciliation for your order by choosing the relevant function key. . All rights reserved. a) No further details required Task 2: In a second session.. a) 2. maintain phases 410 and 420.). a list with the material components is displayed. It contains. Task 3: Maintain your PI sheet further.. double-click the corresponding line in the list. No further details required Maintain phase 430. To display detail information on the components (inspection formula. 1. Note: Message category PROD results in a goods receipt posting for the batch of material T-HTB2## produced. the goods receipt quantities for your product T-HTB2## (100 000 PC) and the results of reconciliation for your four material components. Below the legend. 1.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Solution 44: Material Reconciliation Task 1: Maintain the PI sheet for control recipe destination Tablet press for your order. material movements. Caution: Do not maintain the PI sheet any further for the time being. The general data about the process order is displayed in the material reconciliation header. 733 . Your material components should have status Material OK. 4 materials OK / 0 materials not OK A legend below the header explains the different icons.

2005/Q2 .Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 For information on the goods movements of the product. movements (F6) icon. a) No further details required 2. Hint: You do not necessarily need to maintain the PI sheet any further. choose the Header mat. a) 734 No further details required © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

735 . All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Integration with Quality Management Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Outline the main steps that must be followed in master data maintenance to carry out an in-process quality inspection • Describe the functions of inspection lots and create an inspection lot for in-process quality inspection • Describe possible scenarios of an in-process quality inspection • Carry out in-process quality inspections with batch value assignment 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. All rights reserved. 736 © 2006 SAP AG. you have to guarantee that all quality-relevant data about the manufacturing process of a batch can be compiled and archived in a batch record. you will be able to: • • • Describe the structure and process of editing a batch record Explain the status profile and version management for batch records Explain how you can influence batch status management and the usage decision for an inspection lot Business Example You are a member of the SAP project team in a pharmaceutical company.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the batch record function. To comply with legal requirements. you can define that as a prerequisite for order archiving and deletion a batch record must be created and approved. Batch Record Figure 181: Process Order Completion: Batch Record When setting up the system for production in compliance with GMP. you will get an overview of the functions available in process data documentation for the creation of batch records in the ECC System. 2005/Q2 . To be able to do so.

and processing of batch records comply with international standards that are laid down in the guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) for the pharmaceutical and food industries. © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. you can archive the following records: • Order records: – • They contain all quality-relevant ECC data collected around a process order.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record Process Data Documentation Figure 182: Process Data Documentation Process data documentation is part of the Production Planning for Process Industries (PP-PI) component. You can use it to create lists of quality-relevant data and write them to an optical archive. contents. 737 . Batch records: – – 2005/Q2 They contain all quality-relevant data on the production of a batch. The structure. In process data documentation.

the Batch record required indicator must have been set in the order types of the process orders in question. In this way. you can create. optically archive. you comply with one of the main requirements laid down in the guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) for the pharmaceutical industry. 2005/Q2 . To be able to create a batch record for a batch. All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Batch Record Figure 183: Batch Record In the Production Planning for Process Industries (PP-PI) application component in the ECC System. Batch Record: Structure Figure 184: Batch Record: Structure 738 © 2006 SAP AG. and approve batch records to document the production and processing of your batches.

the PI sheets of the process orders. A history documents older versions that became invalid when the batch record was changed or added to after it had been approved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record A batch record consists of a current. All rights reserved. the batch record version can contain all of the following: • • • • • • • One document for the table of contents and the version data of the batch record respectively One document in which the deviations that occurred during batch processing are listed Documents for the following ECC objects: All process orders to which the batch has been assigned. or labels The comments entered for the version The digital signatures executed during approval Batch Record Processing Figure 185: Batch Record Processing 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. the material lists of these process orders. All versions are managed in the header record of the batch record along with their statuses. all inspection lots for the batch One document for user-defined data in which you can combine further ECC data according to your company's requirements One attachment with archive files from external systems. At most. 739 . valid version and possibly a history. raw data from the process control system. the process messages for the process orders.

All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Status and Versions of a Batch Record Figure 186: Status and Versions of a Batch Record Batch Status and Usage Decision Figure 187: Batch Status and Usage Decision 740 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

you can create. All rights reserved. In this way.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record If required. you can specify in the material master (Work Scheduling view) that the following transactions can only be carried out for certain materials after the batch record has been approved: • • Making the usage decision for the incoming inspection lot of the batch Changing the batch status from Restricted to Unrestricted Batch Record: Summary In the Production Planning for Process Industries (PP-PI) application component in the ECC System. you comply with one of the main requirements laid down in the guidelines on Good Manufacturing Practices (GMP) for the pharmaceutical industry. and approve batch records to document the production and processing of your batches. optically archive. 741 . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 742 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. . All rights reserved.

for example. You will then generate a batch record and display. Describe the function of process data documentation. Describe the structure and content of a batch record. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. and usual procedure for processing a batch record. the lists of ECC data. You will also become familiar with the status profile and version management of a batch record. 743 . Which records can be generated and archived in process data documentation? What data do these records contain? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 2: 1. You will become familiar with the structure. you will be able to: • Explain the structure and content of a batch record • Describe batch record processing • Explain the structure and content of a batch record • Generate and display a batch record Business Example You will become familiar with the function of process data documentation. contents.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record Exercise 45: Batch Record Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise. All rights reserved. Task 1: 1.

Explain the status profile and version management for batch records. Which status was set to require the creation of a batch record? Status: ________________________________________________ 4. 2. Outline the typical process of batch record creation. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 4: 1. Which batch number was assigned for product T-HTB2## in the order? Write down the batch number: __________________________ 3. 2005/Q2 . What effect does this status have on further order processing? Continued on next page 744 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 5: 1.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Task 3: 1. you processed a process order for the production of material T-HTB2## by means of four PI sheets. In the previous topics. Display this process order.

Process messages . Which status does the batch record have at this time? ______________________________________________________ 3. As deviations the system lists. Generate the batch record for the batch of material T-HTB2##.Material list . the values outside of the tolerances entered in the PI sheet. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Based on which Customizing setting was this status set? ______________________________________________________ Task 6: 1. 745 . Display the print lists for the following ECC objects by choosing the corresponding context menu: .Process order .PI sheet .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ 5. 2. Display the batch record for the batch. All rights reserved. for example.Inspection lot 4. Task 7: 1. Switch to the change mode in the batch record and carry out deviation recording.

___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page 746 © 2006 SAP AG. see the page Process Data Documentation in your participant handbook. Describe the function of process data documentation. 2005/Q2 . see the page Batch Record: Structure in your participant handbook. Task 2: 1. All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Solution 45: Batch Record Task 1: 1. Describe the structure and content of a batch record. Outline the typical process of batch record creation. Task 3: 1. Which records can be generated and archived in process data documentation? What data do these records contain? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) To answer these questions. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) To answer this question.

747 . choose the Goods receipt tab. Task 4: 1. What effect does this status have on further order processing? Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. a) 2.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) To answer this question. Task 5: 1. In the previous topics. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a) To answer this question. All rights reserved. Which status was set to require the creation of a batch record? Status: ________________________________________________ a) Choose the Status icon in the status line. On the order header. see the page Batch Record Processing in your participant handbook. see the page Status and Versions of a Batch Record in your participant handbook. Status: BRRQ Batch record required 4. (…) Process Order → Display Which batch number was assigned for product T-HTB2## in the order? Write down the batch number: __________________________ a) 3. Display this process order. Explain the status profile and version management for batch records. you processed a process order for the production of material T-HTB2## by means of four PI sheets.

Batch: batch number Material number: T-HTB2## Plant: 1100 X Generate Batch Record → Execute Or choose Generate worklist (F8).Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ a) 5. Position the cursor on the batch number and choose Batch Record. the Batch record required indicator was set. The order cannot be archived for the produced batch until a batch record has been created. The Batch Record: Create Worklist screen appears and the system issues the following message: Batch record generated. a) Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Tools → Process Data Document → Batch Record The Batch Record: Create Worklist screen appears. Task 6: 1. 2005/Q2 . Generate the batch record for the batch of material T-HTB2##. All rights reserved. Based on which Customizing setting was this status set? ______________________________________________________ a) In the order type-dependent parameters for your order type PO##. The Generate Batch Record screen appears. Continued on next page 748 © 2006 SAP AG.

749 . The Display Batch Record screen appears. Which status does the batch record have at this time? ______________________________________________________ a) 3. All rights reserved.PI sheet Continued on next page 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 2.Process messages .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record Task 7: 1. Display the batch record for the batch.Material list . a) On the Batch Record: Create Worklist screen. System status: Batch record created Display the print lists for the following ECC objects by choosing the corresponding context menu: . Or choose Generate worklist (F8). choose: Batch: batch number Material number: T-HTB2## Plant: 1100 X Display/change Batch Record → Execute.Process order .

the values outside of the tolerances entered in the PI sheet. Display the data for the PI sheets: Position the cursor on the number of a PI sheet and click the right mouse button. In the context menu. Hint: A special layout is used to display PI sheets for batch records.Inspection lot a) Expand the entire tree structure for the batch record. The context menu appears. All rights reserved. a) Choose the Switch Between Change Mode and Display Mode icon. Display the data for the material list: Position the cursor on Material list and click the right mouse button. In the context menu. Switch to the change mode in the batch record and carry out deviation recording. In the context menu. Display the data for the process order: Position the cursor on the process order number and click the right mouse button. Choose Deviations. choose Display print preview. 4. The context menu appears. choose Display print preview. The context menu appears. In the context menu. choose Display print preview. for example. Display the data for the inspection lot: Position the cursor on the inspection lot number and click the right mouse button. 750 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 . choose Display print preview. Display the data for the process messages: Position the cursor on Process messages and click the right mouse button. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. 2005/Q2 . In the context menu. As deviations the system lists. choose Display print preview.

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Record Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure and process of editing a batch record • Explain the status profile and version management for batch records • Explain how you can influence batch status management and the usage decision for an inspection lot 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 751 .

Uses of the Batch Derivation Figure 188: Uses of the Batch Derivation 752 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the batch derivation function. 2005/Q2 . Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • Describe how you can use batch derivation to transfer values from batch attributes in the batch where-used list for component batches to batches of a finished product Name the settings required in Customizing and in the application Business Example You want to use the batch derivation function to transfer batch master data and classification data from component batches that went into batches you produced.

In the standard system you cannot make derivations in connection with collective orders. You maintain the receiver-sender relationships in the strategy records of the batch derivation application or in the BOM for selected BOM items. or display. A) A component can be a sender and a receiver (component B) To be able to derive batch data. you must have set up the batch where-used list. All rights reserved. D. 753 . which means that only those component batches are used that went into the batch produced. offer for selection. The BaWU synchron. It always applies that: • • • Component batches can be senders of data (components B.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation You can use batch derivation to transfer. G) Produced batches can be receivers of data (components B.postng indicator must be set in the Customizing of the batch where-used list. because the batch where-used list cannot evaluate the links. Restrictions: • • It is not possible to transfer from a produced batch to a component batch. The batch derivation is performed with the help of the condition technique. The derivation functions along the batch where-used list. both existing and planned goods movements are considered. Pull Derivation / Push Derivation Figure 189: Pull Derivation / Push Derivation 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. batch master data and classification data from component batches that went into batches you produced. In the evaluation of the batch where-used list.

n senders) Push derivation (n receivers. All rights reserved. the values are always transferred from the component to the product .7 and is available from release 4. However.6c.that is. • • • When posting goods receipts for manufacturing orders When releasing process and production orders When making the usage decision The derivation can also be performed before the archiving and approval of the batch record. synchronous with the direction of the quantity flow: • • Pull derivation (1 receiver. It is recommended to perform the batch derivation as late as possible. 2005/Q2 . The derivation can be called up and used at fixed points in all areas of Logistics. 754 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Derivation direction: Depending on the actual case. 1 sender) Callup Points of the Batch Derivation Figure 190: Callup Points of the Batch Derivation The batch derivation function is in the SAP Standard System from release 4. it makes sense to start the derivation of the charge data from a component or a product.

This request can be represented by a push derivation. independently of a fixed callup point. you can specify that derivations can be performed manually. Application Example: Filling Figure 191: Application Example: Filling The derivation of batch data can be used in the following scenarios. A user exit (EXIT_SAPLDRVN_00) or the BADI DERIVATION are available for you to determine the sender. If the bulk batch is specified. whereby the specifications of a batch are transferred to a number of receiver batches. 755 . among others: • • 2005/Q2 Filling: A batch of a material is produced and filled into different containers before the results of the quality inspection are available. All rights reserved. You start the manual derivation with a transaction (DVMAN) that is located in the SAP Standard Menu of the batch management in the Enterprise release. these results are to be transferred to the container batches. It is also possible to define user-specific callup points for derivations. © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Along with the derivation callup points named along the supply chain.

The derivation can also be used to check whether the expiry date on the packing is not after the date on the incoming components. The label printing for packing the final product is usually done before the expiry date can be determined via the goods receipt from production. The derivation can be used to determine the expiry date before the goods receipt from production and thus printed on the packing label. All rights reserved. © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Application Example: Pick and Pack Activities Figure 192: Application Example: Pick and Pack Activities The derivation of batch data can be used in the following scenarios. 2005/Q2 . among others: • • 756 Pick and pack activities: The expiry data of the unpacked material is to be transferred to the packed material.

SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Batch Derivation Customizing . All rights reserved.Condition Technique Figure 193: Batch Derivation Customizing . 757 .Condition Technique 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

or the values. By maintaining the condition technique you define which criteria the system uses to create condition records for the batch derivations.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 To use the Derivations component. Static derivation: In a static derivation. release). The derivation is saved. but the receiver batch(es) are not automatically changed. you must make the following settings in sequence in Customizing: • • • • Activate the derivation. The derivation is simulated to check the batch attributes. © 2006 SAP AG. The window also allows you to interrupt the operation that triggered the derivation (for example. You can also branch from this window to the detailed display of the derivation. you can alternatively start a report to activate the batch derivation. This window informs you that there has been a derivation and whether any errors or warnings appeared. In the static derivation there is a transfer of the determined attributes of the sender batch(es) to the receiver batch(es). Specify the derivation callup points and the derivation: – – – 758 Dynamic derivation for simulation: In the dynamic derivation there is no transfer of attributes to the receiver batch(es). For releases before 4.7. The result of the derivation. 2005/Q2 . save. Maintain the number ranges for the derivation numbers and condition record numbers for the number range objects DRVNO (derivation number) and KONR (condition record number). Control derivation window: You use this field to control whether the result of the derivation is displayed in a separate window. for example. are only displayed. All rights reserved. the values are transferred from sender batches to receiver batches in accordance with the receiver-sender relationships and the rules of the derivation.

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Condition Record Maintenance for Receivers Figure 194: Condition Record Maintenance for Receivers You can maintain the condition records for receivers and senders in the derivation application. © 2006 SAP AG. Steps in batch where-used list: With this entry you can limit the number of steps that are triggered in the batch where-used list within a top-down analysis in the batch derivation. Orders and purchase orders are not counted here. The condition records are maintained separately for receiver and sender materials. • • • • 2005/Q2 Sender field empty: You can use this setting to control whether the system outputs a warning or error message if the attribute being transferred does not have a value. To maintain the receiver condition records in the derivation application (transaction DVR1). You set the Save messages indicator to record the messages. you select the condition type defined in Customizing or a suitable key combination and store rules for the derivation for each condition record and assigned field or charge characteristic. 759 . Overwrite receiver: With this setting you specify whether or not a warning or error message is output before attribute values are overwritten. or you can maintain them using the condition record maintenance of the BOMs.

the manufacturing date (HSDAT or a batch characteristic defined as an object characteristic ZLOBM_HSDAT). the usage decision code (LOBM_UDCODE) or a freely definable characteristic (such as ZBM_LAND). To delete condition records. All rights reserved. If you set the push derivation indicator. such as material number. you can select the expiry date (field: VFDAT or LOBM_VFDAT). you set the deletion indicator. 2005/Q2 . In the first case you enter a material number for the material that will function as the receiver. material type or receiver and sender material.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Condition Record Maintenance for Senders Figure 195: Condition Record Maintenance for Senders To maintain the sender condition records (transaction DVS1). the system performs a push derivation. The indicator can only be set for condition records for which the sender is not also the receiver. you select the condition type defined in Customizing or a suitable key combination. 760 © 2006 SAP AG. In the data maintenance you store all the fields (batch master record) or batch characteristics that are to be transferred automatically from the sender to the receiver. For example. and material type of sender.

to transfer different attributes of the same sender for different BOMs when manufacturing a header material. The condition record maintenance on the BOM basis enables you to differentiate the attributes being transferred when you are using a material in different manufacturing BOMs. while on the other hand you want to exclude the transfer of an attribute for this BOM item within this BOM. All rights reserved. On the one hand. for example. it may be necessary. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. A prerequisite is that both a sender and receiver search profile must be assigned to the derivation callup point in Customizing. 761 .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Condition Record Maintenance for the BOM Figure 196: Condition Record Maintenance for the BOM You can use the condition record maintenance for BOMs (transaction DVCO) to maintain receiver and sender condition records at the same time.

you can derive onto a by-product or co-product. To create the receiver and sender relationships. which you want to assign to the receiver and sender(s). 2005/Q2 . You use drag and drop from the attribute area to transfer the attributes to the receivers and senders. From the tree structure of the selection area. Derivation Monitor Figure 197: Derivation Monitor 762 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Steps for condition maintenance using BOMs: • • • • Select the appropriate BOM alternative and usage for a derivation callup point and the header material. For the derivation callup points Release process/production order and Goods receipt for process/production order. you select appropriate attributes in the attribute pool . In the selection area. All rights reserved. you can double-click on the receiver material in the detail area to display the rules on which the derivation is based. the header material of the BOM and all the components and there related characteristics are listed.meaning fields and characteristics.

Then the status changes: OK. • • • • You can enter the derivation monitor from the receiver material and its batches or from the sender material and its batches. offer for selection. Warning. it can have one of the following three statuses: • Derivation OK: The derivation was performed without any errors. warning and error messages. or display. Selection result in the derivation monitor (2): • The selection result displays the header information for the derivation .SCM340 Lesson: Batch Derivation Initial screen of the derivation monitor (1): You can use the derivation monitor to evaluate derivations on the basis of different criteria.the receiver material. performed with warning You can manually confirm a non-validated derivation in the derivation monitor. Batch Derivation: Summary You can use batch derivation to transfer. All rights reserved. manually confirmed. data change. batch master data and classification data from component batches that went into batches you produced. the derived attributes. You have the option of selecting derivations for batches after their expiry or manufacturing dates. the derivation number with the callup point and status of the derivation. When a derivation is performed for the first time. the creation date. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. You can also restrict the selection by choosing the derivation callup point. and information. (data change) manually confirmed. You can use the derivation status to search for all the derivations in which errors or warnings occurred. You can save the criteria on which you want to base your search as variants. Error (data change) manually confirmed. or by entering the derivation number(s). 763 .

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit 11: Production in Compliance with GMP SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe how you can use batch derivation to transfer values from batch attributes in the batch where-used list for component batches to batches of a finished product • Name the settings required in Customizing and in the application 764 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved.SCM340 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP • Give a definition for digital signatures and describe their functions and processing • Name the applications using digital signatures in the ECC System • Execute a digital signature • Find and display digital signatures • Define a signature strategy and describe how it is applied • Create approved process orders • Change approved process orders • Use the picking function to pack material components into handling units • Carry out a completeness check to identify the material components staged • Perform quantity reconciliation for the materials involved in the process • Outline the main steps that must be followed in master data maintenance to carry out an in-process quality inspection • Describe the functions of inspection lots and create an inspection lot for in-process quality inspection • Describe possible scenarios of an in-process quality inspection • Carry out in-process quality inspections with batch value assignment • Describe the structure and process of editing a batch record • Explain the status profile and version management for batch records • Explain how you can influence batch status management and the usage decision for an inspection lot • Describe how you can use batch derivation to transfer values from batch attributes in the batch where-used list for component batches to batches of a finished product • Name the settings required in Customizing and in the application 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 765 .

2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit Summary 766 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG.

All rights reserved. 2. Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP. What do the material identification functions do? 5. 767 . 6. What parts can the version of a batch record contain? © 2006 SAP AG. What does the digital signature do? 3. How do you realize the use of approved process orders? 4. How can the integration of batch management and quality management be used in relation to the value assignment to batches produced.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1.

All rights reserved.Test Your Knowledge 7. 2005/Q2 . 768 SCM340 What can you use the functions of batch derivation for? © 2006 SAP AG.

769 . A process order can be approved by selecting an approved recipe when creating the process order or by approving the order individually after it has been created. and time. 4. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 3. What do the material identification functions do? Answer: You can use the material identification functions to check the completeness and sequence of the material components staged. The digital signature ensures that a user is uniquely identified and that the user name is documented together with the signed transaction. date. How do you realize the use of approved process orders? Answer: You can specify that process orders of a specific order type have to be approved. and cannot be forged. Answer: • • • • • • Digital signature Approved master recipes and inspection plans Approved process orders Material identification and material reconciliation Integration with quality management Batch management – – 2. All rights reserved. Batch record Batch where-used list What does the digital signature do? Answer: You can specify that a user must execute a digital signature to be able to carry out particular business transactions in the ECC System. Name the functions for realizing production in compliance with GMP.SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Answers 1.

What parts can the version of a batch record contain? Answer: At most. the PI sheets of the process orders. all inspection lots for the batch One document for user-defined data in which you can combine further ECC data according to your company's requirements One attachment with archive files from external systems.Test Your Knowledge 5. 770 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . SCM340 How can the integration of batch management and quality management be used in relation to the value assignment to batches produced. One document for the table of contents and version data of the batch record One document in which the deviations that occurred during batch processing are listed Documents for the following ECC objects: All process orders to which the batch has been assigned. Answer: You can use the inspection results of quality management for batch value assignment by automatically copying them to the characteristics of the batch produced. batch master data and classification data from component batches that went into batches you produced. the material lists of these process orders. 6. or labels The comments entered for the version The digital signatures executed during approval What can you use the functions of batch derivation for? Answer: You can use batch derivation to transfer. All rights reserved. raw data from the process control system. the process messages for the process orders. or display. the batch record version can contain all of the following: • • • • • • • 7. offer for selection.

............. and which functions are carried out. you will be able to: • • • Describe the options for production planning with SAP Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP ECC System......................... All rights reserved............................sample scenarios: – Multilevel MRP in ECC – Planning for make-to-order production in ECC SCM(APO) as a planning tool Planning and conversion of planned orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System – – Individual conversion of planned order into process order Time-oriented collective conversion Unit Objectives After completing this unit..... Unit Contents Lesson: Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements ......... 771 .........Unit 12 Appendix: Integration with Production Planning Unit Overview Topics: • • • • Overview of planning functions and planning elements (ECC and SCM(APO)) Planning and conversion of planned orders in the SAP ECC System ................................. and which functions are carried out for this Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP APO System and converted to process orders........776 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System ..........792 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.. converted to process orders...772 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System ......

Cross-Application Process Flow (Recap. 2005/Q2 . 772 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • Describe the options for production planning with SAP Business Example You will get an overview of the planning levels preceding process manufacturing and of their functions and elements. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.) Figure 198: Cross-Application Process Flow (Recap.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Lesson: Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of SAP planning functions and elements.) Process order management represents a central part of a complex process chain ranging from a requirement (planned or customer requirement) through to the goods issue of finished products.

In addition. machine commitment). Such functions are costing. there are links and interfaces to ECC Quality Management. They are.SCM340 Lesson: Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements Process order management controls the entire process of in-house production of products. release. for example. integrated with the functions of capacity requirements planning. external laboratory information systems (LIMS). and inventory management. For other functions (such as scheduling. All rights reserved. however. execution. dependent on the production type. and process control systems. availability check. you can choose between the two SAP components. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. goods movements and settlement. and control are always carried out using ECC functions. material staging. confirmation. Process order execution is. costing. 773 . Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements Figure 199: Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements SAP solutions offer two solution approaches to the integration of manufacturing and planning Planning with the functions of the component SAP SCM (APO) Planning with the functions of the component SAP ECC Production preparation.

. production and process orders. goods receipt) and vice versa. Specific events lead to the transfer of data from ECC to SCM (APO) (release.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 The master and transaction data (planned orders. This creates planned orders and purchase requisitions in a defined. Planned orders can be created by material requirements planning (MRP) in ECC or in SCM with • Supply Network Planning (SNP) in APO. stocks. 2005/Q2 . • Production planning and detailed scheduling in APO (PP). 774 © 2006 SAP AG.. purchase orders. short-term period (production horizon) in the production plant. Sales orders are generally entered in ECC and then transferred to SCM (APO). purchase requisitions of stock transfers (distribution). .) are usually exchanged (mirrored) between the two SAP components through the “Core Interface” (CIF). planned orders (in-house production) and purchase requisitions (external procurement) are created for the relevant production plant. This allows for cross-plant planning in a long-term time horizon across the entire supply and procurement chain. confirmation. All rights reserved. purchase requisitions. Here.

775 .SCM340 Lesson: Overview of Planning Functions and Planning Elements Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the options for production planning with SAP 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the planning and conversion of planned orders in the SAP ECC System using two example scenarios. you will be able to: • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP ECC System. • • Multi-level MRP Planning with Make-to-Order Production Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson. converted to process orders. Sample Scenario 1: Multi-level MRP in ECC Figure 200: Sample Scenario 1: Multi-level MRP in ECC Your company produces packaged Cetepharm tablets: 776 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. and which functions are carried out for this Business Example You will first get an overview of MRP operations in the SAP ECC System. 2005/Q2 .

they are adjusted and in this way the demand program as well. your company chooses the planning strategy “Planning with final assembly”. 777 . All rights reserved. The Cetepharm-N packaged tablets have a multi-level BOM structure. it is used as the active ingredient for the Cetepharm tablet production. The components ECC and SCM(APO) support various planning strategies. The production takes place in 3 stages. manufacturers can quickly react to sales orders. Planning Strategy Figure 201: Planning Strategy A planning strategy represents business procedures for planning production quantities and dates using sales orders and planned independent requirements. If the sales orders are not covered by the planned independent requirements.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System For the Cetepharm tablet production. your company first manufactures acetylsalicylic acid. Together with other ingredients. The tablets are packaged into various sizes and quantities. To plan the production of the packaged Cetepharm-N tablets. In this way. Reasons for using this planning strategy: • • • A planned independent requirement drives the manufacturing process. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

a planned order is created. for which. multi-level planning plans a complete BOM structure. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved. a start date. If there is a shortage.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Multi-level MRP Figure 202: Multi-level MRP MRP analyzes the demand from sales orders and planned independent requirements. It consists of a suggested order quantity. a planned order is created to cover the relevant dependent requirements. dependent requirements are created. in turn. The following steps are carried out per material for MRP across the entire product structure: 778 • • • Checking requirement coverage Creating a planned order Determining dependent requirements • Entering the component in the planning file © 2006 SAP AG. If stock and the planned receipts are not enough to cover the demand. the requirements situation is analyzed. In this way. By exploding the bill of material of the planned order. and a finish date.

All rights reserved. requirements. • • • • • Changes that were made after the planning run are not visible.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Stock/Requirements List and MRP List Figure 203: Stock/Requirements List and MRP List You can evaluate the planning situation or the result of a planning run using the stock/requirements list or MRP list in the SAP ECC System. You can use individual or collective access for this. Therefore. © 2006 SAP AG. it always shows the current stock/requirements situation (stocks. and receipts). • 2005/Q2 Changes that were made after the planning run are visible immediately (refresh). Error messages are stored in a log. You can control whether an MRP list is to be created during the planning run. 779 . The MRP list represents the result of the last planning run and therefore has a static nature. The MRP list is divided into different planning segments. Changes between two planning runs are not displayed. The stock/requirements list is a dynamic list created by directly reading the MRP elements.

The component overview of the planned order provides information about the planned material components (dependent requirements). 780 © 2006 SAP AG. Structure of Planned Orders (ECC) Figure 204: Structure of Planned Orders (ECC) The planned requirements quantity and date of availability are defined in the planned order header. 2005/Q2 . it also contains the capacity and scheduling data. If the planned order was scheduled via the recipe. Above the list. User-specific settings enable you to tailor the lists according to your own personal needs. there is the header with the material number and material master details. You can convert individual planned orders to process orders from this list. The list contains the individual MRP elements and the corresponding available quantities. All rights reserved.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 The two lists have the same basic structure: • • • The MRP controller’s worklist is displayed to the left in the form of a tree (optional).

All rights reserved.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System In summary. production order) Recipe/routing scheduling Scheduling in PS and PM (*) To determine capacity requirements for planned orders you can also switch on lead time scheduling in MRP. 781 . 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Only lead time scheduling calculates operation-related dates and capacity requirements. a pegged requirement for capacity requirements planning The data source for the process order Scheduling in Production Planning (ECC) Figure 205: Scheduling in Production Planning (ECC) Production planning knows two scheduling methods that are used for different purposes and have different results: • • Planned order scheduling in MRP (only calculates basic dates) Lead time scheduling (calculates production dates based on basic dates). a planned order represents: • • • • The planned receipt of net requirements calculation to cover the requirements The source of the requirement of the dependent requirements Possibly. Lead time scheduling is used for: • • • Order scheduling (process order.

782 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . All rights reserved.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Planned Order Dates (ECC) Figure 206: Planned Order Dates (ECC) Planned orders have an order start date (OS). The planned opening date is the date on which a planned order should be converted into a purchase requisition or process order. and a planned opening date (PO). It is used as a selection criterion for the collective conversion. The lead time between the opening date and the order start date is to allow sufficient time for carrying out certain administrative steps that may be required. an order finish date (OF).

2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. The system determines whether in-house production or external procurement is required using the procurement type and other control elements (for example. 783 . special procurement key) defined in the material master record.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Planned Order Conversion (ECC) Figure 207: Planned Order Conversion (ECC) The MRP controller uses collective conversion to convert the planned orders of a product structure one after another along the time axis. Within the entire product structure. only those planned orders are offered for conversion whose planned opening dates are within an opening period to be defined. You can specify that collective conversion depends on the result of the material availability check (in the same way as order release).

MRP controllers (buyers) can convert planned orders generated in planning (and purchase requisitions to purchase orders) both in SAP(APO) and in SAP ECC. All rights reserved.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Order Creation with Planned Orders Figure 208: Order Creation with Planned Orders Planned orders are created in material requirements planning (ECC . 2005/Q2 . Inspection data is copied from the master recipe when an inspection lot is generated. The process order data is provided automatically through the conversion of planned orders.MRP) or in planning in SCM(APO) (APO . 784 © 2006 SAP AG. but not written in the process order.SNP).PP/DS or APO .

the planned order is deleted. The dependent requirements (material components) and capacity requirements that may exist are reallocated to the new process order. By changing an indicator. By converting a planned order to a process order. the planned order still exists and is fixed. In partial conversion. 785 . All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Conversion of Planned Orders to Process Orders (ECC) Figure 209: Conversion of Planned Orders to Process Orders (ECC) Planned orders can be converted completely or partially in individual or collective conversion in dialog mode. the dependent requirements are turned into a reservation.

786 © 2006 SAP AG. the dependent requirements are converted to reservations during planned order conversion. the reservation items are displayed in the form of the material list. the system creates a reservation for the required material components. When you manually create an order. In the process order. Material withdrawals for the order are carried out with reference to the reservation assigned. The reservations for the material components of the process order are assigned to the process order account. Reservations are taken into account in requirements determination of MRP. the system reads the BOM for the material.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Reservation Figure 210: Reservation Material reservations are created for all material components of type Stock material of a process order. The reservation items are contained in the corresponding stock/requirements lists as MRP elements. The requirements quantities of the reservation are reduced when the corresponding materials are withdrawn. For the order. Lists of reservations for the material or account assignment (process order) can be created. When you create a process order. All rights reserved. A reservation item is valid for a plant or storage location of a plant. 2005/Q2 .

The Make-to-order planning strategy is used to support the planning of the special formulation liquid fertilizer. This customers orders the fertilizer sporadically. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. it has a relatively short shelf life. Specialty Garden Products is the only customer that orders this product. In addition. All rights reserved. Most of the products are specially formulated for customers. 787 . depending on the season and weather conditions. One of your customers is a garden products distributor called Specialty Garden Products who sells a special formulation fertilizer. The fertilizer has high production costs.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Sample Scenario 2: Make-to-Order Production in ECC Figure 211: Sample Scenario 2: Make-to-Order Production in ECC Your company is a specialized chemical manufacturer.

for example. there are other variants of the make-to-order strategy which allow. The planning strategy represents the procedure used for planning and manufacturing a material. the sales order drives the production and procurement processes. 2005/Q2 . This is done to deliver products within a reasonable time after a sales order is entered. 788 © 2006 SAP AG. In addition. Make-to-Order Production: Key Material Master Settings Figure 213: Make-to-Order Production: Key Material Master Settings Strategy group 20: The strategy group is used to assign a planning strategy or a group of planning strategies to a material.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Make-to-Order Production Figure 212: Make-to-Order Production In a make-to-order environment. All rights reserved. certain levels in the BOM structure to be planned and produced using planned independent requirements.

789 . the system creates a separate planned order with lot-for-lot order quantity for the individual customer stock of the sales order.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Individual/collective requirement: This indicator controls whether or not individual customer requirements planning (make-to-order production) is used for dependent requirements. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. MRP in a Make-to-Order Environment (I) Figure 214: MRP in a Make-to-Order Environment (I) For each component with individual requirements. Planned orders created for different sales orders cannot be grouped together.

If you enter 1. In the example. two sales order stock segments are maintained for material Y. In the example. If you do not make an entry. 790 © 2006 SAP AG. No individual customer segments are created. You use the Individual/Collective indicator to specify this. The stock/requirements list shows two individual customer segments. You can find this indicator in the MRP4 view of the material master.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 MRP in a Make-to-Order Environment (II) Figure 215: MRP in a Make-to-Order Environment (II) Assume you are using the make-to-order production strategy for material X. material Z is planned using a static lot-sizing procedure (exact lot size). and MRP has been run. The 5 units in stock and the requirements are balanced against each other. you have entered two sales orders. If you enter 2. this indicates individual requirements. one for each sales order. This means that the component is being produced or procured for the same requirement. 2005/Q2 . not for any specific requirement). Suppose you want one or more components in the bill of material to be produced or procured for the same sales order. A separate segment is created for each requirement. this indicates that the component is planned in the same way as the product. All rights reserved. This means that the component is being produced or procured for several requirements (that is. this indicates collective requirements.

converted to process orders. and which functions are carried out for this 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP ECC System Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP ECC System. 791 . All rights reserved.

2005/Q2 . and which functions are carried out. All rights reserved. you will be able to: • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP APO System and converted to process orders. Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System Lesson Overview This lesson informs you about the planning and conversion of planned orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System. SCM(APO) as a Planning Tool Figure 216: SCM(APO) as a Planning Tool Instead of using SAP ECC MRP for material requirements planning. you can also use SAP SCM APO PP/DS. Business Example You will first get an overview of MRP operations in the SAP SCM(APO) system. 792 © 2006 SAP AG.

as the result of a planning run. Inventory management. global representation. highly-integrated solution for ECC. and order execution and control (Manufacturing Execution) take place outside SCM(APO). 793 . SAP SCM(APO) can be used to generate and change orders (planned. Master Data for Planning and Production Figure 217: Master Data for Planning and Production 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. legacy systems. production. Open standard interfaces enable a smooth integration of SAP Systems. The link between SCM(APO) and ECC can be obtained using Core Interface (CIF). for example.SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System SAP SCM (APO) is a planning tool. The data is stored on both sides (SCM(APO) und ECC). SAP SCM (APO) enables integrated. planning. in the ECC System. and monitoring of all processes in the logistics chain in detail. or process orders). sales order entry. SAP SCM(APO) is highly efficient with liveCache. an SAP technology for memory-resident data processing. and systems from other suppliers. All rights reserved.

794 © 2006 SAP AG.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Specific business operations for planning and shop floor control in ECC and in SCM (APO) are based on master data from Lifecycle Data Management. The Core Interface (CIF) allows the relevant ECC master data to be mapped onto the corresponding master data in SCM(APO). which are distinguished using their ATP category. 2005/Q2 . The ECC System is the leading system for the master data. All rights reserved. Both the initial transfer of data as well as the supply of changes made to data (change transfer) in SCM(APO) are achieved via the CIF. Figure 218: Transaction Data for Planning and Production The transaction data transferred from ECC and SCM(APO) is defined in an integration model in ECC. The master data objects from ECC and SCM(APO) are not identical. The master data transferred from ECC and SCM(APO) is defined in an integration model in ECC. Lifecycle data management is a key functional area in the mySAP Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) solution. All ECC transaction data is represented in SCM(APO) by orders.

SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System Benefits of Detailed Production Planning in SCM(APO) • • • • • • • • Detailed scheduling with simultaneous quantity and capacity planning (PP/DS) Material requirements planning to the time (hours. All rights reserved.. alternative resource selection. volume. activity. minutes).. piece Product View Figure 219: Product View The product view is a dynamic list that shows the current stock/requirements situation (planning situation for a specific product in a location). You can display and changeMRP elements. Individual planned orders can be converted to process orders. delays. also for dependent requirements Multi-level availability check of materials and capacities (ATP) for sales orders Multi-level forward scheduling (pegging) Optimization algorithms during detailed scheduling (minimization of setup times. . It thus is a versatile and flexible tool with which you can carry out a range of functions. Interactive planning can be carried out in the change mode. 795 .) Campaign planning Dynamic exception messages (alerts) Capacity categories: time. setup costs. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG.

scheduled operations. Exceptional situations (alerts) are displayed dynamically and you can always navigate to the Alert Monitor. APO planned orders can be transferred to ECC.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 After you save the results. Further tab pages contain additional information. the new. All rights reserved. The basic structure of the product view contains a header with the product number at the top. You can personalize the display. and the lists with the individual MRP elements and the quantities available at the bottom of the screen. an optional overview tree to the left. It is possible to explicitly refresh the list if you want to display the current planning status again. up-to-date situation is shown. 796 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 . They only contain the basic dates and dependent requirements for all components (no matter whether they are APO-relevant or not). The ECC planned orders resulting from this do not contain production dates nor capacity requirements. Planned Order Conversion in SCM(APO) Figure 220: Planned Order Conversion in SCM(APO) APO planned orders contain all production dates and dispatched.

797 . you only set an indicator in the product view. The order continues to exist in SAP SCM(APO). 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. Partial conversion was not implemented. To convert a single planned order to a process order. Conversion of Planned Orders to Process Orders SCM(APO) Figure 221: Conversion of Planned Orders to Process Orders SCM(APO) APO planned orders can be converted in dialog mode in individual or collective conversion. This order takes on the production and operation dates determined in SCM(APO). If you set the conversion indicator in the APO planned order. Order and operation dates are taken over to the ECC process order. By changing an indicator. a process order is created in ECC. All rights reserved. all components are planned (in SCM(APO) or ECC).SCM340 Lesson: Planning and Conversion of Planned Orders in the SAP SCM(APO) System Based on these dependent requirements. the dependent requirements are turned into a reservation. APO planned orders should always be converted in SAP SCM(APO). The APO Core Interface assigns the order number of the process order created in ECC to the APO planned orderso that the APO planned order then appears as an APO process order.

All rights reserved.Unit 12: Appendix: Integration with Production Planning SCM340 Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP APO System and converted to process orders. 2005/Q2 . and which functions are carried out. 798 © 2006 SAP AG.

799 . converted to process orders. All rights reserved.SCM340 Unit Summary Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the options for production planning with SAP • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP ECC System. and which functions are carried out for this • Explain how planned orders are created in the SAP APO System and converted to process orders. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. and which functions are carried out.

2005/Q2 .Unit Summary 800 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

SCM340 Test Your Knowledge Test Your Knowledge 2005/Q2 1. 801 . 2. Name the two options for integrating manufacturing and planning. How can you evaluate the result of a planning run in the ECC System? 3. Where can the planning results be evaluated in the SAP SCM(APO) System? © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Name the two options for integrating manufacturing and planning. dependent on the production type. however. and control are always carried out using ECC functions. 802 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. Where can the planning results be evaluated in the SAP SCM(APO) System? Answer: You can evaluate the planning situation by using the product view in the SAP SCM(APO)System. Production preparation.Test Your Knowledge SCM340 Answers 1. 2005/Q2 . 3. They are. execution. Answer: • Planning with the functions of the component SAP SCM (APO) Planning with the functions of the component SAP ECC • 2. How can you evaluate the result of a planning run in the ECC System? Answer: You can evaluate the planning situation or the result of a planning run using the stock/requirements list or MRP list in the ECC System.

All rights reserved.SCM340 Course Summary Course Summary You should now be able to: • • • • • • 2005/Q2 Explain where process orders fit in within the Supply Chain Management Carry out the individual steps of process order management Use the main order management functions Make important system settings Take integration relationships into account Learn about further special functions by studying on your own © 2006 SAP AG. 803 .

All rights reserved.Course Summary 804 SCM340 © 2006 SAP AG. 2005/Q2 .

please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. All rights reserved. 2005/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. 805 . If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful